Report on the collections of natural history made in the Antarctic regions during the voyage of the “Southern Cross.”

geyys 
tj 


CZ, 
ty 
Z titi 
ty 
Vs 


Yee 


5. ©, BERRY 
JA5 WEST HIGHLAND AVENUE 
’ REDLANDS. CAL. 


Sehr. 24, AlG. 


PRESEN ED 


BY 


The Trustees 


THE BRITISH MUSEUM. 


SMITHSONIAN 
INSTITUTION 
LIBRARIES |f 


B4.2 
SA 
MoLL 
REPORT ON THE COLLECTIONS 


OF 


Neel  ELESTORY 


MADE IN THE ANTARCTIC REGIONS DURING 


THE VOYAGE OF THE 


“SOUTHERN CROSS.” 


LONDON: 
PRINTED BY ORDER OF THE TRUSTEES. 


SOLD BY 
LONGMANS & Co., 39 PATERNOSTER ROW, E.C. ; 
B. QUARITCH, 15 PICCADILLY, W.; DULAU & Co., 37 SOHO SQUARE, W. ; 
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & Co., CHARING CROSS ROAD, W.C. ; 
AND AT THE 


BRITISH MUSEUM (NATURAL HISTORY), CROMWELL ROAD, S8.W. 
1902. 


a 


— iri 


All rights reserved. £ ‘ 


ra . 
_ 


LONDON: 
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, 
DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E., AND GREAT WINDMILL STREET, W. 


ie vee BAL © ix. 


THE expedition of the ‘Southern Cross’ was fitted out by Sir George 
Newnes, Bart., in 1898. Everything that experience could suggest 
for an Antarctic Expedition was amply provided for by him, and 
it is certain that he spared no expense to render it successful. 

The scientific staff on board the ‘ Southern Cross’ appears to have 
been well chosen. Mr. Nicolai Hanson, the Zoologist, was an 
indefatigable collector and taxidermist, and Mr. Hugh Evans was an 
excellent Assistant-zoologist. They were supported by Lieut. 
Colbeck, Mr. Louis Bernacchi, Dr. Klovstad as the surgeon, and 
Mr. Anton Fougner; Mr. C. E. Borchgrevink was in command of 
the expedition. 

The ‘Southern Cross’ sailed from the Thames on the 22nd of 
August, 1898, touched at Madeira and St. Vincent, and reached 
Hobart Town on the 28th of November. After a fortnight spent in 
Tasmania, the ship sailed for Victoria Land on the 17th of December, 
and met with the first of the ice-pack on the 30th of the same month. 
The initial attempt to reach Victoria Land was not successful, 
and the result was that the ‘Southern Cross’ was hemmed in in the 
ice-pack for forty days, and was at last headed northwards and 
returned for a second attempt to penetrate to Cape Adare, the 
future winter residence of the landing-party. The open sea was 
once more attained on the 10th of February, and on the 14th the 
‘Southern Cross’ successfully passed through the ice-pack in six 
hours. 

During the time that the ship was shut up in the ice-pack, 
Mr. Hanson made large collections of the Seals and Birds, and the 
natural history notes recorded by him in his private diary are 
published in the present volume, by permission of his widow. 
Before starting on the voyage, Mr. Hanson spent some weeks at the 


iv Prejace. 


Biological Station near Christiania, in Southern Norway, receiving 
instructions from Professor Hjorth as to the proper methods of the 
capture and preservation of marine Invertebrata, Algw, &c. His 
death in October, 1899, was a great loss to the expedition, as it was 
to Science generally, for, either from want of knowledge or want of 
care on the part of the survivors, his collections suffered consider- 
ably, especially in the case of the Invertebrata, as will be seen from 
the reports of the various specialists who have described them. 
The Seals, of which there was a large series, were sent home in 
brine, but the tubs in which they were packed were not labelled in 
any way, and only a few specimens had leaden tickets attached to 
them. These had unfortunately become so corroded from immersion 
in the brine as to be, in nearly every case, undecipherable, and no 
list of the collection of Seals was forthcoming. The memoir on the 
White Seal, which Mr. Hanson prepared, and which would un- 
doubtedly have added much to our knowledge of this animal, was, 
I am informed, lost by some mischance on the voyage home. It is, 
therefore, to be regretted that the work will have to be done again 
by the naturalists on board the ‘Discovery’ and other expeditions 
which may visit “ Antarctica ” in the future. 

Sir George Newnes has presented to the National Museum the 
first set of all the specimens collected, and by his directions I have 
distributed the duplicates to various Museums and Public Institu- 
tions in Great Britain and abroad, so that many of these have been 
enriched by his generosity. There were very few duplicate bird- 
skins, but the collection of eggs, mostly preserved by Mr. Hugh 
Evans, was a fine one. A good many duplicate fishes remained, and 
these have been given to Museums where they were likely to be 
useful for study. Of the Invertebrata there were not many to 
distribute. The second set has been sent to Professor Collett for the 
Christiania Museum, in acknowledgment of the assistance rendered 
by him in promoting the objects of the expedition, and in considera- 
tion of the nationality of the commander. 

The task of preparing for publication the various memoirs on the 
different classes of Vertebrata was assigned by me to Dr. Bowdler 


Sharpe, and the Invertebrata have been edited by Professor 
Jeffrey Bell. 


Preface. Vv 


I have to acknowledge the kindness of Sir George Newnes in 
lending several blocks for the purpose of illustrating the present 
memoir; they appeared in Mr. Borchgrevink’s ‘First on the 
Antarctic Continent.’ Messrs. Hurst & Blackett have also been 
good enough to allow the reproduction of many of the illustrations 
from Mr. Bernacchi’s work ‘To the South Polar Regions.’ 


EK. RAY LANKESTER, 
Director. 
British Museum (Nat. Hrsv.), 
April 20th, 1902. 


1 


In Of 


TV; 


va: 


VIl. 


WAIT: 


CON THN Ts: 


. MAMMALIA 


By Capt. G. E. H. " Baraetr= Haminrow, 
F.Z.8., &c. 


NOTES ON ANTARCTIC SEALS collected 
during the Expedition of the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ .. 

By Epwarp A. Wison, MB, ELS. 


EXTRACTS FROM THE PRIVATE ‘DIARY’ 
OF THE LATE NICOLAI HANSON 


AVES 
By R. BowDiEr ‘Suanre, ibid Dy, F.LS., &e., 
Assistant Keeper, iDeroamaaanth of Zoeleee! 
British Museum (Sub-Dept. of Vertebrata). 


. PISCES 


By, G. A: BouLENarn, F. R. 8. 


TUNICATA 
By W. A. HerpMay, D.Sc, ERS, Derby Bie 
fessor of Natural History in University 
College, Liverpool. 


MOLLUSCA Sb 
By Enear A. Suita, F. Z. 8., Assistant ieenee 
Department of cele British Museum 
(Sub-Dept. of Invertebrata). 


ECHINODERMA . 
By F. JEFrrey Bute, M.A. Dlasains Peoteneat 
and Fellow of King’s College, London. 


PAGK 


ai 


67 


106 


174 


190 


201 


214 


PLATE 


I 


II-VI 


VII-xX 


XI-X VII 


XIX-XXIII 


XXIV, XXV 


XXVI-XXVIII 


Vill Contents. 


IX. INSECTA. 
APTERA. 
CoLLEMBOLA 


By Gro. H. Carpenter, B.Sc. (ane 8 cience 


and Art Museum, Dublin. 


PTERYGOTA. 
HEMIPTERA PARASITICA. 
PEDICULIDZ , 
By the Hon. N. C. Rema, B.A. 


4 


. ARACHNIDA. 
ACARINA 


By Dr. EL. Thamar Brenden de ia 
Société Zoologique de France, Membre Corre- 
spondant de la Zoological Society of London. 


XI. CRUSTACEA 
By T. V. Hopeson. 


XII. POLYCHAETA 
By Artruur WILLEY, D. Sc., F. VA S. 


XIII. GEPHYREA 
By A. E. SarPLey, M.A. 


XIV. NEMATODA 
By Dr. von Linstow. 


XV. CESTODA .. 60 ee a 
By Dr. von Linstow. 


XVI. POLYZOA 
By R. Kirkpatrick. 


XVII. ANTHOZOA. 
ALCYONARIA . 


By Dr. Louis Rove, ad SvpNey J. Hinton, 
F.R.S., Professor in Owens College, Man- 


onesies 


XVIII. ACTINIZA : 
With an account of “hee pecuhan 


Chambers, by Joseru A. CLuss, M.Sc., 
sistant Curator of the Lord Derby Natural 


History Museum, Liverpool. 


PAGE 


224 


225 


228 


262 


284 


285 


286 


294 


PLATE 


XLVII 


XXIX-XL 


XLI-XLVI 


XLVII 


XLVIII-LII 


Contents. 


XIX. HYDROZOA : 
A preliminary account, b 


University College, London. 


XX. PORIFERA .. 


By R. Kirkpatrick. 


XXI. CRYPTOGAMIA 
Muscr. 
By A. Gerp, M.A., F.L.S. 
LIcHENES. 
By V. H. Buackman, M.A., F.L.S. 
ALGAE. 
By Miss E. 8. Barron. 
PERIDINEAE. 
By V. H. Buackmay, M.A., F.L.S. 


XXII. REPORT ON THE ROCK SPECIMENS 


By G. T. Prior, M.A., F.G.S., Assist. Mineral 
Dept., British Museum. 


XXIII. INDEX 


y Epwarp ‘I. Browne, 


319 


321 


Ooo 


LIL 


1X 


THE NATURAL HISTORY COLLECTIONS 


OF THE 


Sou matin “CROSS.” 


V) dees 


I. MAMMALIA.’ 


By G. E. H. BARRETT-HAMILTON, 
Capt. 5th Royal Irish Rifles. 


(PLATE I.) 


INTRODUCTION.—When it is considered how frequently sealing and 
whaling vessels have visited the Antarctic seas, and how heavy has 
been the toll levied upon the marine Mammalia of those regions, 
it is astounding to find how little is really known of these animals. 
Leaving out of the question the Elephant-Seal (Macrorhinus), whose 
valuable commercial properties early made it the object of a pursuit 
so keen that it seems to have been well-nigh wiped out of existence, 
we find four species of true Seals represented in collections from 
the Antarctic. These are the Crab-eating or White Seal (Lobodon 


1 This report on the Antarctic Seals was written by Capt. Barrett-Hamilton 
before his departure with his regiment for South Africa: it has been incorporated 
in the ‘Antarctic Manual for 1901’ (pp. 209-224). Since that publication 
appeared, I have received corrected proofs from the author from South Africa, and 
he has made a good many emendations and corrections; so that his account of the 
Seals, as here published, will be found to differ slightly from the report in the 
‘Antarctic Manual. I have received valuable assistance from my colleague, 
Mr. R. I. Pocock, who undertook to look over the proofs in Capt. Barrett-Hamilton’s 
absence. Mr. Pocock has been at great pains to supply some of the details which 
the author’s departure for the front had prevented him from completing. 

[ have also added references to certain books which have appeared since 
Capt. Barrett-Hamilton left England. He was only acquainted with Mr. Borchgre- 
vink’s paper in the Geographical Journal, and | have, therefore, added references, 
as far as possible, to the latter’s book, ‘ First on the Antarctic Continent’ (Newnes, 
1901), and to Mr. Bernacchi’s ‘To the South Polar Regions’ (Hurst and Blackett, 
1901), in order to bring the synonymy up to date. I have also inserted a few blocks 
kindly lent by the publishers of the above-mentioned volumes.—R. B. 8. 

Bb 


2 Southern Cross. 


curcinophagus), Weddell’s Seal, or the False Leopard-Seal (Leptony- 
chotes weddelli), the True Leopard-Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx), and 
Ross’s Seal (Ommatophoca rossi). All these are at home on the 
pack-ice of the extreme South Polar regions, probably at all portions 
of this area, a region where neither the Elephant-Seal nor any 
species of Eared Seal are known to exist. Three of them are not 
confined to the pack-ice, but have been found elsewhere ; the single 
exception being Ross’s Seal. No other mammal has ever been 
brought from the Antarctic, and it is highly unlikely, in spite of 
certain statements to the contrary, that any remarkably new form 
of mammalian life, at least among the Pinnipeds, remains to be 
discovered. 

Of the above-mentioned four species the earliest to attract the 
attention of Zoologists, and perhaps the best known to science at the 
present day, is the Leopard-Seal, a species which was first recognised 
as distinct by De Blainville in 1820. In 1822 appeared the first 
notice of Weddell’s Seal in the shape of a short description by 
Professor Jameson in ‘ Weddell’s Voyage to the South Pole,’ to be 
followed by its correct description in binominal terms by Lesson in 
1826. Next in order comes the Crab-eating Seal, discovered by the 
French expedition of 1837-1840. This species formed the subject of 
two plates in Jacquinot’s and Pucheran’s ‘ Atlas,’ published some 
time between 1842 and 1844. Lastly, Ross’s Seal was discovered 
by Sir James Clark Ross during his voyage of 1839-1848, and was 
described by Dr. J. E. Gray in his account of the ‘ Zoology of the 
Voyage of H.M.S. “ Erebus” and “ Terror,”’ published in 1844, Sir 
James Ross’s expedition obtained specimens ofeach of the four species, 
and accordingly Gray’s work became, and still remains, the standard 
description of them all. It contains in fact the first written descrip- 
tion of the Crab-eating Seal and of Ross’s Seal, and the first 
intelligible description of Weddell’s Seal. 

From 1844 until the nineties, practically no specimens, except 
those brought home by sealers, reached our museums; and even the 
‘Challenger’s’ share of the spoil, although fortunately described by 
Sir William Turner in 1888, was meagre enough. 

It is not surprising then, that while we actually knew nothing 
of the appearance and habits of any of the four species, two of them 
(Weddell’s and Ross’s Seals) might, until a year or two ago, have 
claimed, and claimed justly, to be considered amongst the rarest and 
most obscurely known of all Mammals. Of the latter species, in fact, 
only the two original specimens were known to exist. A third skin, 
the skull once attached to which has disappeared, is preserved, as Prof. 


Mammalia. 2 


D’Arey W. Thompson has been good enough to inform me, in the 
Town museum at Dundee. 

Very welcome, then, were the specimens brought back by the 
‘ Belgica’ in 1899. Although not numerous, they were excellently 
preserved and carefully labelled, and in all cases the sex of each 
specimen had been ascertained. I count it a distinct privilege to 
have been permitted to describe and study the first scientifically- 
prepared specimens of Antarctic Seals which have reached Europe. 
In the ‘ Belgica’ collection all four species of Seal were represented, 
and the four skulls of Weddell’s Seal, and the two of Ross’s Seal, 
which formed a part of it, must be regarded as special prizes. 

The present collection, like that of the ‘ Belgica,’ contains specimens 
(both skins and skulls) of each species, the greatest rarities being the 
skins and skulls of Ross’s Seal. Weddell’s Seal is poorly represented ; 
of the Leopard-Seal there is one skin and skull, and there are several 
skins and skulls of Zobodon. It is unfortunate that, owing to the 
death of Mr. Nicolai Hanson, the Zoologist to the expedition, his 
notes on the Seals have been lost to science. This, and the fact 
that the metal labels which had been attached to the specimens have 
been in nearly all cases corroded through immersion in brine, 
detract greatly from the importance of what would otherwise have 
been a most valuable collection. 


Habits, Life-history, &c.—It may be said with truth that 
until the last decade of the nineteenth century we knew practically 
nothing of the habits of the Antarctic Seals. During that period, 
with reviving interest in the exploration of the South Polar regions, 
several efforts were made to supplement our information on these 
subjects, so that at the present time our knowledge, although far 
from adequate, is no longer a complete blank. I have thought that, 
in the present incomplete state of our knowledge, it is better to 
give in detail the observations of the various naturalists rather than 
to attempt a summary which, at the best, would need almost 
immediate revision. 

The Antarctic summer of 1892-93 found the Scottish whalers 
-* Diana, ‘ Balaena’ and ‘ Active’ in the neighbourhood of Joinville 
Island and Louis Philippe Land. Mr. W.S. Bruce, who accompanied 
the ‘ Balaena’ as naturalist, has given us a few notes on the Seals 
which he observed. These—although I suspect that his identification 
may have been in some cases mistaken—are graphically written, and 
give us a fair picture, in a general way, of the mammalian life of 


the Antarctic. 
B 2 


4 Southern Cross. 


Mr. Bruce found all four species on the pack-ice, where, “ loving 
the sun, they lie on the pack all day, digesting their meal of the 
previous night, which had consisted of fish or small crustaceans, or 
both. . . . All the Seals were obtained from the pack-ice, in bluest 
and clearest water. ... The present generation had never seen 
man, and at his approach they did not attempt to flee, but surveyed 
him open-mouthed and fearful, during which process they were 
laid low with club or bullet. Sometimes they were so lazy with 
sleep that I have seen a man dig them in the ribs with the 
muzzle of his gun, and, wondering what was disturbing their 
slumbers, they raised their head, only too quickly to fall pierced 
with a bullet. 

“. . In December all the Seals were in bad condition, thinly 
blubbered, and grievously scarred, and it is noteworthy that the 
females appeared to be as freely scarred as the males. During 
January their condition improved, and by February they were 
heavily blubbered and full of scars. The males were apparently as 
numerous as the females, but I made no definite statistics... . By 
February the embryo is well developed, gestation probably beginning 
in December. . . . Almost every female, towards the end of January 
and February, is with young. In no individual did I find more than 
one embryo. 3 

The Seals showed great power of jumping out of the water. On 
one occasion some were found “on a tilted berg, and so high was the 
ledge above the level of the water,’ that Mr. Bruce relates that the 
sealers only “clambered up with difficulty and secured their prey.” 
He has seen the Seals “rising 8 or 10 feet above the sea, and covering 
distances of fully 20 feet in length.” 

The extraordinary scars and wounds observed on the Seals, as 
described by Mr. Bruce, have been already noticed by previous 
naturalists and attributed to various causes. One of the most 
fanciful theories ascribes them to the attacks of a large and unknown 
terrestrial carnivorous mammal corresponding to the Polar Bear of 
Arctic regions. No traces of any such mammal have been found by 
later expeditions. 

Mr. W. G. Burn-Murdoch, who visited the Antarctic in 1892-93 
on board the ‘ Balaena,’ writes -—The “Seals evidently consider the 
centre of the snow-pieces their refuge from danger; probably the 
Orca or Grampus treats them here as it does the Seals in the north. 
We found some of the Seals very much scarred with long parallel 
wounds almost encircling their bodies. I think that these were 
marks left by the Grampus ; the smaller cuts about their necks and 


Mammalia. 5 


shoulders were signs of domestic worries.”1 These scars are also 
described by Mr. H. J. Bull, who gained his experiences of the Seals 
in 1894-95 during a sealing and whaling trip to Victoria Land.” 
Mr. Bull states that nearly one-half of the seals captured 
exhibited these peculiar scars or wounds. The wounds, which were 
in some cases “ quite fresh—in fact bleeding—were not found about 
the necks and heads of the animals, but about their body, more 
particularly the lower parts.” Their peculiarity consisted in their 
great length—“up to twelve inches,” and their frequently parallel 
arrangement at a distance of “about one inch apart.’ Their nature 
and appearance as described above, together with the fact that “the 
wounded Seals were met with throughout the pack, consequently in 
many cases hundreds of miles away from the nearest land,” are, 
thinks Mr. Bull, a death-blow to the theories which ascribe them 
either to the work of a “huge land mammal” or to the fighting of 
the males in the breeding season. Far more likely is it that they 
are caused by the attacks either of some Shark, or more probably 
still by the Killer Whale, a cosmopolitan Cetacean with a well-known 
reputation for a partiality for Seal-flesh. Mr. Bull’s opinion is 
strengthened by the fact that “ the scars were rarely, if ever, found 
on the Sea-Leopards,” “as if the size of this animal rather awed 
the mysterious enemy of his smaller cousins.” 

Mr. Bull’s theory, which has certainly much to recommend it, 
is commented on by Dr. C. Hart Merriam,* who says :—‘ The long 
scars on Hair-Seals in the North Atlantic are believed to be caused 
by Sharks’ bites, and the same may be true in the Antarctic Ocean.” 
My own experience of the Northern Fur-Seal (Callotaria ursina), and 
its apparent apathy in the water, when in close proximity to its 
enemy, the Killer, makes it seem highly probable that if the Seals of 
the Antarctic be only half as foolishas the Fur-Seals—a supposition 
which seems to be well-nigh proved by the ease with which they 
allow themselves to be killed by man—then many would easily fall 
victims to the Killers or Sharks, who might scar many more than 
they eat, either in a mere spirit of wantonness, or, if well fed, 
through sheer half-heartedness in securing their prey. It is sig- 
nificant that Mr. Bull’s experience of the pack was gained in 
December and January, exactly at the time when Mr. Bruce found 
the Seals heavily scarred, but improving in condition. It seems 

1 ¢FWrom Dundee to the Antarctic: an Artist’s Notes and Sketches during the 
Dundee Antarctic Expedition, p. 237, 1892-93.’ London, 1894. 

2 ¢The Cruise of the “ Antarctic” to the South Polar Regions.’ London, 1896. 


See pp. 139, 187-194. . 
3 Century Magazine for January, 1896. 


6 Southern Cross. 


probable that on the pack, in January and February, they are safe 
from their enemies, whoever they be. It may be that food is then so 
abundant that there is no need to leave the pack for the purpose 
of obtaining it, and so the Seals escape exposure to the attacks 
of their enemies. It may be that those enemies are migratory, 
as the Killer is said to be, and have already betaken themselves 
to other regions. At all events the subject is well worthy of 
further attention. 

Besides his account of the scars observed on the Seals, Mr. Bull’s 
most interesting statement is (for a naturalist) that, while all four 
species were observed in the pack, they were evidently in no great 
numbers. The whole catch, in fact, reached only 180 skins. 

Capt. C. A. Larsen, of the Norwegian whaler ‘Jason,’ has given us 
a few notes! as the result of his visits to the regions east of Graham 
Land in 1892-93 and 1893-94. At some places Seals (the species 
not specified) were found in enormous numbers, especially in 
localities “where there were plenty of small fishes and shrimps.” 
One hundred and twenty-five Miskerel killed on December Ist, 1893, 
are described as being “ very big and fat.” On December 11th near 
Christensen Island, “the Seals lay in places so closely packed that 
we had to make circles in order to advance. It was a delightful 
sight to see those masses of animals, most of which proved to be 
youngsters of the Fiskerel, which already had changed hair; they 
were beautifully fed, and looked like so many balls. Here and there 
an old animal was amidst the youngsters. The Seals were not a bit 
afraid of us; on the contrary, they stretched their flippers towards 
us as we pelted them. ... There must have been here abundant 
food for the Seals, as the ice was everywhere strewn with fishes and 
fish-bones. When I opened their stomachs, I saw them filled with 
a fish which has a white flesh, and which we call at home Avitting 
(Whiting), and also with sharp bones.” 

Like other explorers, Capt. Larsen sometimes found dead Seals. 
“Tn one of the valleys,” near Cape Seymour, Louis Philippe Land, 
“many dead Seals were seen, one of which was almost petrified, 
while others seemed to have come only recently; and there were 
corpses in which the fat still contained some streaks of blood.” 

Dr. Racovitza, the naturalist of the ‘ Belgica, has also published 
some highly interesting observations on the Seals which he 
encountered in the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of Palmer Land 
in the same region. These will be recorded under the heading of 


1 See the Geographical Journal, vol. iii., January-June 1894, pp. 289-336 ; 
also vol. iv. pp. 303-044. 


Mammalia. a 


each species. Of special novelty is the description of the appear- 
ance and of the strange and unexpected vocal powers of Ommatophoca. 
As regards food, it would seem that small Crustaceans and other 
Invertebrates are so abundant, that the life of all, with the single 
exception, probably, of the Leopard-Seal, consists, except in the 
breeding season, of a monotonous alternation of heavy gorging and 
long sleeps during the digestion of a meal which needs no trouble to 
procure. 

Dr. Racovitza has something to say about the temperature of the 
Seals, which, as in the case of the Penguins, he found to be 
remarkably low. In the case of the Seals it did not exceed 37°. So 
efficacious is the protection against the cold afforded by the thick 
layer of blubber which underlies the skin in these animals, that the 
carcase of a Seal, exposed to a temperature of 20°, was still warm 
inside, twenty-four hours after death. 

It is obvious that we are still in sore need of careful and 
detailed studies of the life-history of each species, of their habits 
during the breeding season; and, above all, of the circumstances 
which admit the existence side by side of four species each distinct 
enough to form a separate genus, and whose very dentition differs 
in a highly remarkable degree. Such marked diversity of teeth and 
skull cannot be meaningless; yet (except in the case of Ogmorhinus) 
no observer has as yet laid special stress upon any corresponding 
divergences of habits or life-history. 

Owing to the unfortunate death of Mr. Hanson and the loss of 
his zoological notes, the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition has made no 
striking addition to our knowledge of the habits and life-history of 
the Antarctic Phocidae. No MS. of any sort dealing with this 
subject has been placed in my hands, but Mr. Borchgrevink 
occasionally mentions Seals in a paper read before the Geographical 
Society." These notes, wherever they deal with a particular species, 
are alluded to under the heading of that species. The more im- 
portant entries tell us that Seals were scarce in the pack, increasing 
in numbers, however, as the ship proceeded southwards, when the 
number of Seals basking together increased considerably, and in the 
vicinity of Coulman Island, Cape Constance, and in Lady Newnes 
Bay, there were as many as three hundred Weddell’s Seals together. 
In the vicinity of Cape Adare they were to be found nearly all the 
winter, either on the ice near their blow-holes, or in the water at 
these holes, which they managed to keep open in Robertson Bay 


1 <The ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition to the Antarctic, 1899-1900. Geographical 
Journal, October, 1900, pp. 381-414. 


8 Southern Cross. 


throughout the winter. As to the moult of the Seals Mr. Borchgrevink 
simply remarks (p. 382): “The moulting starts on the back, in a 
straight line from nose to tail.” 

As to the migratory movements, if any, on the part of the Seals, 
we have practically no evidence. Mr. Hanson is silent on the subject, 
and Mr. Borchgrevink’s remarks certainly do not help us as to the 
existence of any extensive migration. 


Classification, Relationship, &e.— In dealing with the 
Antarctic Phocidae, it is hardly possible to escape from the difficult 
questions of classification and relationship. 1 am, however, fortunate 
in this respect to be able to follow in the footsteps of zoologists like 
the late Sir William Flower, Dr. St. George Mivart, and Sir 
William Turner. They have entered into the matter rather fully, 
and I feel little reason to depart from their conclusions, although 
I was in duty bound to verify them for my own satisfaction. 

The number of the incisor teeth has usually been taken as the 
most convenient feature upon which to base a classification of the 
Phocidae. It seems, however, at first sight a somewhat artificial 
proceeding to attach so much importance to a single character, 
especially as such great divergences occur amongst the teeth in 
this family. I therefore set to work to ascertain if any other 
more natural character should be forthcoming. My inquiry was 
without success, and I am bound to say that there is no character 
which agrees so well with the known facts of distribution as does 
that of the number of the incisor teeth. Adopting this, we have 
three clearly defined groups, of which one, the Phocinae, includes 
nearly all the northern forms, another, the Stenorhynchinae, nearly 
all the southern, with the addition of the tropical and sub-tropical 
Monachus, while the third, the Cystophorhine, includes the geo- 
graphically separated, but certainly allied, Cystophora and Macro- 
rhinus. No other character would give such clearly defined groups. 
To take the shape of the teeth, for instance. Here all kinds of 
intermediate forms exist, from the feeble organs of Ommatophoca 
to the extraordinary and highly specialised instruments of Lobodon 
or of Ogmorhinus. Further, on this basis, the little Phoca hispida 
of Arctic waters would find its nearest relative in the giant Antarctic 
Ogmorhinus, since the teeth of the one are miniatures of those of 
the other. Moreover, if there be any meaning in the prevalent 


1 Gf. for instance, Sir William Flower (P.Z.S. 1881, pp. 145-162); Dr. Mivart 
(P.Z.S. 1835, pp. 484 to 501), and Mr. H. N. Turner (P.Z.8. 1848, pp. 63 
to 88). 


Mammalia. 9 


views of relationship and descent, it becomes, I think, impossible to 
refuse recognition to a character such as that presented by the 
number of the teeth, until it can be shown to be useless or misleading. 
Thus, although I am aware that, by doing so, I.am forming a kind 
of hotch-potch, in bringing together in the case of the Stenorhynch- 
inwe some, in other respects, highly distinct animals, I find myself 
unable to depart from the arrangement of sub-families already laid 
down by previous writers. 


PHOCINAE. STENORHYNCHINAE. CysToPHORINAE. 
Phoca (including all north- Monachus, Cystophura, 
ern sub-genera, such as Leptonychotes, Macrorhinus. 
Krignatus and Histri- Ogmorhinus, 
cophoca), Lobodon, 
Halicherus. Ommatophoca. 


Of these Sub-families, one, viz., of the Cystophorinae, is quite 
satisfactory. Further, I have no doubt about the propriety of 
including, in a distinct group, all the species represented by Phoca 
in its broad sense. Halichwrus I regard as the most distinct form 
of northern Seal. Yet, except in its teeth, it shows no characters not 
easily attributable to its isolated existence, and, if we are to make 
sub-families for every Seal whose teeth show remarkable features, 
we shall find ourselves instituting almost as many Sub-families as 
there are species at present. In the strength and shape of its teeth 
Halicherus approaches most nearly to Monachus, but, in the bulbous 
character of their roots, it resembles to a certain extent Cystophora 
and Macrorhinus. 

The greatest difficulties beset us when we come to consider the 
Stenorhynchinae, a sub-family in which every genus possesses teeth 
which are at first sight unparalleled elsewhere. I think, however, 
that these dental characters must be regarded as instances of high 
specialisation to suit the particular needs of each species. They can 
afford no aid in the search for relationship. We are, therefore, I 
think, justified in neglecting them for the present purpose, and we 
may turn to more generalised characters, such as the appearance 
and structure of the skull. Apart from the question of dentition, 
there is a very close general resemblance between Monachus and 
Leptonychotes. At the other end of the group and nearer the Cysto- 
phorinae lies Ommatophoca, but even this, the most aberrant member 
of the sub-family, is connected by the form of its nasals with the 
remainder through Zobodon, in which the peculiar formation of the 
pre-maxillae and the inclination of the external nares is paralleled, 
although to a lesser degree. JZobodon, again, is related to Oymo- 


IO Southern CYOSs. 


rhinus and Leptonychotes, and thus to Monachus, in the inclination 
of the external nares and in the fact that the auditory meatus opens 
externally and not posteriorly. 

My view of the various relationships will be best shown by means 
of the following diagram :— 


STENORHYNCHINAE. 


LOBODON. 


OGMORHINUS..’, 


4 


A 
LEPTONYCHOTES*& 


MONACHUS., 


MACRORHINUS. 


2-2 
Ls 


By this arrangement the Phocinae are shown as the least, the 
Cystophorinae as the most, specialised sub-family. Between them 
lie the Stenorhynchinae, with Monachus and Leptonychotes, both 
resembling the Phocinaec, at the top, and Ommatophoca, with its 
strong Cystophorine leanings, at the base of the tree. Connecting 
these are Ogmorhinus and Lobodon, in some respects showing 
resemblances both to Leptonychotes and to Ommatophoca ; in other 
respects, as in their dentition, they are the most highly specialised 
members of the whole family. 

It will be seen that I am not inclined to impute importance to 
characters such as the large orbits of Ommatophoca, or to the presence 
or absence of claws on the hind-flippers. Stress has been laid on 
both these characters, and Leptonychotes and Lobodon have been 
distinguished on the ground of the total absence of claws on the hind- 
flippers in the former. The orbits of Ommatophoca are, however, not 
larger than those of Cystophora and of other Seals, while a careful 
examination of the undried skins has revealed the presence ofa 


Mammalia. II 


variable number of, it is true, rudimentary claws on the hind- 
flippers of each species. 

It seems improbable that we shall ever approach more nearly to 
an understanding of the true inter-relationships of the Phocidae until 
we discover some of the ancestral forms from which they have 
sprung.’ Possibly the various genera left the ancestral tree at various 
epochs, and, if we are to follow Sir William Flower, we have in 
Macrorhinus the most highly specialised form of the whole group. 

As to the Stenorhynchinae, they must be regarded as the 
descendants of an ancestor which became isolated from the pre- 
cursors of the remaining two sub-families at a sufficiently early 
period to allow of the formation of the various distinct genera which 
now exist. The exact relationships of these amongst themselves 
cannot, I think, be more clearly indicated than has been attempted 
above. Ommatophoca is certainly the most distinct, and may be 
regarded as annectant between the Stenorhynchinae and Cystophorinae. 
If any convenient result would accrue therefrom, it might be taken 
to constitute a separate sub-family, the Ommatophocinae, but I do 
not see how the multiplication of sub-families can help us much. 

A certain amount of lght on the origin of some of the genera 
may, perhaps, be derived from the young. ‘Thus the young of 
Halicherus, a genus which has not at the present day an Arctic 
habitation, are white (or nearly so), thereby permitting the suspicion 
that its ancestors were of Arctic origin, or, at least, dwellers in regions 
where the cold was more intense than those which they at present 
frequent. On the other hand, the only Seal of the Antarctic, which 
is nearly white, is Lobodon, and its mottled young suggest a com- 
paratively recent inroad of the species into the cold regions of 
the South Polar area. 

It is interesting to find the teeth of Phoca hispida paralleled in 
the south by those of Ogmorhinus, while the teeth of Leptonychotes 
recall those of P. vitulina, and Monachus, in this respect to a certain 
extent, resembles Halichawrus. 


Dentition.—The teeth of the Phocidae are remarkable for the 
extreme variation which they display in the genera. In most cases 
dental characters present the most distinct features between animals 
which are externally very similar. In the skins, as seen in museums, 
Leptonychotes and Lobodon are, but for their colour, difficult to 
separate, yet nothing could be more distinct than the forms of their 


1 Stenorhynchus vetus of Leidy is so close to (if not identical with) Lobodon 
carcinophagus that it affords us no help whatsoever. 


12 Southern Cross. 


respective teeth. It is evident that, whereas the needs of existence 
do not tend towards any very great variation in bodily shape, the food 
of the Phocidae, or the method of securing it, may be so varied as to 
have induced the evolution of many quite distinct types of denti- 
tion, the production of which postulates great plasticity of the teeth. 
The result is that the Phocidae have already, by their teeth, shown 
themselves to be on the road to division into groups corresponding 
with some of those of the terrestrial mammalia. Thus, while Ogmo- 
rhinus, with its sinuous body and saw-like teeth, represents the most 
specialised form of Pinniped Carnivore on a large scale, Ommatophoca, 
Hrignatus, and Cystophora feed on more feeble prey, while the 
smaller Carnivora are represented by Phoca hispida and P. vitulina— 
resemblances which seem to suggest all sorts of possibilities in dual 
evolution, possibilities of the rise of what now appear to be homo- 
geneous Orders of mammalia independently and in different regions, 
just as Dr. Kikenthal believes may have been the case with the 
Whalebone and Toothed Whales. 

As regards the modifications of the teeth, it is, at first sight, 
difficult to discover any connection between the grinders of Lobodon 
with their five complicated cusps, and the comparatively simple 
teeth of Phoca vitulina. We have, however, numerous intermediate 
stages whence we may gain some insight into the relationship of these 
two, and of other forms. Thus, in Leptonychotes and Phoca vitulina 
the teeth are simple, the central cusp is all prominent, and there is 
but small trace of accessory or smaller cusps. Leptonychotes is 
relatively the weaker of the two in dentition ; but from very strong 
teeth, of the type of those of P. vitulina, may have been derived the 
(relatively) strongest teeth of the whole group, those of Monachus. 
Diminish the cusps and reduce the size of the teeth, and there 
results the remarkably weak-toothed Ommatophoca ! Phoca groen- 
landica may be taken as an example of development in another 
direction, for here there are distinct accessory cusps, although they 
are not nearly so strongly developed as in Phoca hispida or in 
Ogmorhinus, the triple-cusped teeth of which are examples, the former 
on a small, the latter on a large scale, of precisely the same type 
of instrument. Finally, there is the complicated arrangement .of 
Lobodon, in which the central cusp is immensely developed at the 
expense of the remainder, and possesses a frequently bulbous and 
recurved apex. The anterior cusp of Ogmorhinus is here represented 
by a small corresponding protuberance, the posterior cusp appears 
as three distinct, rather antero-posteriorly flattened, projections 
running across the width of the tooth. 


Mammalia. 13 


Quite as distinct in their own way are the teeth of the Cysto- 
phorinae. In these there is a simple conical crown, very feeble for 
the size of the animal and wanting all trace of cusps on its cutting 
edge. The root is swollen and bulbous. Somewhat similar, but 
much stronger, are again the teeth of Halichwrus, and these in their 
massiveness remind us of those of Monachus. 

Inthe whole economy of the Antarctic Phocidae, nothing can be 
more remarkable than the divergences in the shape and size of the 
cheek-teeth. Side by side, on the South Polar pack-ice occur four 
genera, Lobodon, Ogmorhinus, Ommatophoca, and Leptonychotes. 
Living the same life, with the same sources of food around them, 
and, moreover, with the same number of teeth, no two genera agree 
in any single respect in the form and pattern of the individual 
grinders. In Ogmorhinus there is found the most formidable, in 
Ommatophoca the most feeble, dentition of the family. Again, while 
Lobodon seems to find necessary for its existence a set of teeth 
surmounted by perhaps the most complicated arrangement of cusps 
found in any lving mammal, Leptonychotes survives on the same 
ice-floe with the help of a simple fairly strong dentition. Lastly, 
while there is, so far as is known, little individual variation in 
the three remaining genera, in Ommatophoca there occurs one of the 
most remarkable instances of individual variation in mammalian 
teeth known to science. Not only are the size and the number of 
the roots of each tooth variable, but the actual number of teeth in 
any particular specimen can never be foretold with certainty. 

Nothing can be more certain than that sucha state of things 
as I have here described cannot be meaningless. Developments like 
these must in each case be connected with habits and food, which 
must surely differ in a manner corresponding to such remarkable 
differences of structure. This supposition is, I think, supported 
by the fact that, as already stated, there are to be found amonest 
the Antarctic Phocidae resemblances of dentition to those of northern 
seas. Thus it is reasonable to suspect that the resemblances between 
the teeth of Ogmorhinus and of Phoca hispida are not altogether 
without reference to similar uses. 

With a view to approach the root of this matter I have examined 
with some care all the available accounts of the habits of the 
Antarctic Phocidae. Meagre as these are, they are sufficient to 
afford me some assistance, especially those of Dr. Racovitza. 
Thus the fact that Ogmorhinus is alone described as occasionally 
killing and eating Penguins, and that one of these Seals accepted as 
food the bodies of two of these birds thrown overboard from the 


14 Southern Cross. 


‘ Belgica,’ is certainly in keeping with the formidable cutting teeth 
and massively developed cranial crests of this animal. The 
Leopard-Seal may then be regarded as the true carnivore of the group, 
subsisting on fish (and, when they can be obtained, birds), a prey 
which needs both catching and holding. For such a ré/e, requiring 
both speed, strength and activity, besides its teeth, its elongated head 
and body must be eminently suited. The three remaining genera 
are more puzzling. In their case no difference of food or habits had, 
until recently, been recorded. In spite of this I felt sure that the 
differences of dentition must be correlated with differences of habit, 
in however inconspicuous a degree. In Lobodon and Leptonychotes 
poorly developed cranial crests seem to indicate that no great violence 
of jaw action is needed, a character in the second case supported by 
the feeble dentition. In Zobodon the teeth, although actually not of 
feeble size, are not of a shape which would lend itself to much use in 
gnawing and grinding, and the small extent to which they are 
actually worn down bears this out. It is then not easy to imagine 
what can be the use of teeth so unique in zoology. Possibly their 
formation may be explamed by some words of Dr. Racovitza, 
His account of the feeding of JLobodon is as_ follows :—‘ Les 
Euphausia forment sa nourriture habituelle: il nage la bouche 
ouverte dans les banes de ces crustacés, a la fagon des Baleines, et en 
consomme de grandes quantités.” On reading these words I was at 
once struck by the idea that the teeth of Zobodon might possibly 
serve the animal as a sieve, whereby to rid its mouth of the water 
taken in with the Huphausia, somewhat after the manner of baleen 
in the Balaenidae. For this purpose the teeth seem to be exactly 
suited. They do not fit closely, but alternate with those of the opposite 
jaw so that the cusps form a perfect sieve. I believe, therefore, 
that the use of these extraordinary teeth is as I have suggested, and 
I would direct the attention of zoologists who visit the Antarctic in 
the future to what appears to be a point of great interest in the 
life-history of this animal, and is, I believe, a hitherto unparalleled 
function for the teeth of a mammal. Even if my supposition 
prove incorrect, attention should be directed to the study of 
Lobodon, with a view to throw light on the use of its teeth. At 
all events, if extensively used for mastication, they would speedily 
show the effects of wear and tear in a far more conspicuous manner 
than they actually do. 

On the Antarctic pack-ice the food of Leptonychotes, like that of 
Lobodon, is said to consist of Huphausia. Its teeth are utterly 
different. I suggest that the form of the simple but not very 


Mammata. 15 


strong teeth of this species is due to the fact that it is not contined 
to the pack-ice, and that in other regions its food-supply is derived 
from creatures which need some holding, but yet are not so strong 
or active as those which serve to nourish Ogmorhinus. The external 
shape of Leptonychotes is that of an animal fitted for rapid motion in 
the water, so that it 1s natural to suppose that fish may form no 
small portion of its diet. 

Lastly we have Ommatophoca, with its very feeble and variable 
dentition, obsolete sagittal crest, yet comparatively strong lambdoid 
crest. It seems probable that the exact number of its teeth is not of 
importance to this animal. Even their size is sufficiently variable 
to admit of the thought that the whole dentition is little used, and 
it seems to me highly probable that Ommatophoca is in the process 
of reducing its teeth. Its food is soft, consisting, according to Dr. 
Racovitza, of large cephalopods. Such crushing of these as might 
be necessary would be performed as well by the flat jaws as by 
cusped teeth like those of the Phocidae. Consequently the teeth 
are in a state of disintegration. This supposition agrees very well 
with what I have already suggested in the case of Lobodon. In the 
last-named genus the teeth are highly developed, not for grinding 
purposes, but for use as a sieve. In Ommatophoca, not being 
available as a sieve, they are useless. They thus fall outside the 
influence of natural selection, except in so far as their reduction 
may be of use to the species. Variation and enfeeblement result, 
processes which, if for the advantage of the animal, will no doubt be 
carried to their fullest extent. My supposition is supported by the 
external appearance of the animal as graphically described, I think for 
the first time, by Dr. Racovitza. It is, he writes: “le plus phoque 
des phoques, car chez lui toute forme de quadrupeéde a disparu. Son 
corps nest plus quwun sac fusiforme pourvu de membres tres 
réduits,” from which I gather that Ross’s Seal does not possess the 
natural appearance which belongs to an agile carnivore such as 
Ogmorhinus. But the most remarkable confirmation of my sup- 
position is supplied by one of the skulls obtained by Mr. Nicolai 
Hanson. In this skull (No. 1), which, although adult, reaches the 
shortest total length of any skull of the genus known to mie, there is 
no trace of any cheek-teeth either in the upper or lower jaws. Not 
only have the teeth disappeared, but with them have vanished, to a 
great extent, the alveoli. There seems, then, to be some solid ground 
for my hypothesis both in regard to Lobodon and to Ommatophoca. 
If I am right, there is here a striking instance of the acquirement 
of perfectly distinct habits, and consequently of form and appearance, 


16 Southern Cross. 


by two animals which must have been formerly closely allied, and 
which are subject to the influence of precisely similar surroundings. 


P.S.—In the account of each Seal my procedure has been to 
commence, as usual, with the synonymy. Under this heading I 
give not a complete list of the works wherein any given species 
has been mentioned—a method involving, so far as I can see, 
immense labour without any corresponding advantages—but a list 
of the principal references to the species. 

After the synonymy follows an indication of the location 
and origin of the type specimens when known, succeeded by para- 
graphs dealing with the history, distribution, habits, and external 
appearance. 

Next comes a short description of the skull. The principal 
dimensions of the crania brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ are 
compared with those of the specimens procured by the staff of the 
‘ Belgica’ and with those in the British Museum. 

There are general remarks on any character which seems 
deserving of special notice, a short list of the distinguishing 
characteristics for the guidance of the zoologists accompanying the 
new British expedition, and a summary of what is known of the 
habits and distribution. 

Any attempt at a detailed description of either skulls or 
skins has been purposely avoided. In the case of the skins of 
the ‘Southern Cross’ collection I have had no opportunity of 
inspecting them (with the exception of one or two examples) in a 
condition in which it would have been possible to describe them. 
Moreover, I believe that descriptions and dimensions of Seals, to be 
of value, should be taken from the animals when in the flesh. 

As regards the skulls, there is not one of which I know the sex, 
and only a few of which I know the skin appertaining to them. It 
would, in my opinion, be of little value to enter into details regarding 
specimens, the labels of which have perished from want of care on 
the part of those entrusted with their preservation. Moreover, 
owing to the death of Mr. Hanson, and the absence of his notes, the 
whole work will have to be performed again from the collections 
procured by the various expeditions which started in 1901. . 


Mammatia. 7 


LEPTONYCHOTES. 


Leptonyx, J. E. Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. i. p. 582, 1837, nec 
Leptonyx, Wm. Swainson, Zoological [lustrations, ser. 2, vol. iii. pl. 117, 
1832-33 = Hylactes (see Catalogue of Birds, vol. xv. p. 349, 1890), nec 
Leptonyx, Wm. Swainson in Lardner’s Cyclopedia, vol. xeviii.; Animals in 
Menageries, p. 314, 18388 = Coryphospiza (see Catalogue of Birds, vol. xiii. 
PMO Og OIO) o wecian cis cckejaecioadeceneenerescieeeconvancectienseesesacemetss Type L. weddelli 

Leptonychotes, Gill, Arrangement of the Families of Mammals, p. 70, 1872. 


Poecilophoea, R. Lydekker, in Flower and Lydekker’s Study of Mammals 
p- 605, 1891. 


1. LEPTONYCHOTES WEDDELLI.—WeEDDELL’s Seat, or THe Fase 
SEA-LEOPARD. 


Leopardine Seal, Jameson in Weddell’s Voyage towards the South Pole, vol. i. 
pp. 22, 24, & 134, with a plate (not correct). 

Sea Leopard, or Leopard Seal. Weddell, op. cit. pp. 22 & 134. 

Otaria weddellii, R. P. Lesson, in Ferussac’s Bull. Sci. Nat. vol. vii. pp. 487- 
438, 1826. 

Leptonyx weddelli, J. E. Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. i. p. 582, 1873 ; 
Voy. H.M.S. ‘ Erebus’ and ‘ Terror, Zool. p. 7, pls. 5 & 6, 1844; Cat. Bones of 
Mammalia, p. 142, 1862; Cat. Seals and Whales, pp. 11 to 18, 1866; Hand.- 
List of Seals, Morses, Sea-Lions, and Sea-Bears, p. 14, 1874; 'T. Gill, Prodrome 
of a Monograph of the Pinnipeds, Comm. Essex Institute, p. 6, July 1866, 

Stenorhynchus weddellii, R. P. Lesson, Manuel de Mammalogie, p. 200, 1827 ; 
Sir Richard Owen in Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xii. pp. 631-352, 1843. 

Leptonychotes weddeli (or weddelli), T. Gill, Arrangement of the Families 
of Mammals, p. 70, November 1872; J. A. Allen, History of North American 
Pinnipedes, p. 467 (see also pp. 214, 418, 419, 421, 446, 450, 451, 452, 453, 
463), 1880; Sir William Turner, Report on the Seals collected during the 
Voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ in the years 1873-76, pp. 20 to 28 & 65, 1888; 
EK. G. Racovitza, La Vie des Animaux et des Plantes dans | Antarctique, 
pp- 80, 52, 1900; Cook, First Antarctic Night, p. 264 (1901, photograph) ; 
Barrett-Hamilton, Antarctic Manual, p. 218 (1901); Bernacchi, To the South 
Polar Regions, pp. 73, 165, 235, 240, 245 (photo.), 274 (1901); Albert, Pinip. 
Chile, p. 10 (1901, Juan Fernandez). 

Weddellii (Lobodon carcinophaga), Borchgrevinck, First on the Antarctic Continent, 
p- 81 (1901, photo.). 

A Weddellii Seal, id. t. c. p. 109 (photo.). 

Weddellii, id. t. c. pp. 236, 237 (photo.), 260, 286. 

Sea Leopard (Stenorynehus leptonyx, Gray), H. N. Moseley, Notes by a 
Naturalist. An account of observations made during the Voyage of H.M.S. 
‘ Challenger’ found the World in the years 1872-76, &c. London, 1879. 


Type-—The original specimen of the “Leopardine Seal” of 
Jameson and Otaria weddellii of Lesson was presented to the old 
Museum of Edinburgh University in that city in 1821-22, and is 
now in the Museum of Science and Art. Dr. R. H. Traquair, 
Keeper of the Natural History collections, to whom I am indebted 

Cc 


18 Southern Cross. 


for this information, has kindly sent me a sketch of the teeth of 
this specimen, which places its identity beyond question. 
Synonymy.—This calls for but little notice, The generic terms 
Leptonyx and Stenorhynchus being preoccupied, must be succeeded by 
Leptonychotes, which is nearly twenty years older than Poeceilophoca. 
Flistory and Distribution.—The first examples of this Seal seem 
to have been brought home by Captain James Weddell from the 
South Orkneys, where several of them were killed on the 15th of 
January, 1823 (pp. 22 and 24). As already stated, a specimen was 
deposited in the old Museum of the Edinburgh University, and 
was recognised by Professor Jameson as representing a new species 
“to be referred to the division Stenorhinque of F. Cuvier,” but 


FEMALE AND YOUNG OF WEDDELI’S SEAL. 


(By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) 


with the teeth not quite in agreement “with those of his Phoque 
Septonyx (sic), nor with those of Sir E. Home, figured in pl. xxix. 
of the Philosophical Transactions for 1822.” Again, in writing of 
the South Shetlands, Weddell states (p. 124), that “some Sea-Leopards 
have also been seen.” At page 24 of the same work is printed a 
brief description of the new Seal by Professor Jameson, who, however, 
did not apply to it a Latin name, but contented himself with styling 
it the “leopardine seal.” The description is in many respects vague. 
The teeth are neither figured nor described, and the sketch, “drawn 
from nature” by Weddell himself, is extremely fanciful. It is not 
then surprising that Lesson, who saw an opportunity of describing 
the new species under the name of Otaria weddellii, should have 
been completely deceived as to its true nature. Lesson’s description 


Mammatia. 19 


is, in fact, highly incorrect, and would in many respects apply rather 
to the True Leopard-Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx) than to the present 
species. Mystified by this and by the use of the name Sea-Leopard, 
Dr. J. E. Gray, although at first recognising the distinctness of the 
new species, was afterwards for a time induced to believe that 
the name Otaria weddellii had actually been applied to a specimen 
of Ogmorhinus leptonyx. He subsequently convinced himself by an 
examination of the teeth of the type specimen that this opinion was 
not correct. I am fortunately able to support Gray in his second 
opinion. 

For the first intelligible description of Weddell’s Seal, science 
is indebted to Gray. This was based upon two specimens (skins, 
with skulls) sent home by Captain Fitzroy, R.N., from the 
river Santa Cruz, in about latitude 50° South, on the east coast of 
Patagonia. Mr. Albert has recently recorded a specimen from Juan 
Fernandez. Later a skin and two skulls were brought home by the 
Antarctic Expedition of 1839-1843, which (although not precisely 
labelled) were doubtless obtained on the Antarctic pack-ice. The 
skull of another specimen, shot at Betsy Cove, Kerguelen, on the 
9th of January, 1874, by the members of the ‘ Challenger’! Expedition, 
formed the subject of an elaborate account by Sir W. Turner, and is 
now in the Anatomical Museum of the University of Edinburgh. 
The bones of this Seal were found abundantly by the members of 
the expedition, together with those of the Elephant-Seal, on the 
sandy beach of Heard Island. The species for long remained so 
poorly represented in collections, that an imperfect skull, brought 
home by a sealing ship, and presented by Mr. R. M. Martin in 1897, 
of which the exact origin is unknown, only brought the number of 
the specimens in the Natural History Museum to four. 

The specimens brought home by the ‘ Belgica’ and ‘ Southern Cross’ 
were therefore very welcome additions to our list. The species was 
found by the former expedition, both on the pack-ice as well as in 
the Straits of Gerlache in the Palmer Archipelago; by the latter in 
many places in Victoria Land. 

Although so little known, Weddell’s Seal is probably of wide 
distribution, and, except where its numbers have been reduced by the 
sealers, of frequent occurrence. It is not quite certain whether the 
herd of four hundred alluded to by Moseley as occupying a station 
at Swain’s Island, a small outlier of Kerguelen, belonged to this 
species or to the True Leopard-Seal, especially as he mentions having 


1 See narrative of the Voyage of the ‘ Challenger, pp. 855 and 373. 


c 2 


20 Southern Cross. 


seen “one much larger in Royal Sound.”? At all events, the 
specimen which the ‘ Challenger’ brought home has proved to be a 
Leptonychotes. 

In his voyage on the ‘ Balaena, Mr. Bruce saw only about four 
of this species altogether, and these singly; Dr. Donald, however, 
met with greater numbers. Two were quite young, and one of these 
he attempted unsuccessfully to bring on board alive. 

Contrary to this experience, we learn from Mr. Borchgrevink 
(p. 236) that Weddell’s Seal was, next to Lobodon, the “best repre- 
sented” Seal met with during the passage of the ‘Southern Cross’ 
through the pack-ice.2 Its numbers increased considerably as the 
ship proceeded southwards, and in the vicinity of Coulman Island 
and Cape Constance in Lady Newnes Bay as many as three 
hundred were seen together. It was found breeding in Robertson 
Bay, and occurred throughout the winter. 

Halits—Practically nothing is known of the habits of Weddell’s 
Seal. Like the Crab-eating Seal, it feeds,.when on the pack-ice, 
according to Dr. Racovitza, on Huphausia, and the young, which 
resemble little plump and hairy Bears, are born in September. 
Unlike Lobodon, it does not show its teeth on being approached, 
but executes a manceuvre which is described by Racovitza in the 
following words: “Il ouvre une large gueule rose et d’ordinaire se 
renverse sur le dos en relevant en méme temps sa téte et Varriere 
train, se courbant ainsi en arc. C’est une simple manceuvre pour 
effrayer l’ennemi assez naif pour se laisser prendre.” It seems to 
well deserve the epithets “silly” and “lazy.” Moseley’s Kerguelen 
Island specimen “showed no fight at all, and never snarled or 
showed its teeth.” It was killed with a stone and a hunting knife. 

External appearance—This species seems to be recognisable 
rather by its negative than its positive characters. Although 
spotted, it is not so distinctly or abundantly so as the True Leopard- 
Seal, so that it is, in this respect, intermediate between that 
species and Ross’s Seal. Moseley described * the specimen which 
he killed at Kerguelen Island as “very like the common British 
Seal in appearance. It is spotted yellowish-white and dark grey on 


1 H. N. Moseley’s ‘ Notes by a Naturalist: an account of Observations made 
during the Voyage of H.M.S. “ Challenger” round the world in the years 1872-1876, 
&c. London, “ New” edition, p. 174, 1892. 

2 Cf. infra, p. 94. 

3 It isa pity that Moseley made the very pardonable error of alluding to his 
specimen as ‘a Sea-Leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyx, Gray)” since such errors are 
readily copied and not easily eradicated. Moseley’s description is, for instance, 
quoted under the heading of the True Leopard-Seal on p. 143 of vol. il. of the 
‘Royal Natural History.’ 


21 


Mammalia. 


(yayowlg YP WSWny *s.ussayy fo wuorssvuwad fg) 


‘IVaS S,1ITHACaM JO AUYAMOOU 


22 Southern Cross. 


the back, the under surface being of a general yellowish colour.” 
Dr. Racovitza characterises it as being “a pelage gris-fer moucheté 
de taches rondes de couleur jaune.” Of the specimens brought 
home by the ‘ Belgica,’ the younger (No. 891), is slaty grey above, 
with the under side both of the body and of the flippers dirty white. 
The colour of the back and belly is separated by a fairly distinct line 
of demarcation, which runs from the base of the hind- to that of the 
fore-flippers, and thence to the nose, the upper lip being white like 
the under surface. A number of dirty-white spots running obliquely 
from front to rear on the flanks are arranged almost in rows, and 
give the impression of being discontinuous streaks. 

The under side of an older specimen (No. 893) is far yellower. 
It is, however, so soiled that the mixture of various tints of dirty 
yellow which it presents to the view are well-nigh indescribable. A 
mixture of dirty yellow and slate-grey colouring is so arranged on 
the chest as to produce a pattern which may be described as mottled. 
The under side of the jaw is without spots. 

In build this Seal is, judging from the photographs of Dr. Cook 
and Dr. Racovitza, more slender than JZobodon. The last-named 
naturalist states that it is larger than Zobodon, and in that case the 
head should be proportionately smaller. It is relatively longer and 
more slender, and lacks the blunt nose of Lobodon. 

Distinguishing characteristics of skull—Both the skull and 
skeleton of Weddell’s Seal have been described in detail by Sir 
William Turner in his report on the Seals collected by the ‘ Challenger’ 
expedition (pp. 20-28). The skull has neither great size nor remark- 
able teeth to mark it off at a glance from those of the other Seals of 
the Antarctic seas. Yet Lobodon, which is of very similar size, is 
the only form with which it could possibly be confused. Even here, 
however, there are several obvious points of difference, and Lep- 
tonychotes (apart from its simple teeth) may be at once distinguished 
by the proportionately greater breadth of its brain-case and the high 
and narrow anterior portion of the skull, as well as by the shorter 
palate. The under jaws of the two animals are also characteristic, 
that of Lobodon being far deeper, stronger, and more massive, than 
that of Leptonychotes. 

Sex.—We know next to nothing as regards any difference that may 
obtain between the sexes. The only skull labelled as that of a female 
which I have examined, is No. 895 of the ‘ Belgica’ collection. In this 
the canines are smaller than are those of the males of the same col- 
lection, and, if this distinction be borne out by a series of specimens, 
all the skulls in the British Museum will prove to be, as I have 


Mammata. 23 


provisionally Jabelled them, those of males. It should be noted, 
however, that the dimensions of one specimen (No. 44, 4, 6, 1), are 
somewhat intermediate in character. 

Age.—tThree of the skulls brought home by the ‘ Belgica, Nos. 893, 
900 and 895 are those of particularly fine animals. But, although 
they obviously belonged to adults, the development of the sagittal 
crest 1s imperceptible. 

The cheek-teeth do not seem to be subject in any marked degree 
to the processes of wearing down. The effect of use appears more 
conspicuously in the case of the canines and incisors, perhaps as a 
consequence of fighting. 

Teeth.—The simple teeth and their uses have already been 
discussed (see pp. 14-15). There seems to be a tendency, variously 
exhibited in the different individuals, but most marked in No. 893 of 
the ‘ belgica’ collection, to show a distinct space between the two 
last cheek-teeth of the upper jaw in a manner somewhat reminiscent 
of the corresponding teeth of Otaria (Humetopias) stellert. 

As already stated, the skeleton has been described in detail by 
Sir William Turner (see Table I, p. 24). 


OGMORHINUS. 


Sténorhinque, I. Cuvier, “De quelques Espéces de Phoques et des groupes 
génériques entre lesquels elles se partagent,” Mém. du Muséum, t. xi. 
Stenorhynque (plate), p. 190, pl. 18, fig. 2, a, 1824. 

Stenorhinchus (sic), ’. Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. xxxix. p. 549, 1826 (preoccupied by 
Stenorhynechus, Lamarck, Hist. Nat. des Animaux Sans Vertébres, W&e., 
tome xv. p. 236, July, 1818). 


Stenorhynchus (nec Lamarck), R. P. Lesson, Manuel de Mammalogie, p. 199, 1827. 

Stenorhineus, Hamilton Smith in Jardine’s Naturalist’s Library, p. 258 (1845- 
1846). 

Ogmorhinus, W. Peters, Monatsb. K. Akad., Berlin, p. 398, footnote (1875). 
Barrett-Hamilton, Antarctic Manual, p. 219 (1901) ..........4 Type O. leptonyx 


1. OGMORHINUS LEPTONYX. ‘Tue Leoparp-Seat or TRUE 
SEA-LEOPARD. 


“* Phoque a petits ongles, Phoca leptonyx,” de Blainville, Journ. de Physique, &c., 
t. xcl. pp. 288-289, and 297-298, Oct. 1820; Desmarest, Mammaloyie, pt. i. 
pp. 247-248 (see also footnote to p. 243), 1820; Cuvier, Ossements Fossiles, 
pp. 207 and 208, pl. xviii. tig. 2 (skull (fig. mala) 1823); J. KE. Gray in 
Griffith’s Animal Kingdom, v. p. 123, 1827; 'de Blainville, Ostéographie, i. 
pl. v. and ix. (figures of skull and teeth of specimen in Paris Museum) 1840. 


' For the date of this work see Mr, C. Davies Sherborn’s paper in the ‘ Annuals 
and Magazine of Natural History,’ ser. 7, vol. ii., July 1898. 


Southern Cross. 


24 


‘suetufoods Loy}0 OY} UL O8¥d OY} SYA ULI} 7300} YY Jo Jad Aapvorq v AOy opeUT 
ATI(ssd0T SLA JMOMaLNSsvoM SLy} eouey ‘Vel oT} BAoqe yYySToY ojo[duu0o toy} A[AvOU 0} WasTA Jou peY 4400} ay} JO SUMOID 0} 4eYY 
sunof os sv uoutloads stq} souls ‘spvumue Tap[o Toy aovrd Surpuodse.s0o oy} UL WAALS aso] (AIA ofqvivduaoo ATpaxvy st w194T sty, z 
“THOYZ JIMsBoUt 0} e[qissodur punoj svar 4I 4VYy ATeZMAMISeAT Os aLIM , S801 UsaYJnOg , ayy Xq oTMOY qySnosq soroods sty} Jo s[[Nys oy, ‘i 
| LL. ji nl ee SS) 
| | | | “WOTJO9T[OO Oy 
| | UL os[Y st outoods siq Jo uLys 
| | pegnys ey, “Ny ‘Aorzyrg dep 
| | | | ‘vImOS Ue “TT ‘ZnID veg AOATIT 
| GET} GS-03) OG | Go| ** | EBL | O9T |psmeq| ghz | “P B ATquqosd ‘ngze ‘T-9°F-FE ON 
‘atqudeoaed Apaanq 480.10 | | ‘bs “UIE “Wy Aq poyuosor gy 
TVyseg “Tom AYYSYS Toa, | 6 | C-IT G-LT | ¢.93  G-e@  6¢) ** |-psuvq|psaeq] OIT| 092 |°2& v Apuaredde ‘S'F'S'L6 ‘ON 
‘x ‘[d ‘umes 
| “MI WSU ey} ur “op ‘sTeag 
| ou} O} Jsi]-pury s,Avry gq *¢ 
| | | UL ponsty “Ayeurupy oy £q 
| paws “E-6E, JO wonrped 
“XY OOIVjUW ssoy souve wg 
‘atqiyydeorod Aporeq | | | | | | | | ‘sBog olpoivjuy “P 4[npe ue 
qsod [eHISVY "WIOM Yyo2T, | 8 TE | 0-4T) 80) 9-G9¢ | 89) #9 | @8I | S89L| OTT |, 092 | Alyueredde ‘peze ‘7z-cLz-9F ‘on 
| | | ‘N'Y ‘AomzqLy dep ‘eruoseyeg “gp 
‘afqudeored Aya.veq | 


| | ‘2nI Bug JaAnyT *“P plo ue 
yseto [eylsug “UIOM Yyoog, | ¢.g | II G81 96 09) F9 | L9  (2)4mnpe Aprwon (2) 5 —"G ON 


Southern CvYoss. 


“pose 


-mBp []UYG  4seaio ]vqyWLo¥Vs 


ON ‘ABI OF STIMALSIq 4I9J, 
‘posemep TonU 
1IMYS [eu sor [eyYLOUg 


‘HI0M ATplVy puv Uvefo T4997, | 


‘T[VUS 4So10 [BIJISVQ 


“IBOM =—-OF- SMLUUISaY =YJoay, 


"JSO1O [VPJLSVS ON “WIOM 999, 


-atquydaoaed ysnf 
jSo10 [BIJISVQ “WIOM .10STO 
-UL PUB Y}00}-YovoYyoO AOMIOUW 


§1 


¢-FI 


¢-CL 


ST 


(eels cr 
| G-8l | $0 
GE. |  &1 
| 

ib Pin 
G81 | 8 


IG 


06 


¢-@8 


9L 


| 
LL | 9b 
Pe S| es 

| 
¢-g8 | 19 
¢8 | 9g 
¢.08 | 8¢ 


S6L 


Gl 


Ist 


OST 


CSI 


StL 


¢-0ST 


C&T 


StL 


6F1 


OFT 


*xoiddy 
892 


OLS 


OLZ 


C86 


“5 qupe 
ae 


“bsg “Uy “WM 
ue Apjuoiddy ‘['$'S'L6 


CL°ST'$'9F ON SE pure “uory 
-O9][00 OY} UI OsTe SI ULYS oy.) 
“Ayemupy 43 Aq poeyweselg 
‘SE-GE8T JO ToTpodxg ooreyay 
ssoy somere mug “PP 4yupe 
Ajiwou ev A[qeqotq ‘§°C1'F'9F “ON 


“NU ‘UJIUIG yNoIT ‘“SF-6E8I 
jo woutpodxp o1joreyuy .ssoy 
souve Ig ‘svag = OLJOIBJU VW 


“P ynpe Apuoreddy “p9zg “ON 


(Gir) lays) § (os) 
oY} Ul OsTe St UIyS oyT,) “WoHTp 
| -odxq oljoiujuy ssoy some 
Mg “Pf plo ‘(S'9L' IL Sh) 1928 “ON 


“PLEL «8 I-PUPH 5» 
‘vin jo gt ‘d ye ()0 SI 
NU “WWWS ynoryT = “eF-6E81 
jo woytpodxy ooreyay ssoy 
somve IgG  ‘svoag ore 


-& Alquqoig “‘yNpy ‘7968 ON 


"892]2]000) snorima U2 paurnzgo ‘fwojsrzT poungony fo wnasnyy Ys2pug ay} fo W02}99}]00 ay, WoL.J—) 


ad 


| 


“ael odoge Sutteodde ysnl T9007, 


+4003 
-jaayo 
JAMO] 
pag Jo 
uo iod 
posod 
-Xa jO 


FIO H 


"IPOOATS UL TTS 309, 


SOT 


| 
901 


| 
BALES *souluRa 
49279 | Jaddn 
| Ianol yo 
pig jo 
Jojo 
eee ae 
AIGLI9}SO. oh 
|-o10y Vy eehseng) 


*S3UIMVO | *SaT1as 
azaddn jo} 3003 
uodod | -xjeaq9 
pasodxe| IaMo[ 
| jo jo 
qysueT | yysaeTq | 


| 


| 


801 
SIL 
‘Culy | 
*solles | a[pprur | 
qj003 | out 
-yeoo | Suoje 
aeddn | pains 
yo 5 | 
q}suary sTrseu jo 


ysae'y 


“unt 
-B19 JO 


“eros AZ 
48 


TpBeaq | qypKeq 


-votl) |}jseyvely sayva.y 


oe 


—_$__—_ 


*W8u9] 
878 [8d 
-ostg 


S9L 


G-OST | 


ipbslec)| 
[eseg 


| (‘poeateoad OSTB SVAL 
UIys oy) ‘snyoy 6—'669 ON 


& aimjyeuruy “968 ON 


ee 


‘panurvwoo—S VOVHAMONIOUVO NOGOPOI— II AIAVL 


45 


Mammatia. 


| | | | | CL'CL'F'9F ON ST pus “aor, 
| -99] [09 9} UL OSTB SL UTYS otLT,) 
‘Ayeuupy sayy Aq poezyuoeser 


: “Tmy8 | ‘EE-6E8T Jo uwotpedxsa oF 
Sunok oqinb Vo ‘pepaoro | -OIBJILVW SSO SOMIBE TIG ‘“SBay 
Ts sel too, pue soddn | | | onoiyuy “4 osimyemur ue 
yjog Jo Yjoo}-Yooyo IoMoyUy OL | ¢-SI 6 | ¢-ST cg 9 | 3c AIL | SILT | OOL | L6T | Atjucaeddy -(61'C1't'9F)/9zE ON 

‘posvuiep 
yonu ‘![jnys sunok apnb ys! | | | 
‘mul UL popAodO Y}90}-Yooy/) Si FL FL | ¢-LT 99) G9 22 GUL BS JUL oe * P omMyvuUlUl UB ATGVqoIg “Y9ZE ‘ON 
| | 
| | | ‘yynpe Ajrveu ynq 
‘T[MAS poseurep youu w FL | G-ZT EL (Ste) 92/2, pape, Se ey 2 a us He ‘UIejIooUN XOQ ‘“f'OT IL’ St “ON 


COZ" STF 9F 
| | ‘ON SI pue ‘morjooT[oo ey} UL 
| | | Os[’ st uTys oy.) ‘AI BILUpy 
oy} Aq poyuesatq “Sh-6E8T 
jo woljtpedxg olo1eyay §,ss0y] 
"S010 [Bq4ISVS ON | | | | souve ug “Pf oaINyeuUt ue 


RSE ONG) UBL pe oh ee ZAG) OL | &-SI | ¢-&T GG | 99 LIL) GIL | GIL | 01% | Atyuoreddy -(0G° ST F'9F) 99ZS ON 


pler) 
Jo) 
je) 
ie) 


| | | (‘uoTyoaT[OO OY} UT OsTB 
| | | SI UIYS poynjs oy) l0llay, , 
pues .snqaiy , “SNH Jo osvAoa 
| oyy jo ASopooZ oy} UL pamsty 
‘Aqpeuupy oyy Aq pojuosotg 
| ‘Eh-6E81 Jo woHTpedxpp o1orey 
UV SSsoy somlVe TIQ ‘sBag 
‘yso10 [ByYISvs ON “MRL Oy | | | | oorejuy °*& omyvurtut ue A]}Ue 
eaoqe uMoIs ATINJ you WaT, OL CT ZI 81} 99|¢-L9] 09 | FIL| SIL; FIL] L1G | teddy ‘(COZ'9L' ILS) P9ZE “ON 


CE CL FOF (ON SE pues “MOTo9] 
-[oo oY} UL Os[w SL ULYs etT,) 


| | “Aqpeatuupy ayy Aq poayuesorg 


‘SSOIOR JILSIA Woyoiq puw | | | CE-GEST Jo worrpodxay o1jorey 
‘peseuep youu ‘{nyssunok | | | uy ssoyy some? IG ‘sBeg 
eyinb W  -4so10 [eyISes ON | | oyorsyuy “& oinjeuut ue 
‘saef UL popadoso 4490}-Y90G) | GIL | SL} GIT] 91 ¢9)G-29] * SII Isl ‘* | 212 | Ayuereddy “(CIT 94) 2986 ‘ON 


"ysor0 [eyVL3es | | | *S qmpe ue 
ON ‘G1OoMUN puv yseyy qeT,| ZI; GI] sf] 06,¢-eL) Lb} °° GGL | StI | 681 | 092 Aljuereddy ‘(4°91 IL’ FF) 992 ON 


46 Southern Cross. 


OMMATOPHOCA. 


Ommatophoca, J. E. Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ p. 7, 1844; Barrett- 
Hamilton, Antarctic Manual, p. 221 (1901). Type Ommatophoca rossi. 


Ommatophora (misprint for Ommatophoea), Turner, P. Zool. Soc., 1848, p. 88. 


OMMATOPHOCA ROSSI.—Ross’s SEAL. 


Ommatophocea rossii, J. E. Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ pp. 7-8, 
pls. vii. & viii. 1844; Cat.of Bones of Mammalia, Brit. Mus. p. 142, 1862; Cat. 
Seals, Brit. Mus. pp. 13 to 15, 1866; List of the Seals, &c. Brit. Mus. 
p- 15, 1874; T. Gill, Prodrome of a Monograph of the Pinnipedes, Comm. 
Essex Institute, p. 6, July 1866; Allen, Hist. N. Amer. Pinnipeds, p. 467 
(see also pp. 418, 414, 416, 419, 420, 449, 451, 453, 458, 459 & 463), 1880; 
‘Turner, Rep. Seals, Voy. ‘ Challenger’ in the years 1873-76, pp. 65-66, 1888 ; 
Bateson, P. Z. S. 1892, pp. 106-7 to 114-15, 1894, pp. 237-238; W. Kiikenthal, 
Denkschr. Medic. Natur. Gesellsch. Jena, iii. p. 443, 1893, & Jenaischen 
Zeitschrift, xxviii. Bd. N. F. xxi. p. 115, 1893; EK. G. Racovitza, La Vie des 
animaux et des plantes dans lAntarctique, p. 30, 1900; Bernacchi, To the 
South Polar Regions, pp. 44, 45, 1901 (photo.). 


“New (Species of) Seal discovered January 21, 1899” (with figure), Sir George 
Newnes, Strand Magazine, September 1899, pp. 283 & 284; Borchgrevink, 
Geogr. Journ. October 1900, p. 403. 


“Rossii,” Borchgrevink, First on the Antarctic Continent, pp. 74, 103, 1901 
(figs. of skull, upper and lower aspect). 


Type.—No. 45.11.25.4 (324A) of the British Museum collection. 

The synonymy of this species presents no difficulties. 

Fistory.—F¥or the first description of this Seal, as also of Lobodon 
and Leptonychotes, we are indebted to Dr. J. E. Gray. Until the return 
of the ‘ Belgica’ from her imprisonment in the Antarctic pack-ice our 
knowledge of Ross’s Seal was of the most slender description. The 
first known specimens were those brought home by Sir James Ross 
from an unknown locality in the South Polar regions. These, a 
skin and two skulls, for many years remained the unique representa- 
tives of their race in Europe, if not in the world. I am indebted to 
Professor D’Arcy W. Thompson for the information that a skin and 
skull of this rare species were presented to the Town Museum of 
Dundee, but that the skull seems to have been lost, and its where- 
abouts cannot be traced. No specimens, therefore, of those brought 
home by the ‘ Belgica’ and ‘Southern Cross’ could exceed in value 
those of Ross’s Seal. 

The first naturalist to lay claim to the rediscovery of Ross’s Seal 
was Mr. W. 8. Bruce, who states that the “ Mottled Grey Seal,” as he 
calls it, was with the Crab-Eating Seal ‘in greatest abundance” on 
the pack-ice. ‘They were usually associated with the Creamy-White 
Seals (Lobodon) on the pack, and I found many to be with young.” 


Mammatia. A7 


It is, however, questionable whether Mr. Bruce’s identification was 
correct (vide infra, p. 49). 

Following Mr. Bruce, came the Belgian Antarctic Expedition, 
which, however, found this Seal but rarely. According to Dr. 
Racovitza, it was encountered on only thirteen occasions during the 
sojourn of the ‘ Belgica’ in the ice. To this expedition we owe the 
first photographs ever taken of this rare Mammal, and our interest in 
it is but heightened by Dr. Racovitza’s vivid description of its 
peculiar appearance and strange voice. 

So little known, in fact, was Ross’s Seal that the members of 
the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition did not at first recognise it. 
The result was the announcement in the Strand Magazine of the 
discovery of a new species of Seal on January 27th, 1899. Ilus- 
trations taken from photographs were also published, from a glance 
at which Dr. Racovitza was able to surmise that the supposed 
new Seal was in reality the present species." 

Like the ‘ Belgica, the ‘Southern Cross’ found this species “ very 
poorly represented.” Only four specimens were secured, all in the 
pack; of these one only was a female. These, no doubt, represent 
the four skins and skulls which have been examined by me, and two 
of which are now in the collection of the British Museum. 

Distribution —Although probably poorer in numbers than the 
other three species, Ross’s Seal is thus shown to have a fairly wide 
distribution, having been found (excluding Ross’s own specimens, the 
locality for which is uncertain), so far as we know, in all cases on 
the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of Joinville Island and Louis 
Philippe Land (Bruce), west of Alexander Land (‘Belgica’), and in 
the neighbourhood of Victoria Land (‘Southern Cross’). 

Habits—Of the habits of Ross’s Seal practically nothing was 
known until the publication of Dr. Racovitza’s interesting notes. 
As has been already stated, that naturalist found it, hke Weddell’s 
Seal, the White Seal and the Leopard-Seal, an inhabitant of the 
pack-ice, where it feeds exclusively on large Cephalopods. 

The most novel observation, however, is that which has regard to 
its voice, which is said to be very curious. The sounds which it 
emits are very varied. “Son larynx fortement gonflé constitue une 
caisse de résonance, et le voile du palais tres développé, distendu par 
de lair, constitue a l’animal une sorte de cornemuse. On entend 
@abord, chez la béte irritée, une sorte de roucoulement de tourterelle 
enrouée, auquel succede le gloussement d’une poule affolée de terreur, 


1 Mr. Hanson, as I learn from the other officers of the scientific staff on the 
‘ Southern Cross,’ always maintained that the supposed new Seal was nothing but 
Ross’s Seal. See also Bernacchi (¢.c. pp. 44, 45).—R. B.S, 


48 Southern Cross. 


et la finale c’est un reniflement sans harmonie produit par lair 
violemment expulsé par les narines.” 

External appearance-—As in the case of the other species, the 
exact details of the coloration of Ommatophoca are still very imperfectly 
known. Gray’s plate tells us very little. In his written description 
of the type-specimen he stated that the colour was “greenish-yellow, 
with close oblique yellow stripes on the side, pale beneath.” The 
present coloration of the skin I should describe as being as nearly as 
possible olive above, shading gradually into tawny-olive beneath, 
with regions of lighter yellowish shades on the breast and neck. 


MR. NICOLAI HANSON, WITH ROSS’S SEAL. 


(By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) 


There is no very distinct line of demarcation between the colours of 
the upper and under surfaces; neither are there many spots. The 
“stripes” described by Gray are, however, present at about the place 
where a line of demarcation might be expected to occur. On the 
flanks they occur as streaks of the colour of the under surface, having 
a breadth of about a quarter of an inch, which running obliquely 
forwards invade the colour of the upper surface. Occasionally in 
places where the streaks are interrupted a spot or two is formed. 
Otherwise the creature is spotless. 

Mr. Bruce in his very brief allusion to the coloration of this 
species makes no mention of these streaks, but merely compares it 
with the Crab-eating Seal, adding that its coat is “somewhat sleeker, 


Mammalia. 49 


of a beautiful pale mottled grey colour, darker on the back and lighter 
on the belly, and varying in intensity in different individuals.” The 
streaks are so well represented in the reproductions of Dr. Cook’s 
photographs published both in his own book and in Dr. Racovitza’s 
paper, that I cannot help regarding them as highly characteristic 
of the species. Mr. Bruce compares Ommatophoca with Lobodon, 
to which, he states, “in form and size” it is “very like.” This 
remark about an animal which has been described by Dr. Racovitza 
in such vivid language as so highly distinct from all the other 
species makes me suspect that Mr. Bruce may have been mistaken 
in his identification of Ross’s Seal. 

Unfortunately no skins of Ommataphoca were entrusted to me 
for examination by Dr. Racovitza. The skins secured by Mr. Hanson 
were in salt, and not in a condition suitable for description. 

From the account of Dr. Racovitza, Ommatophoca would appear 
to be of very remarkable form. It is, he says, “le plus 
phoque des phoques, car chez lui toute forme de quadrupede a 
disparu. Son corps n’est plus quun sac fusiforme pourvu de 
membres tres réduits ”—a description completely borne out by 
Dr. Cook’s photographs, as well as by Mr. Borchgrevink’s note 
(op. & loe. cit.), that the body of the first specimen of his supposed 
new species “ was not unlike that of the ordinary Seal, but the neck 
was of more than ordinary thickness, and under the chin it extended 
to a great round muscular purse. The head was short and broad, the 
eyes jarge and protruding, and the mouth short. The eyes were 
somewhat slanting. It had six front teeth in the upper jaw, two in 
the under jaw, but no back teeth.” ' The four skins brought home by 
the ‘ Belgica’ are those of an animal distinctly smaller than the other 
three species. Their total length, measured from the tip of the nose 
to that of the tail, reaches only from 4 feet 4 inches to 4 feet 
10 inches (1400 millimetres). The thick and hairy tail presents no 
characteristic features, having a length of about 4 inches (100 milli- 
metres). The flippers, as in the other species, are completely 
covered with hair. They are decidedly smaller than those of Lobodon 
or Leptonychoies. The fore-flippers carry five, the hind two to five, 
in the latter case rudimentary, claws. The greatest length is, for 
the fore-flippers 9 to 12 inches (300 millimetres), for the hind 10 to 
12 inches (300 millimetres). It is due to those who have worked 
only at the type skin to say that, like them, in examining it, I have 
completely failed to find any traces of claws on the hind-flippers. 


1 See Mr. Hanson’s account of the capture of this specimen, as recorded in his 
private ‘ Diary’ (infra, pp. 89).—R. B.S. 
E 


50 Southern Cross. 


SKULLS. 


In the specimens brought home by the ‘Southern Cross’ the numbers 
are those used by Mr. Hanson. Of these four, one (No. 1) is the 
smallest adult, another (No. 2) the largest known, the latter exceeding 
slightly in size No. 897 of the ‘ Belgica’ collection, which considerably 
exceeds the largest of Ross’s own specimens (No. 43, 11, 25, 4). 

Distinguishing characteristics. —The skull of Ross’s Seal cannot 
possibly be confounded with that of any other living Pinniped. As 
regards general appearance, its nearest resemblances lie with Cysto- 
phora cristata, Erxleben, of Arctic waters. In size it about equals 
that of Leptonychotes, and is slightly smaller than that of Zobodon. 
Here the resemblance ceases: the feeble dentition, broad inter- 
zygomatic and short naso-palatal regions, together with the vertical 
inclination of the nares, at once mark its distinctness. 

The cranial characters of Ommatophoca are exceedingly puzzling. 
Were it not for the differences of dental formulae (Ommatophoca 
possessing one more incisor on each side of the lower jaw than 
Cystophora), we should have very strong grounds for including it in 
the Cystophorinae. Indeed, its resemblances to Cyslophora are very 
remarkable. As pointed out by Sir W. Turner, the two skulls 
approach each other in the vertical inclination of the anterior nares, 
in their relation to the infraorbital foramina, in the great width of 
the orbits and interzygomatic regions, and in the length of the 
ascending portions of the premaxillae. These are so short as to 
leave a definite part of the anterior nares bounded by the superior 
maxillae. He might have added the feebleness of the post-canine 
dentition. They differ, however (besides the dental formula), in 
the greater length of the nasals of Ommatophoca, in which also the 
superior maxillae articulate with their outer border as far as the tip, 
and do not leave the anterior part of their border free. Further, the 
palate plates of the palatal bones are shorter in Ommatophoca—a 
character evidently connected with the resonant vocal powers of the 
animal—the upper incisors are immensely more feeble, and the shape 
of the crowns of the cheek-teeth is quite distinct. 

Most of these characters are peculiar to Ommatophoca and are not 
found in any other genus, but, in addition to its dental formula, 
which allies it to the Stenorhynchinae, it finds a connection with 
that family through Lobodon, in which genus I find to a lesser degree 
a similar conformation of the pre-maxillae. 

An account of the teeth will be given below. They do not help 


Mammatia. oa 


us to discover the relationships of this strange form, but are as 
distinct from any other genus of Stenorhynchinae as each of them is 
in this respect from the rest. 

Altogether, I can only regard Ommatophoca as a most interesting 
eeneralised form, an annectant genus, showing affinity both to the 
Stenorhynchinae and the Cystophorinae, to both of which it stands in 
a quasi-ancestral relationship. I think it more convenient that it 
should remain included in the Stenorhynchinae than that it should 
form the type of a new family or sub-family. 

To come to individual differences (apart from the teeth) I find 
little variation in the eight skulls before me. The most variable 
character in the cranium appears to be the amount of the superior 
maxillae which enters into the boundary of the superior nares. The 
length of this section of the boundary varies in the different specimens 
from 5 to 17 millimetres. 

As in Lobodon and Leptonychotes there is practically no develop- 
ment of the sagittal crest. The lambdoid crest is, however, well 
developed. 

Sex.—The sex of Ross’s specimens is unknown. One skull of 
those collected by the ‘ Belgica’ was that of an adult female, the other 
that of a young male. Since one of the known females is the largest 
skull of the four and there are no apparent differences in the size 
of the teeth, I see no way of telling the sex of the two unknown 
skulls. Neither can the one unknown female amongst the skulls 
brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ be certainly indicated—unless, 
indeed, it be No. 1, which, although distinctly adult, is the smallest 
skull of the eight known. All things considered, it is evident that 
there can be no striking differences between the sexes of this Seal, 
and it is as likely as not that differences of size represent age and 
not sex. 

Age.—There is little to be said on this point. In many of the 
skulls, even the larger examples, the teeth are fresh or but slightly 
worn. Yet, in the smallest skull of all (No. 1 of the ‘Southern Cross’ 
collection) not only have the cheek-teeth completely disappeared 
from both jaws, but in some cases hardly a trace of the alveoli is 
discernible, 

Dentition— Undoubtedly a great deal of the interest aroused by 
Ommatophoca centres in its dentition. The first striking point in 
this connection is the remarkable feebleness of the teeth. Thus, with 
a skull attaining to more than double the size of that of Phoca 
grocenlandica or P. vitulina, the teeth are about equal in size to 
those of the former, and actually inferior to those of the latter 

E 2 


52 Southern Cross. 


species. The only southern Seal which at all nearly approaches 
Ommatophoca in the size of the teeth is Leptonychotes ; but here 
again the canines of the latter species are many times larger than 
those of the former, while the cheek-teeth are also larger and of a 
different shape. In Ommatophoca the cheek-teeth are provided with 
three cusps, the central one being the largest. In Leptonychotes 
the rudiments of posterior or anterior cusps, even when present, 
are obscured by the prominence of the central cusp. In spite 
of their feebleness, the teeth of young specimens of Ommatophoca 
may, as 1s usual with other Pinnipeds, be so crowded in the jaw as 
to overlap one another. With the lengthening of the bone in which 
their roots are embedded, the space between them increases, and the 
position of their long axis becomes parallel to that of the jaw itself. 

The second point in connection with the teeth of Ross’s Seal is 
the remarkable instance of variation with which they present us. 
This had attracted attention even when the species was represented 
in collections only by the two skulls brought home by Ross, and 
formed the subject of discussion by Mr. Bateson’ and Dr. Kiken- 
thal.? The difficulties and interest of the subject have been doubly 
increased by the specimens brought home by the ‘Belgica’ and the 
‘Southern Cross.’ Before dealing with these it will be well to describe 
the peculiarities of the teeth of Ross’s specimens. 

In one of these skulls (No, 43.11.25.4) the single-rooted first post- 
canine is followed on each side of either jaw by three double-rooted pre- 
molars and one true molar, that is to say, if, taking the analogy from 
4x4 Loxal 

m. ———, 
ae Sd at Ix 
This dentition has been supposed by Mr. Bateson to represent the 
normal arrangement in the animal. In No. 3248, on the contrary, 
the upper jaw is provided with six cheek-teeth on the left side, the 
first two of which are smaller, and it is reasonable to suppose that 
they represent the first cheek-tooth of No. 43.11.25.4, since the 
corresponding tooth on the right side, although single, is provided 
with two distinct crowns, and looks, when zn situ, exactly like two 
teeth united in a single cavity. Presumably then, although the 
first cheek-tooth of the left side is represented by two distinct 
teeth, these have apparently originated from some kind of splitting 
process, since on the right side this process has been imperfectly 
carried out, leaving an organ which is exactly half-way between 


other Seals, we regard the dental formula as p.m. 


* P. Z. 8. 1892, pp. 106-108; also ‘ Materials for Study of Variation,’ pp. 237- 
238, 1894. 
? Jena. Zeitschr. (2), xxviii. pp. 76-118, pl. III., 1V. 1893. 


Mammalia. 53 


one and two teeth, being in fact a single root with two crowns. 
The remaining teeth differ markedly from the corresponding teeth of 
No. 43.11.25.4 in that only one of them is distinctly double- 
rooted. The bifurcation of the root is represented in the remainder 
merely by a slight basal notch, most prominent in the last tooth on 
the left side, and by a central groove which, passing up each side of 
the root and being deeper externally, evidently represents the double- 
rooting of the cheek-teeth of No. 43.11.25.4. The groove is so 
prominent in the last tooth on the right side that this tooth is 
double-rooted, although not so prominently so as is the corresponding 
tooth of No. 43.11.25.4. 

The teeth of the lower jaw in 3240 represent in various degrees 
the steps between single- and double-rooted teeth. Each of the first 
pre-molars is double-crowned, but single-rooted, like the first tooth 
on the right side of the upper jaw. The second and third teeth 
on each side possess a broad, compressed, single root, divided by a 
rather deep, central, longitudinal groove on each side. The fourth 
and fifth are distinctly double-rooted, but not so prominently as 
are the corresponding teeth of No. 43.11.25.4. 

Of the two ‘ Belgica’ skulls, No. 897 agrees, in the number of its 
cheek-teeth and the character of their roots, with No. 43, 11, 25, 4. 
The teeth, however, especially the lower incisors, are rather small. 
No. 700, on the other hand, presents us with an entirely new 
combination. In this head there are six teeth on either side of the 
upper jaw, but here, if we are to apply the same hypothesis as 
before, the splitting process has apparently taken place not at the 
anterior, but at the posterior, end of the series. Thus the two last 
teeth on either side are much smaller than the remainder, and 
may be taken to represent the fifth tooth of a normal head. The 
first of the pair is in each case double-rooted ; the second is single- 
rooted on the left and imperfectly provided with two roots on the 
right. The remaining teeth of the upper jaw are similar to those of 
No. 43, 11, 25, 4, except only that the double root of number two is 
very feebly developed and the small basal notch runs up the tooth as 
a groove as in No. 324). In the teeth of the lower jaw we have 
every gradation, from the tapering single-rooted number one, 
through the flattened and grooved number two, and the slightly 
double-rooted number three, to numbers four and five, both double- 
rooted, and with, in the latter case, widely separated fangs. 

The four specimens brought home by the ‘Southern Cross’ are 
invaluable as presenting us with further modifications of the same 
type of variation. All are adult, but not one of them agrees with 


54 Southern Cross. 


the normal formula for other Seals. In skull No. 4 the formula for 
the cheek-teeth is p.m. and m. : : : In the case of the upper jaw 
the lesser size of the last two teeth suggests that, as in skull No. 700 
(‘ Belgica’), they are the representatives of the typical fifth grinder. 
On the right side and on the left side each is provided with double 
roots. The remaining teeth resemble those of No, 43.11.25.4, 
being all, with one exception, more or less provided with double 
roots. The single exception is the first, which, as in every other 
known instance, is single rooted. 

In No. 3 the formula is again p.m. and m. ae 
still apply Mr. Bateson’s hypothesis, it appears to be the last tooth 
which has undergone reduplication. The supposed “ daughter” teeth * 
are, however, remarkable in two ways. In the first place they are 
not small teeth as is the case in the two instances already described 
(Nos. 700 and 4). On the contrary, one of them (the anterior one), 
is, like all the teeth of this particular specimen, uncommonly robust, 
and probably larger than any single fifth tooth of any known skull 
of this species. The posterior one is smaller than its comrade ; but 
still not small when measured by the standard of the “daughter ” 
teeth of other specimens. Secondly, these teeth are unique, amonest 
four similar instances, in being both single-rooted. | Opposite to these 
teeth in the lower jaw we have a tooth which is again unique of its 


where, if we 


kind, being the only absolutely single rooted m. aL in the whole 


series. It looks as if the development of the teeth of one jaw had 
had some influence on those of the other. All the cheek-teeth of 
the left upper side are single-rooted, the roots of the third, fourth, 
and fifth being broad and grooved. Those of the right upper side, 
with the exception of the first, second, and last, are double-rooted. 
In the lower jaw all are double-rooted except the first and last. Of 


1 2 
these p.m. — and — are crowded and slightly overlap each other. 
The whole head is remarkable for the great size of the teeth. These 
are as remarkable for their unusually Jarge, as are those of No. 897, 
for their unusually small size. 
No. 2 presents us with a fourth instance where the formula is 


6 x 6 . 
again p.m. and m. Be In this case each supposed “ daughter ” 
a) » 


tooth is fully provided with double roots, those of the last forming 


1 T borrow this term from Mr. Bateson. 


Mammalia. 55 


a particularly wide angle. They are slightly smaller than the 
remainder of the series. All the teeth of this specimen, except the 
first premolars, both upper and lower, possess well-developed double 
roots. Pm.z is a remarkable tooth. Its crown is, for Ommatophoca, 
particularly well formed and carries three cusps. The central cusp 
is far more prominent than either of the others, and is partially split 
into two by a groove. This seems to me to afford an exact parallel 
to the “ cloven” cusp of a specimen of Phoca groenlandica, as 
described and figured by Mr. Bateson at p. 239 of his work. But 
in this instance the “cloven” tooth is not opposite to a reduplicated 
tooth on the corresponding side of the same jaw, as in the case of 
Ommatophoca. Dr. Forsyth Major has been good enough to draw 
my attention to a similar occurrence in Didelphys marsupialis. Ina 
specimen of this species (No. 93.12.24.1)in the British Museum, 


if ss) on the left side is an exceptionally well-developed tooth, and 


is cloven in an exactly similar manner. 

In No. 1 we come toa completely new phase of the question. 
This specimen, which, although fully adult and the smallest known 
example of the species, is, as regards its post-canine dentition, 
absolutely toothless. Not only have all the cheek-teeth dis- 
appeared, but even the alveoli have partially or wholly vanished 
with them. 

We have then in Ommatophoca a highly remarkable instance of 
variation in the teeth—an instance which, I believe, is unique 
amongst the mammalia. It may be, perhaps, well to summarise 
the main points :— 

(I.) Disregarding the toothless skull (No. 1) we have seven 
specimens. -Of these only two (Nos. 43. 11. 25. 4 and 897) have 


: ; ese 15) : 
the normal Phocid formula of p.m. and m. paver For four of the 


: : : 5) 8% ‘ 2 
remainder the formula is p.m. and m. Beas? and for one (No, 524d) 


6X 5 
pin andin. 
dX 9 


&v 


(II.) In all cases where six cheek-teeth occur in the upper jaw, 
“two adjoining individuals of the series are smaller than the 
remainder, and are sometimes also so closely associated, that it may 
reasonably be supposed (as in the case of the original specimens) 
that they represent a corresponding single tooth of an individual 
possessing only five upper cheek-teeth. In one case only (No. 3) 


56 Southern Cross. 


are the “daughter” teeth almost equal in size to the remaining 
individuals of the series. 
(III.) In four of these five cases, on the above reasoning, the 


1 
extra tooth is apparently the product of m.—. Jn one only 


(No, 3246) is it apparently the product of p.m. is 


(1V.) In addition to the above, there occur several instances of 
what, following the above suppositions, can only be regarded as 
abortive or incomplete division or reduplication of teeth. Such 
abortive reduplication may be of two kinds. 

(V.) Either it occurs (a) as if by some kind of sympathy in a 
tooth closely related to an individual supposed to have undergone 
reduplication, either on the opposite side of the same jaw or in the 
opposite jaw. Thus in No. 5240 (a highly interesting specimen, since 


sco ae 1 
it presents the only instance of reduplication in p.m.—,— the only 


instance of complete reduplication on one side accompanied by only 
abortive reduplication on the other—also the only instance of, in addi- 


tion to the above, abortive variation in m. ——in which the formula 


is p.m. and m. e A 2 

5x5 
the road to division. Each, although singly rooted, is provided with 
two, in most cases quite distinct and perfect, crowns, and is grooved 
along the most probable line of division into two teeth. 


(VI.) or (8) it may occur independently, as has happened in the 


), all the first premolars being halfway along 


case of m. bof the same head (No. 3240), or in p.m. ae of No. 2. 


(VII.) In addition to the supposed reduplication or splitting a 
very wide range of variation is observable in regard to the rooting 
of the teeth. Almost any of these, except the first premolars, 
may appear either with two perfect roots or with a single root 
only. 

(VIII) But between these forms there are many gradations 
represented by flattened single roots—flattened single roots grooved 
along the plane where a division into two roots would occur—flattened 
single roots in which incipient division is indicated by a terminal 
notch and all stages of development of this terminal notch, until it 
becomes a cleft deeply dividing the pillars of a fully developed 
double root. These gradations are most easily seen in the teeth of a 
single head, such as the lower molars of No. 3246 or of No. 700: 


Mammatia. 57 


they occur, however, with much completeness in certain teeth taken 
2, . . 
throughout the series, such as premolar— of either jaw, and I have 


nut the slightest doubt that in a series of sufficient size they would 
be exhibited in every cheek-tooth. 

(IX.) It seems fair to regard this variability of the rooting as 
closely connected with the actual reduplication of the teeth, so 
that a tooth with double roots would, perhaps, in this species, be 
regarded as no less on the way to reduplication than a tooth with 
double crowns. At all events this possibility is strongly sug- 
gested by the numerous intermediate steps which occur between 
a tooth with a single columnar root and a fully double-rooted 
tooth. 

(X.) This variability in respect to the roots is not confined to the 
original teeth, but may occur also in the supposed “daughter ” teeth. 
A pair of these may occur in any of the following combinations :-— 
(a) both single-rooted; (8) both double-rooted; (y)* one double- 
rooted and the other single-rooted; or (6) one fully, and the other 
only partially double-rooted. Further, a single-rooted pair of 
“daughter” teeth on one side of the jaw may be represented by a 
double-rooted pair on the other side, as in No. 4. 

(XL) The variability in respect to the roots is greater in some 
teeth than in others. Thus (although one or both of the “daughter” 


: if : 
teeth of m. — may be single-rooted), in no head except No. 3 


does this tooth itself, if unreduplicated, possess less than two roots. 
Where reduplication is supposed to have occurred, one or both of the 
“daughter” teeth may be single-rooted. It is remarkable that the 
only instance of a single-rooted m. aT is due, apparently, to a case 
of “sympathy.” This occurs in No. 3, a head in which both 


» 1 : sg + 
“daughter” teeth of m.— are single-rooted. Similarly, p.m.—., although 


very variable in the nature and development of the two roots, only 
once appears (in No. 324d), with a single flattened and grooved 


; 3 
root, while p.m. Z 1 never single-rooted. P.m. — and 3 appear 


© 


2 
each once single-rooted (both again in No. 3240). P.m. and = 


D 
pai 
each appear twice, with single roots, and to these exceptions No. 324) 


1 Cases y and 6 occur opposite to each other in the same jaw. 
y I ] 


58 Southern Cross. 


again contributes largely. On the contrary, there is no instance of a 
ue and of p.m. 7 it may be said that in all 
cases where this tooth was found i situ it also was single-rooted. 
In a single case (No. 4), where all the teeth had been removed from 
the skull, and could not be certainly identified, I suspect it to have 
been double-rooted. 

(XII.) Besides variation in number and shape there is also 
variation in size. The teeth of No. 897 are abnormally small; those 
of No. 3 abnormally massive, and crowded together in the jaw. 

(XIII) Further, the size of the incisors is conspicuously variable, 
as exhibited by the large incisors of No. 324) and the small ones 
of No. 897. 

Having thus described the variations to which the teeth of the 
known specimens of Ommatophoca are subject, it is time to turn to 
what has been written on the subject by Mr. Bateson and Dr. 
Kiikenthal. In fairness to these writers it should be at once stated 
that Mr. Bateson’s remarks were based upon an examination of only 
two skulls—those brought home by Ross,—while, so far as I know, 
Dr. Kiikenthal never had an opportunity of seeing the actual 
specimens, but based his conclusions on mere descriptions and upon 
Mr. Bateson’s arguments. It will not then appear surprising, if I 
find myself, after the advantages of examining no less than eight 
skulls, unable to agree with all that has been written on the subject. 

To deal first with Mr. Bateson. That naturalist has found in the 
variations of skull No. 324 the material for a highly ingenious 
paper, wherein he has used them in conjunction with other like 
variations as a ram wherewith to batter the prevailing views on the 
homologies of mammalian teeth. 

As the result of an examination of great numbers of skulls of the 
Primates, Carnivora and Marsupialia, he finds that in many 
examples of various genera and species “reduplication of teeth may 
occur in such a way that a tooth which is usually single may be 
represented by two teeth, and that the two teeth thus formed may 
either (1) both take place in the ordinary series, or (2) may stand 
externally and internally respectively.” 

The prevailing hypothesis, as Mr. Bateson points out, necessarily 
“involves a definite conception of the mode in which variation 
works,” and, further, that “in variation the individuality of each 
member of the series is respected.” 

But, as in the case also with other multiple parts, such as digits 
and phalanges, the difficulty in applying this principle and in 


double-rooted p.m. 


Mammalia. 59 


following the individual history of each tooth is notorious. Espe- 
cially is this the case because “though variation may sometimes 
respect the individual homologies, yet this is by no means a universal 
rule; and, as a matter of fact, in all cases of Multiple Parts, as to 
the variation of which any considerable body of evidence has been 
collected, there are numerous instances of new forms arising in 
which what may be called the stereotyped or traditional individuality 
of the members has been superseded.” 

Judged by the ordinary rules of morphological criticism, this 
[original] specimen [of Ommatophoca vossii| shows one or both of two 
things :— 

(1) The first premolar of Ommatophoca may in itself represent 
two premolars of an ancestor ; 

Or (2) in the descendants of Ommatophoca the single first 
premolar may be represented by two distinct and separated pre- 
molars. 

One or both of these propositions may be true. If the division 
of the other three first premolars were as complete as that of the left 


>m,—, there would be no indication of their origin. But if it is 
) fo) 


possible for a premolar to represent or to be represented by two 
premolars, without any visible indication of its double nature, may 
not the same be true of the premolars of other forms ? may it not be 
true of teeth generally? And if it is true, how are the homologies 
of teeth to be determined ? 

Mr. Bateson’s arguments carry with them all the virtues and 
vices of brilliant destructive criticism. He has seized a tempting 
opportunity to attempt the downfall of, or at least to heap discredit 
upon, the theory of homology, a theory which, like all other human 
theories, is but a working hypothesis, and as such no more unsatis- 
factory or satisfactory than others of its kind. Without the theory 
of homology, much of the best biological work of the past century 
would be barren. and meaningless. Regarded by its light, a good 
deal of it seems to tend towards the same goal. To brand our 
system as “imperfect” is to tell us what we already knew. To 
discredit that system is to retard rather than to advance knowledge 
—unless the objector can produce another system better and more 
workable in its stead. 

This Mr. Bateson, like many other destructive critics, con- 
spicuously fails to do. In fact he does not even attempt a task 
which he probably regards as impossible. The weakness of his 
position is best demonstrated by his concluding paragraph, wherein 


60 Southern Cross. 


he confesses that “the present system of homology must probably 
be retained as a basis of notation, imperfect though it is, and 
although it is founded on a misconception of essential facts.” 

It is unnecessary, in the present connection, to deal further with 
Mr. Bateson’s arguments. He has certainly indicated the difficulties 
of reading homologies; he has not necessarily proved the impossi- 
bility. 

As a critic of Mr. Bateson, Dr. Kikenthal acknowledges the 
probable existence of numerous instances of (to use Mr. Bateson’s 
term) reduplication in teeth, and believes that such reduplication or 
splitting may in certain cases occur in any cheek-tooth. But, since 
all intermediate stages of the phenomenon may be found, there is 
nothing to prevent the reading of the homologies. Thus in the case 
of skull No. 3240, he finds no difficulty in believing that at the 
anterior end of the series two teeth on the left are homologous with 
one on the right, and, that being so, there is nothing to prevent us 
from regarding each of the remainder, starting from the last two, as 
homologous—a supposition which is, indeed, not denied by Mr. 
Bateson. 

Continuing, Dr. Kiikenthal thinks that, since in some cases each 
of a pair of these reduplicated teeth may attain to the same size as 
the remainder of the series, there may in this way arise a permanent 
increase in number and the formation of a new species possessing 
six cheek-teeth. 

The more often the new six-toothed form alone occurs, the 
less frequent will be intermediates, and the more difficult, although 
not impossible, will it be to follow the phylogeny. Even were the 
original five-toothed forms entirely ousted, and the new six-toothed 
forms predominant, there would still occasionally occur five-toothed 
individuals to indicate the origin of the former. Difficulties in 
reading homologies might increase ; impossibility would not exist. 

Turning to another form of variation in Mammalian teeth, the 
appearance of extra teeth, as in Halichwrus,’ in which the upper 
jaw may possess six instead of five cheek-teeth, Dr. Kikenthal 
remarks that in this case the new teeth are always at the same place 
at the posterior end of the jaw. They are not the result of redupli- 
cation, but represent an entirely new factor. Here again homology 
is still possible and even easy, the five teeth of a typical skull corre- 
sponding to the first five of a six-toothed skull, and the sixth tooth 
of the latter being something new. 


1 See A. Nehring, Ueber Gebiss und Skellett von Halicherus grypus. Zool. 
Anzeiger, p. 610, 1873. 


Mammalia. 61 


Kikenthal’s opinion seems to be that the increase of teeth 
amonest the Pinnipedia, whether by reduplication or by the addition 
of new teeth, is due to a tendency to lengthen the jaw amongst a 
group of animals whose development is still going on, and to whom 
in the execution of their main object in hfe, namely the capture of 
fish, such a lengthening would be useful. 

He finds a parallel between the reduplication of the teeth of 
Ommatophoca and the development of teeth in young Whalebone 
Whales, in which his studies have shown that, while the rudimentary 
cheek-teeth of the youngest embryos are many-cusped, those of older 
embryos are single-cusped, and occasionally reduplicated. 

With the earler portion of Dr. Kikenthal’s remarks few, no 
doubt, will be found to disagree. The suggestion that a new tooth 
may arise either as an offshoot of one already in existence or as a 
new and independent organ is indeed not without probability. 
When, however, he comes to deal with increase of the teeth amongst 
the Pinnipedia, he gives vent to suggestions which, however probable 
they may have appeared at the time when they were written, 
certainly do not apply to Ommatophoca as we now know it in the 
light of Dr. Racovitza’s description. According to that naturalist, 
the animal never catches fish ; its jaw is extremely short and feeble, 
and there is no evidence whatsoever to justify us in supposing that 
a lengthening of the jaw would be either useful or probable in the 
future. Whatever applications Dr. Kiikenthal’s remarks may bear 
to other Pinnipeds they can have no meaning whatsoever as applied 
to Ommatophoca. 

To consider the specimens once more, the most striking charac- 
teristic of the series is, to my mind, not any possible increase or 
reduction of the teeth, but the exceeding variation which they 
exhibit. The most noticeable feature of this variation is certainly 
its quantity: its quality (for a knowledge of which we are so largely 
indebted to Mr. Bateson) may be found exhibited in numerous other 
instances amongst the Mammalia. As compared with this variation, 
questions of increase or decrease of teeth are evidently, in this case, 
even if proved, subsidiary. The one thing obvious is that we have 
in Ommatophoca an animal in which the dentition is, whether in 
number of teeth, in their size or form, vastly more variable than it 
is in any other known Heterodont Mammal. 

Recent investigation has shown that teeth, like every other 
character, are subject to variation. They are not the entirely stable 
organs they were at one time believed to be. Yet no instance of 
instability so remarkable as that of Ommatophoca has, I believe, been 


62 Southern Cross. 


described—an instance in which, of eight known examples, only two 
resemble each other. 

The first problem then which confronts us is the explanation of 
such variability. It can be no more meaningless than is, as a rule, 
the remarkably definite form and condition of Mammalian dentition. 
The question is—can we possibly find the meaning ? 

To my mind there is one point which stands out most clearly in 
regard to a case like the present. The animal whose teeth are 
subject to such variation can have no use for a stable dentition. 
Just as the highly specialised complications of the crowns of the 
cheek-teeth of Zobodon must have arisen through some very special 
need of the animal—some very specialised manner of feeding for 
which the particular form of tooth must be an advantage—so it seems 
clear that Ommatophoca must be an animal, the capture and ingestion 
of whose food is not affected by changes in its dentition. I go 
further even than this, since I believe that, as already explained, the 
animal is in the course of losing its teeth. The dentition shows a 
condition of extreme weakness. The teeth are small and feeble, and 
it is to this very feebleness that I feel inclined to attribute the 
variability as regards the roots. It seems to me, in fact, as if the 
streneth to form a completely double-rooted tooth is frequently 
absent. I would suggest then that except for p.m. Re and T the 
double-rooted tooth must be the normal, the single-rooted a variation. 
My supposition gains strength from the fact that in all the eight 
skulls there is no instance of a double-rooted first premolar—a 
variation which should assuredly, one would think, occur, were 
variations towards strength and not towards weakness the rule. 
Taking the remaining cheek-teeth of the left side, of sixty teeth 
49 or over 80 per cent. are more or less double-toothed, while of the 
remainder many are small, imperfectly formed, or mere “ daughter ” 
teeth of one of the supposed cases of reduplications. It seems 
impossible to doubt then that, following the analogy of other Seals, 
the posterior cheek-teeth of Ommatophoca are normally double- 
rooted. 

Lastly comes the question of the supposed reduplication of teeth, 
a point upon which I have, in the earlier part of this article, followed 
the nomenclature and suggestions of previous writers. Viewed in 
the light of my previous suggestions, the possibility of reduplication 
or the reverse loses much of its importance, since it is probable that, 
where variation is so rife, it may take the form either of increase or 
of decrease in the number of the teeth. In the former case the new 


Mammata. 63 


teeth, as is actually the case, would not be so strong as those of the 
original series. Yet it is necessary to consider the matter, especially 
in view of what has already been written concerning it. 

And first it is advisable to consider what is the normal cheek- 
dentition of Ommatophoca. As long as only two skulls were known, 
I think there could be no doubt that it was necessary to regard it as 
sant m. HES, i This 
4x 4 ca 
view was certainly not shaken by the arrival of the two specimens 
brought home by the ‘ Belgica, since this dental formula was then 
represented on both sides of two skulls and on one side of a ee as 

5 xX 6 
i ae 
Now, however, that the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens are added to the 
series, we may divide the skulls before us into the following 
classes :— 


(following the analogy of other Seals) p.m. 


against only one skull with a complete dentition of pm. and m. 


BS ae + (nos, 43.11.25.4 and 


liga h zs 
(1.) Those wit aa cee ° 


700). 
(II.) One with practically the same dentition, but with an extra 


tooth, apparently as a‘ daughter’ of p.m. > on the left 


1 
side and the remaining premolars apparently in a state 
of semi-reduplication (no. 3240.) 
: : OME 
(III.) Those with p.m. and m. ve Sin each case at first 
0X0 4 


sight by reduplication of m. 1 (nos. 700, 4, 3 and 2). 


—a result in the face of which it clearly behoves us to reconsider our 
opinions as to what must be properly regarded as the normal dentition 
of Ommatophoca. 

In view of the probable capture in the near future of further 
examples of this most interesting Seal, it is not safe to venture on 
positive assertions as to the intricacies of its dentition. It is 
impossible, however, to avoid the suspicion that the four skulls of 
Class III. are those of individuals in which a normal complement of 
two upper molars is in process of reduction, that those of Class I. 
are skulls of individuals in which such a reduction has taken place, 
and that No, 324d is an altogether abnormal and unusual variation — 
an example, in fact, of quite a different class of variation. 

Coupled with the feebleness of dentition, which I have already 
pointed out, nothing could be more natural than reduction of the 
teeth. This is, as is so well shown in the short-jawed races of the 
human species, first manifested by a lessening in size of the last 


64 Southern Cross. 


molar, as so well paralleled in Ommatophoca in the case of the last 
two molars. For in no one of the instances of supposed reduplica- 


: 1 ; 
tion of m. — are either of the “daughter” teeth so well formed or 


rooted as the remainder of the series. 

This process of reduction is admirably in keeping with the 
anatomy of an animal whose teeth are feeble, jaws short, and whose 
prey requires neither holding nor much mastication. 

Further, the fact that, except in the case of No. 3246, the supposed 


Neha : ; A : 1 
cases of reduplication were in each case in connection with m. — and 


never in the lower jaw, does not point to a meaningless reduplication 
of any tooth of the series. 

Lastly, it seems hardly advisable or possible to take as 
normal any condition other than that of the majority, in this case 
4x4 2x 2 
oe ea 
it not for the existence of No. 324+. This skull is undoubtedly the 
most curious of the whole series. I look on it as one of those quite 
abnormal specimens which must in all cases be eliminated from 
questions of the present kind. It seems to be a skull in which both 
reduction and reduplication of the teeth have occurred—the former in 


p-m. Nor could we indeed attempt to do so were 


2 : 1 
regard to m. —, the latter in regard to p.m. —. 


I believe, then, that until the accumulation of more specimens 
proves the contrary, we must regard Ommatophoca as having 
originally possessed two upper molars, one of which it is now in 
process of losing—a supposition which, if borne out, may have far- 
reaching results, and may even turn the scale in favour of the 
formation of a new family for the sole reception of Ommatophoca. 

A distinct parallel to such a state of things occurs in Halichwrus, 
as has been shown by Professor Nehring. No other species 
of Earless Seal possesses a similar dental formula, but Omma- 
tophoca is just that cranially generalised species in which we 
should expect such a type of dentition to occur—a dentition which, 
perhaps, suggests an interesting bridge between the Phocidae and 
Stenorhynchinae. 

In my previous remarks I have not attempted to discuss the 
causes of reduplication in teeth, nor alluded to those hypotheses 
which view with favour the rise of the Cetacean dentition by means 
of a wholesale process of this kind. As to the former matter, the 
exact causes of such reduplication hardly lend themselves to 


Mammalia. 65 


discussion—unless such discussion be based upon minute histo- 
logical, physiological, or embryonical research. Why two teeth may 
occasionally grow where it appears to us that there should be one, is 
as yet—and perhaps always will remain—a mystery. That the 
-phenomenon does occur we may regard as proved; no other hypo- 
thesis. will account for the instances collected by Mr. Bateson, nor, 
as I think, for the vagaries exhibited by skull No. 3246. Further, it 
seems certain that in the cited instances of the occurrence of “ cloven” 
_teeth, this condition is due to what I may call a process of incomplete 
or abortive reduplication—a process of reduplication which has com- 
-menced, but never reached completion. But here again the cause is 
at present beyond conjecture. . 

As to the second point, the possible origin of the Cetacean 
dentition by some wholesale process of reduplication, this may or 
may not have happened. ‘There is, I believe, no real evidence one 
way or the other. I cannot help thinking, however, that those who 
rack their brains for complicated theories in explanation of Cetacean 
dentition, have overlooked the simplest explanation of all. For, if it 
be admitted, as I think has already been suggested by Mr. Bateson 
—a not very difficult or unreasonable concession—that the power of 
forming teeth is distributed along the whole length of the jaw, what 
is more easy than the formation of many teeth in a long jaw, of 
fewer teeth in a shorter jaw? The exact size of such teeth, like 
the size of an Amoeba, would be governed primarily by mechanical 
reasons of unknown scope, secondarily by Natura] Selection. Their 
shape would fall easily under the influence of the latter force. (See 
Table IV, p. 66.) 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. 


To ILLUSTRATE THE VARIATION IN THE CHEEK-TEETH OF THE KNOWN 
SKULLS OF Ommatophoca rosst. 


1 (upper) and 1’ (lower), teeth of skull numbered 3244 (43.11.25.4), collected by 
r James Ross’s Antarctic Expedition. 

2 and 2’ ditto of skull numbered 3248, with same history as No. 324a. 

3 and 3’ ditto of skull numbered 700, obtained by the ‘ Belgica.’ 

4 and 4’ ditto of skull numbered 897, with same history as No 700. 

5 and 5’ ditto of skull numbered 4, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ 

6 and 6’ ditto of skull numbered 3, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ 

7 and 7’ ditto of skull numbered 2, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ 


R 


F 


Southern Cross. 


66 


“ArepuoW Sey [LNA 
[e}}1L088 ON 


‘paseulep [[nyG 


‘uoutoads sty} ut pesodxe ATPeuLsi1o WoyAod ayy Jo YISue, oy} sessordxo stsayjuored ur ounSy omy, 
SI posodxe souluvo oy} Jo qunome oyy AprepIUty [,] 
jo uoystod roddn pesodxe ey souIs 


"48010 
‘UIOMUN Y499J, 


“qS8o.00 [84 


-JISVsON ‘uIOM ATIYSI[S WOT, 


ON 
ON 


‘utoM ATYY.STIS 


"48010 [Bq }Lovs 


‘UIOMUN PUB YSoIF W997, 


*qSa10 [BI}Loes 
q9T, 


"Y1}004-3990T]9 ON 


“UIOMUN 99 T, 


“UMOLO S91 
‘o88 SULOUBAPR T}IM osvotoop AT[eNyow Avut ‘ase 
aq} Jo YyStoy oy} Mel oy} UIOIZ YY90} OYY JO SuIsIA yuBjsuod 94 07 SutMg [,] 
Teas a — ita ae a hr as Ty tp = ail, ee aCe Sa ce ae 


“OTQBITBA 4B MOUTOS 


avy} Ax[Nq sseT ST Y}00}-Yoato v Jo yoor omy 
q oY} 78 poansvout sv ‘sattos 4490}-yaoyo 


‘Opts JOT = 'T ‘opis ays = y 


| 
| 
C.ppul ¢- Cru 
GL 8 8 | &-SL | ¢-FFT qLF7 a GOL | &-L9T| 6 GGG 
| 
| 
C-$Fu eFu 
¢-8 | ¢-8 ¢-8 ICD 91] ¢-cp1|‘e.z71) °° LIL LLL) 06 0&6 
| Le Cr) 
*89142)090] snoiwna ur pauzn{go ‘fwoysey Josngony fo wnasn W ys ayy fo woroarjoy ay} 
| | 
G 8 | G-9 8 |°o:-9F 6F a SOL | LOT) 82 066 
T‘0¢ 
GHG Gay) 1 Gap IL|*e¢!¢.op! - | zIt| 921] 88 | 2F% 
‘PUNT wnynigy pun obyjadiyospy samppg ayy tvau Lo yo pauywjqo ‘uoypadar oyjowmyup unrbyag ay fo 
| ‘PIO | ‘PIO |69-8¢ | ¢-8 cl 0a ||| neg at ists) | oe SI@ 
cg *xolddy, 
6|G-8 | G-2o |} OL | G-91|¢-9%| Of | Ter | G8] Sst] ose 
“psueq *xoiddy *xoiddy | 
ms 3 6F OL | G-&L |} &% O¢ SII | &-G8 | SLL} 9&6 
*xoiddy 
81¢-6 |69-99|¢.6 | ¢-IT | g¢ | ¢¢ |psueq) $6 |psurq| FFZ 
L. ee Sf | ihe ee =| Sees 
“43004 “49003 “q3300| 
-yoaqo | _ y 5 |Seurmvo |‘souriBs| ‘salles | ‘sellas |yseyveI5 
IOMOT ee Jeddn jzaddn jo} yy003 | yy00} | 48 puv | ‘um |-emoSAz , 4300] 
pag jo , I jo uondod | -yaayo | -yeoqo | ‘aut, | -e10 Jo 4B Rasa, “q9 Bue] 
uoeli0d Bee. Jayomt |pesodxe} a19Moy | woddn | ofpprut | qypeaiq | yypeerq sei [eseg 
pesodxe ue ai -BIp jo jo jo UL = |}S09A.14)/yS09ReI15 a 
jo ie i 4807BaL)| q450e7] | YySueT | yySuey |sieseu jo 
‘eefeyae || oN! qysuerT 


‘VECE “ON JO 78} SB 

| oles O44 ST ALOJSIY OY, *d ony 

-vuut ATjuorvdde uy—aqtze ‘on 
Cumnosny, 

af} UL 4STX9 Os[B UaUITOedS sTqy Jo 

ULYS PUB UOJOTOS oY) “satoeds 

| 099J0 df oy} pur , woLsay, ,, pure 

ec 8NQAUT ,, 0 2BBL0 A 944 JO ABO007, 

ey, UL wodizseg puv omns1q 

S Avi) Jo [RULSIIO OUT, “SF-6EST 

jo woljipedxg oyorjuy ssoxy 

souve Ug “6 4npe ue Ayu 

reddy “(FCS L1Sh) PFZE ‘ON 


WOLT—'O 


‘q[Npe you P W—0OL ‘ON 
‘UMOUy [[Nys 
qysesivy oy} !4inpe $—76Eg ‘oN 


WOYIAPJOD AY} WOLT—'F 


es OS POT ON 

pie: "@? 4mpy—s on 

TS EOP APN FON 
‘@)  TInys 


UMOUY JSaSIVy OUT, JUpy—z ‘ON 


—— SS ES NE EE EE —EEE—E—E—E———E—————————————— eee 


“PUVT v}407014 Lvau yond-ao2 ayy U2 paurnygo ‘uoyrpadary ., 8801 ULayINoY ,, ay) fo U0NIA]]}0Q BY} WOLJ~— Vv 


ISSOU VOOHAOLVNNWO— AI WIGViI. 


IE 


NOTES ON ANTARCTIC SEALS. 


COLLECTED DURING THE EXPEDITION OF 
THE ‘SOUTHERN CROSS.’ 


—— 


By EDWARD A. WILSON, M.B., F.Z.S.2 
(Puates II.-VI.) 


Owing to the death of Mr. Nicolai Hanson (the zoologist. best 
qualified to have written an account of the Antarctic Seals), the task 
of describing his specimens has devolved upon one, who though at 
present unacquainted with these animals in a state of nature, has 
nevertheless a great interest in the work, from the fact that he shortly 
hopes to cover the same ground in search of the still (unfortunately) 
hidden treasures of knowledge concerning the Seals of the Antarctic 


' Dr. Wilson has sailed as the naturalist on board the ‘ Discovery.’ Before he 
left for the Antarctic, he made a special study of the animals known to inhabit the 
southern seas, and, shortly before his departure, he forwarded to Professor Ray 
Lankester the notes now published on the Pinnipedia, accompanied by coloured 
drawings of the Seals taken from the newly-mounted specimens presented by Sir 
George Newnes to the British Museum. These notes are supplementary to the 
memoir prepared by Captain Barrett-Hamilton, which is an excellent reswmé of our 
knowledge of the Seals of the Antarctic. The enforced departure of the latter 
naturalist for South Africa took place before Sir George Newnes’ specimens of the 
Antarctic Seals had been mounted in the Museum, and he was only able to 
determine the species of Seals brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ from the 
skins roughly preserved in brine. A few leaden labels were attached to some of 
the specimens, but these had perished in nearly every case, and the two or three 
which remained on the skins no one was able to decipher. Dr. Wilson managed 
to identify the characters stamped by Mr. Hanson on the labels which were 
attached to one or two of the skins, and he was thus able to connect a few of the 
skulls with the actual specimens to which they belonged. He examined the types 
of Antarctic Seals in our Museum, and compared with them the specimens brought 
home by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ The pictures which form the subject of the plates 
in the present volume have been lithographed by Mr. H. Grénvold from Dr. Wilson’s 
paintings, and Mr. Bernacchi’s photographs of the Seals in life were of great 
assistance in determining the natural form of the animals. To Dr. Wilson’s notes 
have been added the accounts given by Mr. Bernacchi in his work ‘'l'o the South 
Polar Regions’ (pp. 318-320), which give us a good idea of the habits and distribu- 
tion of the species of Seals met with by the ‘ Southern Cross’ ; and many interestinz 
records will be found in the private Diary of the late Mr. Nicolai Hanson, printed 
below (pp. 79-105.)—E. R. L. 

F 2 


% 


68 Southern Cross. 


regions. A lamentable succession of accidents has succeeded in 
robbing the collection of the ‘ Southern Cross’ of a very considerable 
part of its value. Through the death of Mr. Hanson most of the 
details as to the preservation of the animals and the labelling of the 
skins have been lost. Thus the possibility of properly attaching the 
skulls to their own several skins, and of correctly determining the 
sexes of the latter, has also vanished. That he was extremely 
careful in recording these details may be gathered by a perusal of 
his private diary and from the verbal testimony of his surviving 
colleagues of the scientific staff of the expedition. 

In only a few cases has it been possible to connect certain skins 
with the zoological notes incidentally included in his private journal, 
but we are deeply indebted to his near relations for the care and 
trouble with which they have sought out and given for our use these 
very valuable extracts. 

I am also personally deeply grateful to Mr. Bernacchi, the 
Meteorologist on the ‘ Southern Cross, for his information respecting 
the life-history of the Seals, and for the use of his very excellent 
photographs, which demonstrate how different is the appearance of 
the living Seals from any illustrations which have hitherto appeared. 

Seals of five species are represented in the collection. Of these, 
four only were taken in the Antarctic regions, all of which were 
already known to science as examples of the Earless Phocidw. The 
fifth was an immature Eared-Seal, one of the Otariidw, which was 
apparently captured by Captain Jensen on Campbell Island, and can- 
not properly be included among the Seals of the Antarctic collection. 

The four Antarctic Seals have been named thus: The Crab-eating 
Seal (Lobodon carcinophagus) ; Weddell’s Seal (Leptonychotes weddelli) ; 
the Leopard-Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyz); Ross’ Seal (Ommatophoca 
TOSS1). 

The question of right in these four Seals to generic distinction 
must be left to others to determine. The name Zeptonychotes for 
Weddell’s Seal has been preferred in this paper to connect it 
superficially, more than really, with Ogmorhinus leptonyx. There 
is probably no more real connection between these two Seals than 
between any other two of the series, and even the superficial 
resemblance between them is far more obvious in the tanned skin 
than in the living animal. Mr. Bernacchi states that there is no 
possibility of confusing a living Ogmorhinus with a living Lep- 
tonychotes, the former having a speed and energy, strength and 
ferocity, which makes it as different from Weddell’s Seal, as the skull 
and dentition of the one are different from those of the other. 


Notes on Antarctic Seals. 69 


1. LEPTONYCHOTES WEDDELLI. Weddell’s Seal. 
(Puate II.) 


Weddell’s Seal is found in great numbers on the coast of South 
Victoria Land, and is the species most commonly met with in Ross’s 
Sea. At almost the farthest southern point reached by the Southern 
Cross Expedition these Seals were numerous, and even in a piece of 
water south of the edge of the Great Barrier, which apparently com- 
municated under ice with the sea, a number of them were found 
(cf. Borchgrevink, ‘ First on the Antarctic Continent,’ p. 286).’ 

Not a single Weddell’s Seal was met with in the pack-ice by the 
‘ Southern Cross, and the numbers which were found on landing at 
Cape Adare are mentioned by Mr. Hanson as belonging to a species 
not before met with by him (¢f. infra, p. 93). 

Weddell’s Seal is therefore a shore Seal, and it remained through- 
out the winter with the party which was landed at Cape Adare. 

Mr. Bruce confirms this view of the distribution of the two 
Sea-Leopards when he says that they were the most rare species in the 
pack-ice about Louis Phillipe Land: and since, in speaking of Ross’s 
Seal there can be little doubt that Mr. Bruce is describing the new 
coat of the Crab-eater (Lobodon), the former species may, without 
doubt, be added to the two Leopard-Seals, and all three classed as 
rave in the pack-ice. The only common Seal in the pack is the 
White Crab-eater (Zobodon), and the only common Seal on the 
- coast-line of the Antarctic regions is Leptonychotes weddellt. 

Weddell’s Seal was the only species found breeding in any con- 
siderable numbers by the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition. Some dead 
young Seals were found buried in guano at Camp Ridley on Cape 
Adare, but apparently no Weddell’s Seals breed there now, though in 
Robertson Bay, close by, a large number of them were breeding, and 
many young were born. Three fcetal Seals of this species were 
brought home in spirits by the ‘ Southern Cross’ with the membranes 
and placenta more or less intact. 

Two quite small specimens were taken from the mothers on 
March 25th and March 29th. Both were females and measured but 
28 centimetres in length. The third specimen was taken from the 
mother on May 5th and measured 45 centimetres in length. This 
was a male, and it showed the typical marking of Leptonychotes, 
though no hairs were visible to the naked eye, save on the face and 

1 Although many examples of this Seal were killed by the members of the 


expedition, and several preserved, only a single specimen has reached the British 
Museum.—R. B.S. 


70 Southern Cross. 


muzzle. The former was covered with fine and silky hairs. the latter 
carried numerous fine black bristles. 

Mr. Bernacchi (p. 318) writes as follows: ‘“ Weddell’s Seal 
(Leptonychotes weddelli) is found in great numbers along the coasts 
of the Antarctic lands, but rarely in the pack-ice. As many as two 
hundred of these Seals were seen together by the ‘Southern Cross’ 
Expedition, even at the farthest point south reached by the ship. 
In the depths of winter it is still to be found near open pools of 
water around large icebergs, which are kept open by the movements 
of the bergs. In appearance it is the most rownded of all the 
Antarctic Seals, with a bullet-like head, and large and prominent 
dark-brown eyes, which appear bloodshot and protruding, though 
always full of expression and pathos. It is slow, quiet, and very 
inoffensive. The staple food of this Seal is crustaceous matter and 
small fish. In colour the back and sides are dark grey, shading off 
into a tawny orange colour underneath. It was found breeding in 
considerable numbers in Robertson Bay during the spring of 1899, 
the first young appearing early in September. 

In the latter month Mr. Bernacchi says that a common red 
crustacean and a small fish like an anchovy, form the principal food 
of the species, and on February 17th Mr. Hanson notes that the 
stomach of a Leptonychotes was quite full of a small fish like a whiting 
(infra, p. 93). 

Perhaps the most characteristic point in the colour of the skin 
of this Seal is the absence of vivid black amongst its many splashes 
and spots of grey. The back and sides are dark grey, darker, as 
usual, mid-dorsally, and shading off into a tawny-orange colour under- 
neath, which is streaked in a very liberal fashion from head to tail 
with grey of a varying depth, but not with black. Again, on the 
upper parts, where the ground colour is dark grey, shading off down 
the sides into tawny orange, there are also longitudinal streaks and 
splashes of pale tawny colour, often very pale, but none of black as are 
found in the Ogmorhinus. There is considerable difference apparently 
in the ruddiness of the under parts of the two Leopard-Seals—the 
True and the False. In Ogmorhinus the colour is more fulvous; 
whereas in Weddell’s Seal the tawny colour exhibits almost a greenish 
tinge by the free admixture of grey markings of varied intensity. 

Mr. Borchgrevink (¢.c. p. 236) mentions Weddell’s Seal as the 
“best represented” species in the pack,’ which, however, was not 
the case; but he does not seem to be well acquainted with the Seals 


1 Mr. Bernacchi (p. 73) says that not one Weddell’s Seal was met with in the 
pack, 


Notes on Antarctic Seats. 71 


obtained by his expedition, as he also figures the skull of a Lobodon 
(t.c. p. 103), and calls it “ Weddellir.” 

In his account of the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition, he mentions the 
present species as being met with on his winter sledge journey 
(p. 159), near Coulman Island and near Cape Constance, where about 
three hundred were seen together (p. 237), as well as in Lady Newnes 
Bay, on the 4th of February (p. 260), and again in a bay in the ice- 
barrier (p. 286). He writes: “Towards the south some Seals were 
basking on the ice. I sent a boat to the end of the bay after them, 
and found that they were Weddell. A party of ski-runners which 
I despatched to the west came upon a large number of Seals in a lake, 
or large deep basin, formed in the plateau of the barrier. Although 
the plateau at that place fell with a gentle slope, it evidently reached 
the level of the sea, as the Seals shot up through blow-holes in the 
ice at the water’s edge.” 

Mr. Bernacchi mentions the species as occurring on one of the 
Possession Islands (p. 235). He further describes the finding of 
Weddell’s Seal on the ice-barrier: “ Round this Cape [Constance] we 
found low land, or, I should say, the edge of the great ice-cap at this 
spot was low. Steaming along the edge of the ice-barrier, we 
discovered a kind of inlet or ‘arm’ running into the glacier for a 
distance of about three miles, with perfectly smooth ice between, and 
fastened to the walls of the glacier. This spot was well sheltered 
from winds, and the great inland ice-cap was easily accessible. A 
rookery of Seals, some hundreds in number, could be seen lying on 
the ice at the bottom end of the arm, and two Emperors and one 
Adelia Penguin were observed. These Seals proved to be Leptony- 
chotes weddellii. They were lying alongside a crack in the ice, most 
of them asleep; they were totally unconcerned at our presence, and 
evinced not the slightest interest in us.” He also gives (p. 274) an 
account of the Seal rookery in the ice-barrier. 


2. OGMORHINUS LEPTONYX. Leopard-Seal. 
(Puate III ) 


The Leopard-Seal was nowhere, and at no time, common. ‘Two 
young ones were captured in the pack-ice on January 3rd. A male 
was killed at Cape Adare on December 22nd, and another was seen 
and successfully photographed by Mr. Bernacchi, also at Cape Adare. 


V2: Southern Cross. 


They are therefore obviously rare at all times, though widely 
distributed. 

A female of the Leopard-Seal was found on September 11th in 
Robertson Bay, containing a young male ready for birth. As 
September is also the month when Weddell’s Seal gives birth to its 
young, there can be no doubt that the Leopard-Seal had come to the 
coast for the same purpose. The food of this Seal, the most active, 
powerful, and ferocious of all the southern Seals, and the most truly 
carnivorous in its dentition, consists mainly of fish, though it is stated 
by Dr. Racovitza that Penguins were accepted as food when thrown 
overboard by him from the ‘ Belgica.’ 

Sir James Ross found in the stomach of one of these animals no 
less than 28 lbs. of fish, including Sphyrenia of 28 inches length, and 
Notothenia of 634 inches. The stomachs of the two young Leopard- 
Seals killed in the pack-ice contained the remains of Octopus. 

Mr. Bernacchi (p. 319) gives the following note: “ The Leopard- 
Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx) is readily distinguished by the great size 
of its elongated body, by its large, flat square head, with small fierce 
slit-lke eyes set sloping inwards, and by a greater number of spots 
upon its body than any of the other species. It is not a common 
Seal, for only three or four specimens were secured by the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ Expedition. It is the largest and fiercest of all the Seals, not 
hesitating to attack a man on being molested. It is a most voracious 
animal, and feeds upon fish and Penguins. I have seen one near 
Possession Island give chase to a Penguin in the water; the latter 
appeared to have little chance against such a determined and rapidly- 
moving foe. In colour the back is of a dark hue, but the most 
characteristic point seems to be the presence of black as well as tawny 
spots on the grey of the upper part of the sides. The young of this 
Seal is born during the month of September.” 

These Seals are easily recognised by their activity and strength, 
and are the largest of all the species of the Antarctic regions. 
Sir James Ross gives 850 lbs. as the weight of one of these Seals, 
measuring 12 feet from nose to the tip of the tail, and 6 feet round 
the body. 

The largest skin of the Ogmorhinus brought home by the 
‘ Southern Cross’ measured nearly 11 feet from nose to tail. 

When lying on the ice, as is well seen in Mr. Bernacchi’s excellent 
photographs of this Seal, the sides bulge and the whole animal is 
flattened out, much as a Lizard spreads itself to catch the full rays of 
a hot sun. 

The “ True Sea-leopard,” as this species is sometimes called, is 


Notes on Antarctic Seals. ne 


distinguished from the “ False Sea-leopard” or Weddell’s Seal, mainly, 
so far as the skin is concerned, by the length of the fore limbs, and 
the presence of vivid black spots in addition to the tawny spots 
encroaching upon the dark grisly-grey of the back and sides. The 
line of division between this grey colour, which deepens to grisly- 
black on the mid-dorsal line, and the tawny orange of the belly and 
lower part of the sides, is very distinct, though broken by a number 
of irregular mottlings of black and dark grey. These dark irregular 
markings are most plentiful on the orange colour of the shoulders and 
flanks, where they are almost confluent; on the sides they are less 
frequent, and, though plentiful on the sides of the face and jaw and 
under the chin, there is a large space of almost unspotted orange skin 
under the throat and neck, and another immediately behind the 
spotted shoulder. The hind-flippers are richly marked with black 
and orange spots and splashes, very much more so than on the fore- 
flippers ; and whereas the ends of the digits of the hind limbs are 
black, those of the fore limbs are of a rich orange colour. Nails are 
discoverable on all the flippers, and the same may be said of the nails 
in every one of the four species of southern Seals. They are perhaps 
least conspicuous in Ommatophoca rossit. In the fore limbs of the 
Leopard-Seal they are very long and well formed. But in colouring, 
the most characteristic point seems to be the presence of black, as 
well as pale tawny, spots on the grey of the upper part of the sides. 
Mr. Borcherevink (p. 65) first mentions the species in the pack- 
ice early in January, when two young ones were obtained, and he 
also speaks of a “large sea-leopard” in whose stomach was found 
remains of an octopus. He also says that it bred in Robertson Bay 
(p. 237), and that young were frequently found on the sledge journeys. 
It is a pity that more specimens were not brought home. Mr. 
Borchgrevink also writes (p. 170) on Sept. 11th: “TI killed a female 
Seal near the edge of Dugdale glacier. It was a Leopard (Steno- 
rhynchus leptonyx). When I had skinned it, I cut it open, and, to 
my surprise, found a nearly full-grown male young one alive in her. 
As I had freed him, he seemed quite happy as he rolled about on 
the ice in his soft smooth coat. I put him on my sledge, and drove 
him to the stone hut, where we kept him alive on condensed milk, 
until we were later on able to send him by sledge to Camp Ridley, 
where Dr. Klovstad fed him from a bottle!” The arrival of this 
living Seal at the Camp is not mentioned in Mr. Hanson’s Diary. 


74 Southern Cross. 


LOBODON CARCINOPHAGUS. White Seal. 
(Puares IV.-V.) 


The White Seal, or Crab-eater, is the common Seal of the pack 
ice, at any rate during the months of Antarctic summer. It is, 
however, not confined to this belt of ice, but is also to be found 
sparingly as far south as the great Ice Barrier, in company with 
Weddell’s Seal, which is the most common Seal of Koss’s Sea and of 
South Victoria Land. Of the breeding habits of the Crab-eater 
practically nothing is known. 

Its food is said by Dr. Racovitza to consist of Huphausia, and 
in this connection may be quoted the interesting suggestions of 
Capt. Barrett-Hamilton, “that the teeth of Zobodon may possibly 
serve the animal as a sieve whereby to rid its mouth of the water 
taken in with the Huphausia, somewhat after the manner of baleen 
in the Lalenidw. For this purpose the teeth seem to be exactly 
suited. They do not fit closely, but alternate with those of the 
opposite jaw, so that the cusps form a perfect sieve.” The teeth 
show no evidence of mastication. 

It is worthy of notice that in the pack-ice the stomachs of all 
the White Seals were quite empty. This was in the summer months, 
when the moult was in progress, and probably points to the fact 
that, while the new hair is still thin, the Seals, like the Penguins, 
object strongly to entering the water, even for food. 

The moult starts in the first week of January, and is often far 
advanced by the 16th of that month. It always begins with a line 
down the middle of the back and on the flippers, both hind and fore, 
spreading from these points till only a few patches of old hair remain 
upon the sides. (Cf also Borchgrevink, ‘First on the Antarctic 
Continent,’ p. 382.) 

In life, the shape of the Crab-eater is less rounded than that 
of Weddell’s Seal, but when lying on the ice flattens out less than 
Ross’s Seal and the Leopard Seal. 

The colouring of this Seal shows great variation. It is known 
as the “ White” Seal from the creamy whiteness of its old winter coat. 
This is changed during the summer for a very beautiful silky 
ereyish-brown coat, with more or less richly-marked mottling on the 
shoulders, flanks, and sides of the head, and on the dark-brown 
flippers. I have given illustrations (Plate V.) of the old winter 
coat (Fig. 1), the coat in change (Fig. 2), and the new summer 


Notes on Antarctic Seats. 75 


coat (Fig. 3). So much does the coat of this Seal vary in colour 
and marking with age, sex, and season, that much confusion has 
arisen in the description of its skin. There is nuw in the Museum 
a fairly complete series of skins, preserved by Mr. Hanson, showing 
how this Seal changes from a creamy-white, faintly mottled with a 
pale rusty colour on the flanks, shoulders, and sides of the head, to 
the very beautiful and characteristically silky coat of warm 
brownish grey, darker mid-dorsally, silvery white ventrally, mottled 
as before, but now with a very rich warm brown, instead of the 
hardly perceptible rusty colour. 

That these are merely seasonal changes is evident from the 
fact that in the creamy-white skins can nearly always be found 
a mid-dorsal line of the new and darker hair appearing; whereas in 
the more handsomely mottled dark skins, a few belated patches 
of the old white fur can still be found attached to the sides of the 
animal. The largest, and presumably the oldest, of the Seals, 
probably males, still in their creamy white coat, show no trace of 
mottling anywhere; but on the flippers, both hind- and fore-, where 
the moult first takes effect, there appears, without exception, the 
rich and beautiful dark brown mottling of the new coat, with its 
characteristic silky gloss. The flippers share in the change. From 
being covered with a rusty or creamy-white hair to the end of each 
digit, they moult to a very rich brown colour, in some cases very 
dark, marbled with silky pale-grey spots. 

Mr. Bernacchi observes :—‘“ One of the first Seals to be met with 
on entering the pack-ice is the Crab-eating or White Seal (Zobodon 
carcinophagus), which is a Seal common during the summer months in 
the pack-ice, and even seen far south towards the Great Ice Barrier, 
but rarely met with near the shores of the Antarctic lands. In appear- 
ance this Seal varies somewhat; or, more correctly speaking, its colour 
varies according to the seasons of the year, and also according to the age 
and sex of the animal. The long old winter coat is creamy-white, 
hiding almost completely the mottlings on the shoulders and flanks 
and sides of the head. During the early part of January the Seal 
commences to moult, discards its old coat, and by the end of the 
month emerges with a beautiful silky-grey brown skin, with richly- 
marked mottlings. The body of this Seal is not rounded like the 
Weddell seal, but is rather slim and slightly flattened out when lying 
on the ice. It is somewhat solitary, pugnacious when disturbed, 
and feeds principally on Huphausia.” 

“The only young of this Seal procured by the ‘ Southern Cross’ 
Expedition was the specimen killed near its mother in Robertson 


76 Southern Cross. 


Bay on the 29th of November, 1899. It was the only one we saw 
during the fourteen months we spent within the Antarctic Circle. 
It was by no means so far developed as the young of Weddell’s Seal, 
which were quite common. The following are the dimensions of the 
calf of this White Seal :—- 


Length, 4 feet 11 inches ; 
Girth round flippers, 2 feet 5 inches ; 
Girth round hips, 1 foot 9 inches.” 


Mr. Borchgrevink, in his narrative of the ‘Southern Cross’ 
Expedition (p. 65), mentions the occurrence of the White Seal in 
the pack early in January, 1899. By the 5th of that month ten 
specimens had been preserved, and on that day Mr. Hanson’s diary 
records the capture of another kind of Seal, like the White Seals in 
appearance, but having a different cranium (vide, infra, p. 86). Mr. 
Borchgrevink also seems to have been aware of the circumstance 
(p. 65), but no further attempt at identification apparently took 
place. In the south-east part of Robertson Bay he also found two 
of this species (p. 234). On page 102 of Mr. Borchgrevink’s book, 
the skull of the Crab-eating Seal is figured, but under the name of 
‘ Weddellia, 

The mummies of most of the Seals found buried in the guano 
on Cape Adare were those of the White Seal. Mr. Borchgrevink 
(p. 237) suggests that they were all undoubtedly of this species, and 
adds that some of them were quite young. It will be seen (infra, 
p. 95), that Mr. Nicolai Hanson includes some Leptonychotes 
weddelli in his list, and does not mention any young ones, beyond 
the two embryos which he found inside the females. 

Mr. Bernacchi in his book (p. 37) gives an account of an 
encounter between one of these Seals and Mr. Hanson, showing that 
the animals can be very fierce on occasion. [See also Hanson’s 
account of the adventure (infra, p. 84).]| He also (p. 274) describes 
a meeting with a solitary White Seal, far to the south, on the Ice 
Barrier in company with a number of Weddell’s Seals. 


OMMATOPHOCA ROSSI. _ Ross’s Seal. 
(PrAcn, VI) 


Ross’s Seal is nowhere common. From Mr. Hanson’s private 
diary we learn, however, that no less than four specimens of this 
Seal were captured in the pack-ice: it was not seen elsewhere. 


Notes on Antarctic Seals. ag 


Of its breeding habits nothing is known. Three beautiful skins of 
this Seal now rest in the British Museum, and two skulls, one having 
no molar teeth whatever, the other having six molars on each side in 
the upper jaw, and five on each side in the lower. The latter skull 
was that of a female, belonging to one of the steel-grey skins, 
whereas the former was the skull of a male which belonged to the 
brownish-grey individual. 

The food of this species consists of Octopus and vegetable stuff or 
sea-weeds, as was proved in three cases by Mr. Hanson from an 
examination of the contents of the stomach (vide infra, pp. 89, 90, 92). 

The vocal powers of this Seal have been well described by 
Dr. Racovitza, and, apart from this remarkable characteristic, the 
thickness of its neck and the enormous protrusion. of the chin and 
throat are peculiarities of the species. 

The colour of this species is either of a pure steel- erey or of a 
ereyish-brown colour, deepening considerably in tone towards the 
middle line of the back, and becoming almost white on the under 
surface. Starting from the upper lip, which is nearly white, a broad 
band of pale grey extends backwards on the neck to be lost in the 
grey of the shoulder. Just below this, starting from the lower lip 
and the chin, which are nearly black, a broad dark grey band passes 
backwards and fades into the lighter colour on the chest and 
shoulders. These two bands are in perfect harmony both in colour, 
tone, and direction, with a somewhat limited number of indistinct 
pale and narrow markings which streak and line the sides of the 
animal from the shoulder almost to the tail. These parallel stripes, 
some inches in length in the region of the shoulder, are somewhat 
broken into splashes and spots towards the sides and flanks of the 
animal. Nails are present on both hind and fore-limbs, but are 
small on the latter and still smaller on the former. The dark colour 
of the back is continued on to the dorsal digit of the hind limb, the 
other digits and the ventral aspect of the limb being pale. 

Mr. Bernacchi gives the following note :—“The least known 
of all the Antarctic Seals is the Ross’s Seal (Ommatophoca rossi). 
Only a few specimens of it have ever been procured, four of 
them by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition. Of its breeding habits 
nothing is known. It, however, has a very wide distribution, 
having been found on the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of 
Victoria Land (‘Southern Cross’), Alexander Land (‘ Belgica’), and 
by Dr. Bruce near Joinville Island and Louis Philippe Land.* In 


1 As before mentioned, however, the Seals identified by Mr. Bruce as Omma- 
tophoca were probably White Seals in summer coat. 


78 Southern Cross. 


colour the back is greyish-brown, and under the belly silver-grey, 
with lighter spots in the division. A specimen I saw soon after it had 
been shot appeared to me to be distinctly slaty-colour ; this specimen 
measured nearly eleven feet in length. ‘The eyes were very large, 
and underneath the chin was a most extraordinary protuberance or 
sack, which is evidently inflated when the animal is angered. The 
greatest interest centres in the skull, which is quite different to that 
of any other known Seal. The dentition is exceedingly feeble; of 
two of the skulls procured by the ‘ Southern Cross, one had no molar 
teeth whatever, and the other six molars on each side in the upper 
jaw, and five on each side in the lower. 

“The food of this Seal is much the same as that of Weddell’s and 
the White Seals. The remains of Octopus were found in the stomach 
examined by Mr. Hanson.” 

An interesting account of the capture of the first Ross’s Seal will 
be found in Mr. Nicolai Hanson’s private diary (infra, p. 89). See 
also Mr. Borchgrevink’s book (p. 74). 


79 


III. 
EXTRACTS FROM THE PRIVATE DIARY 


OF THE LATE 


NICOLAI HANSON.’ 


[Published by permission of Mrs. Nicolai Hanson, and translated from the 
Norwegian by his father, Mr. Anton Hanson, of Christiansund.] 


September 15th, 1898.—In the forenoon I observed a shoal of fish, 
apparently Bonitoes, and a few Flying-fish. A number of Petrels 
(Puffinus) followed the fish, among them a Frigate-bird. In the afternoon 
some small whales, like Bottlenoses, approached the ship. I fired two 
shots with explosive shells at two of them, but killed none, though one 
was hit pretty hard. 

October 5th.—{ Nicolai had been dangerously ill from September 15th 
until to-day.—A. H.] Have seen my first Albatros. It is strange how 
very few birds there are here; for the last few days I have only seen 
some little Petrels. Yesterday I saw five birds, like Terns, which were 
fishing a short distance away from us. 


1 This excellent young naturalist and collector was appointed to the post of 
Zoologist on the ‘ Southern Cross,’ on the recommendation of Professor Robert 
Collett, of Christiania University. A better appointment could not have been made. 
As to the esteem in which Hanson was held, nothing need be added to the tribute 
paid to his memory by Mr. Bernacchi in his book ‘To the South Polar Regions’ 
(pp. 184-190), and this appreciation of the dead naturalist has been personally con- 
firmed to me by his colleagues of the scientific staff, Dr. Klovstad, Lieut. Colbeck, 
Mr. Hugh Evans, and Mr. Anton Fougner. 

His notebooks were handed to the Commander of the Expedition by the dying 
naturalist (Bernacchi, t.c. p. 185) on the 14th of October, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink 
has published some observations from one of these books in his ** Appendix ”’ 
(pp. 320-324), and he has handed to me one other book, which contains a mere list 
of the Procellariidae collected during the voyage out, and the details are also to be 
found on the labels attached to the specimens themselves. 

Knowing, however, from personal experience, and from the verbal testimony of 
his colleagues, that Mr. Hanson was in the habit of making careful notes on every 
natural history fact that came under his observation, I wrote to Mrs. Nicolai 
Hanson, to ask whether she had in her possession any private letters from her late 
husband, which contained natural history notes. In return she kindly placed her 
husband’s private diary at my disposal, and the notes which Nicolai Hanson wrote 
for his wife’s information are here reproduced, having been translated by his father, 
Mr. Anton Hanson, of Christiansund. I think that, in the absence of the official 
note-books, Zoologists throughout the world will rejoice that, by means of these 
private records, written without any idea of their subsequent publication, and 
merely for the amusement and instruction of his young wife, some details of the 
strenuous work done by Mr. Hanson during the expedition of the ‘ Southern Cross’ 
have been rescued from oblivion.—R. B. 8. 


80 


f 
s 


eee 


Southern Cross. 


CAPTIVE EMPEROR PENGUIN ON BOARD THE ‘ SOUTHERN CROSS.’ 


(By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) 


Fixtracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 81 


October 6th.—To-day we have had a visit from the first Cape Pigeon. 
It was a pretty little bird, with grey back, grey neck and white belly ; 
very tame, often coming close under our stern [see October 8]. 

October 7th. Have seen some Petrels and an Albatros to-day. 

October 8th.—More birds have been noticed than on any previous 
day. Two Albatroses and a great number of the Petrel I observed 
the day before yesterday, which I then took to be the Cape Pigeon, 
but I was wrong. To-day I have seen the first Cape Pigeons, very 
pretty birds, a little larger than a Tern, with black head, white belly, 
grey back and wings with white spots. They have more rounded wings 
than the other Petrels I have seen, but do not fly with less speed on 
that account. 

October 9th.Shot two Cape Pigeons to-day, but did not get them, 
though I tried to fire when they were over the ship. A large number of 
birds noticed, of five different kinds. 

October 10th.—Have seen the same kinds of birds to-day as yesterday, 
and probably also a kind of Albatros I have not observed before. — It 
was very dark on the back. 

October 12th.—There have been a great number of birds round the 
ship to-day. We have tried to snare some of them, but caught none. 
Borchgrevink went out in a boat to shoot, and killed three Albatroses of 
two different kinds (not of the large species) and also two Petrels of the 
size of a Pigeon. ‘The dogs would not eat the flesh of the Albatroses. 

October 13th. Lat. 33° 37' S., Long. 9° 54° W.—A number of birds 
round the ship to-day. I snared two Albatroses (Diomedea melanophrys). 
The doctor killed them with chloroform, which was quickly and neatly 
done. Saw a shoal of Dolphins and some Whales. [Cymodroma melano- 
gastra has put in an appearance. N. H. in Borchgr. App., p. 321.] 

October 14th.—Have prepared the skins of the two Albatroses killed 
yesterday. 

October 15th.—-Caught and prepared two Cape Pigeons to-day. 

October 16th. Lat. 38° 29' S., Long. 5° 51' W.—Rose early and began 
catching Cape Pigeons with a line and hook. Caught six during the day. 
Have seen two new species of birds to-day, one a white-headed Petrel, 
and a Lestris. 

October 17th.—Saw a new kind of Petrel to-day (Prion). 

October 18th. Lat. 40° 27' S., Long. 0° 21' H—A number of birds 
about the ship. I caught (with hook and line) one Mollymawk and 
seven Cape Pigeons.! 

October 19th. Lat. 39° 55' S., Long. 3°16’ HA number of birds about 
the ship. I have caught seven Cape Pigeons and two Puffinus (Kuhli ?).? 
This is ashy-grey on the back, but for the rest exactly like Puffinus major. 

October 20th. Lat. 40° 27' S., Long. 5° 22’ H—Caught a Puffinus. 
Have seen a large number of this species to-day. 

[October 21st. Lat. 41° 14’ G., Long. 8° 44' E..—Two Petrels, Prion 
desolatus and P. vittatus, have been seen for the first time to-day. N. H. 
in Berchgr. App., p. 322.] 

[October 22nd. Lat. 41° 20' S., Long. 13° 1' E—We saw some 


' “ Most of the birds caught up to date have recently started moulting.”—N. H. 
in Borchgrevink’s book, App. p. 321. 
* These proved to be Priofinus cinereus.—R. B.S. 
G 


82. Southern Cross. 


specimens of Diomedea fuliginosa, the first of this kind we have seen on 
the voyage, t. ¢., p. 323.] 

October 23rd. Lat. 42° 1' S., Long. 20° 32' E.—Caught a Cape Pigeon. 
[“ It had not started moulting.” N.H. App. to Borchgrevink, p. 32 22] 

October 24th. Lat. 42° 23! S., Long. 20° 32! E.—This morning, as 
soon as I came on deck, I caught a large Albatros and two other Diomedex 
with black-and-yellow bills.!. In the afternoon we shot some birds. The 
Englishmen shot from a boat sixteen birds. I shot sixteen birds from 
the ship and eleven from the boat. Saw two nearly white birds to-day 
about the size of a Kittiwake (Larus tridactylus). 

October 27th.—Have to-day prepared the last of the birds we killed on 
the 24th. I have now forty-one skins and eight skeletons.2 I hope we 
may soon get a calm again, so that I can get some more work. Numbers 
of birds follow the ship every day. 

October 29th. Lat. 44° 26' S., Long. 37° E.—This morning I caught a 
large Albatros. It is a little darker than the first, and perhaps a year 
younger. The number of Albatroses about the ship increases every day. 
Last night I observed at one time eight large ones. 

October 30th.—Saw a white bird as large as a Mollymawk. Short ; 
high bill ; a few dark spots under the belly and wings; wings narrow ; 
tail straight across, On the 24th I observed two similar birds, but 
smaller (of the size of a Puffinus). 

November 1st.—Passed the Crozet Islands, ten miles off, but out of 
sight. Saw some Penguins. 

November 2nd.—Caught this evening three Cape Pigeons, two Alba- 
troses with black-and-yellow bills, and one Sooty Albatros. Saw a 
Giant Petrel this afternoon (I am, however, not quite sure of it). This 
was the last time I observed Cape Pigeons in flocks before we came to 
Tasmania. Saw a small Whale while I was busy catching birds; it was 
like a “ Bottle-nose.” 

November 6th. Lat. 44° 20' S8., Uong. 68° 28' H—Numbers of birds 
about the ship. Have caught four black-billed? and two Yellow-billed 
Mollymawks.°® 

November 7th.—Caught six Mollymawks (two Yellow-billed) and four 
Cape-hens.* 

November 8th.—Caught a yellow- billed Mollymawk.® This afternoon 
Bernacchi, Evans and it went out in a boat shooting. Bernacchi shot 
two birds, I shot one Yellow-billed Mollymawk and four Cape-hens. 
Colbeck shot a Sooty Albatros from the ship. 

November 9th.— Caught two grey- -headed Mollymawks with entirely 
black bills, probably young birds.* 

November 10th.—This evening Colbeck caught two Sooty Albatroses 
and one black-billed Mollymawk.* I caught three of the latter species. 

November 13th to 18th.—During these days I have caught four Molly- 
mawks (three with black bills) and a Puffinus, but I have skinned none of 
them, as at present we have no more room for storing the skins. The 
Cape Pigeons have now left us entirely, and the birds which are usually 
seen about the ship are: The large Albatros, the Sooty Albatros, Molly- 

1 Thalassogeron culminatus. Vide infra, p. 82.—R. B.S. 
* No skeletons of birds were received by the British Museum.—R. B. 8S. 


3 Thalassogeron culminatus, juv.—R. B.S. * Majaqueus aequinoctialis.—R. B. 8. 
° Diomedea melanophrys.—R. B.S, 


Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 83 


mawks (with black and with yellow bills), also Cape-hens, Giant Petrels, 
Prion, Pujfinus, Whale-birds, and two small Storm Petrels. This evening 
(the 18th) I saw a flock of Mollymawks resting on the sea. 

November 25th.—More of the large Albatros are seen now. <A. white- 
headed Petrel has been tolerably numerous this week, also a black bird, 
whose flight is like that of the Swift, but more than double the size of 
this bird. Cape-hens, Cape Pigeons, and Shear-waters have now nearly all 
left us. Caught a large Albatros. 

November 26th.—I have forgotten to put down that on the 17th inst. I 
caught four Mollymawks (two with yellow ! and two with black bills?) and 
a Puffinus. Two of the Mollymawks were again set at liberty with a zinc 
label tied to their necks with the ship’s name and date inscribed thereon, 

Nevember 27th.—In sight of Tasmania. With the proximity of land 
came also some birds I have not seen before. The short-tailed Albatros, 
Mutton-birds, Gannets, Sula australis; also two Gulls, one like Larus 
marinus, and the other one very much like Larus tridactylus, but with red 
legs and bill. The next morning (at anchor in Adventure Bay) I observed 
a number of Cormorants and some Gulls. 

December 17th.—Lett Hobart at 2.30 p.m. Anchored in Adventure Bay. 

December 18th.—Have been on the shore to-day collecting on the 
beach and have made a good collection of Molluscs and Marine Plants. 
Shot also some birds. Visited Penguin Island and saw there a large 
number of Parrots. Saw a white-headed Sea-Eagle catch a big fish. 
Observed several black Oyster-Catchers. 

December 20th (At sea).—Have seen some Mutton-birds, Petrels and 
Albatroses to-day. 

December 21st.—Few birds seen, and only the same species as yesterday, 
also a yellow-billed Mollymawk. 

December 23rd.—Saw some Albatroses, Petrels and Prion ; no Mutton- 
birds. 

December 24th.—Same kind of birds to-day as yesterday ; also some 
white-headed Petrels, Sooty Albatroses and yellow-billed Mollymawks, which 
are quite common now. Caught two Sooty Albatroses and a Mollymawk, 
which were set at liberty again after we had attached tin labels to them. 

December 25th.—Same birds as before. No large Albatroses, but a 
Lestris was seen to-day.* 

December 26th.—No black Petrels seen. Same kind of birds as yester- 
day, and a couple of Mollymawks with black bills,? and some Penguins. 

December 27th—A number of Penguins were seen this forenoon. 
They played like porpoises before the bows of the ship. 

December 28th.—Besides the usual species of birds we have seen lately, 
I observed a large Albatros and a Giant Petrel, which have followed us 
to-day. A small Storm Petrel with white belly, some Mutton-birds, and 
a couple of Sooty Albatroses have also been about the ship. 

December 29th.—Saw some Mutton-birds this morning. This afternoon 
we are followed only by the Yellow-billed Mollymawk! and Prion vittatus 
We are now past the 60th degree of S. Latitude. 

December 30th (In the ice).—With the ice have also come three new 
species of birds, two light and one dark coloured, of the size of Daption 


' Diomedea melanophrys.—R. B. 8. 2 Thalassogeron culminatus, juv.—R. B.S. 
3 Doubtless Megalestris antarcticus.—R. B. 8. 


(Ey 


84 Southern Cross. 


capensis. Our old acquaintance, the Daption, has also appeared again. 
Besides these four kinds of birds, I have also to-day observed six different 
species : Diomedea fuliginosa, D. melanophrys, Cymodroma grallaria, Fregetta 
melanogaster, Oceanites oceanicus, Histrelata lessoni and Prion vittatus.' The 
last-named species is the only one which has followed us in among the ice ; 
the others left us before we sighted it. Have seen some Whales to-day. 
One immense fellow we saw after we got in among the ice. Some ice- 
floes were of a yellow colour, which I at first thought to be caused by 
mineral dust, but afterwards I found it to be Alge. 

December 31st.—I was called at 3 a.m. by Borchgrevink, who came 
down to fetch a gun and cartridges, as a White Seal was lying on an ice- 
floe close to the ship. I hurried up on deck, but he had disappeared before 
I came up. We saw, however, a Brown Seal in the water, but the gun 
missed fire, and at the same moment he dived, and we saw him no more. 
Borchgrevink, who had been on deck all night, went below, but requested 
me to look out for Seals so that we could get some food for the dogs. I 
stayed, therefore, on the bridge till 5 a.m. without seeing any Seal, when I 
went below, after having ordered the second mate to call me in case he saw 
any animals, I had barely covered myself up in my bunk, when one of 
the Finns came down calling out, ‘‘ Hanson, there is a Seal onthe ice!” I 
jumped out of my bed and got my trousers and slippers on, and ran on 
deck. In my hurry I took only an old needle-rifle with copper cartridges 
and a seal-pick with me. With two men in the boat I set off from the 
ship and pulled towards the Seal under cover of a hummock on the 
ice-floe on which it was lying. I came close up to it, and saw that 
it was a large male of the White Seal. He was lying on a tolerably large 
floe, and when I landed on this, I could approach him under shelter of a 
piece of ice. My rifle came quickly to my shoulder, but it missed fire 
with the five cartridges I had brought with me, and as the Seal now 
began to move, I threw away the rifle and rushed on him with my seal- 
pick. The Seal tried to escape, but I gave him a blow with the pick. 
It glanced off his skull, and he immediately turned on me and rose 
up from the ice as if to get on the top of me; and as I had sunk in the 
snow above my knees, I could not get away from him. I therefore again 
dealt him a blow with the pick. This blow fell on his neck, but did not 
manage to stun him. I had now, however, so strong a hold on him that 
I could keep him away from me, and as I soon extricated myself from the 
snow, I jumped on to his back; and now began a fight worse than the 
first, for he turned himself round and rolled over me, but luckily without 
getting hold of me with his teeth, for I had still’ the pick firmly fixed in 
his neck. We rolled over again, and at last I staggered to my feet and 
gave him another blow on the skull, and as one of the sailors in the boat 
now came to my assistance and dealt him some blows on the nose with 
a boat-hook, he was soon killed. I have not felt well all day after 
this fight, for it is not the most healthy occupation to have a big Seal 
dancing about on one’s chest. After I had again been in my bunk for 
half an hour, I was called up by the cry, “Seal on a floe!” This time I 
took my shot-gun and cartridges with explosive bullets. This new Seal 
was even bigger than the first, and measured 10 feet 7 inches in length. 
Tt was a female Leopard-Seal. By the way she behaved, it was evident 


' This list appears in Mr. Borchgreyink’s book (p. 54). 


Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 85 


she had never before met her master, for when I landed on the floe, she 
merely lifted her head and stared at me. Evidently she took me for a 
Penguin or some other inferior being, for she soon settled down to rest 
again. A ball from my gun finished her. We pulled the whole carcase 
into the boat, which was quite loaded up with such a big Seal. Later 
in the day Borchgrevink shot from the ship a White Seal which was lying 
on a floe we passed. This last one was much smaller than the two I had 
killed. In the evening the ship was stopped by the closure of the ice. I 
therefore took one of the small canvas boats and pulled about in the lanes 
to shoot birds. I bagged twenty-eight birds in thirty-three shots. They 
were mostly Cape Pigeons and Ice Petrels, and two species I have not 
seen before, one like the Fulmar (Fulmarus glacialis) we have at home,' 
and a new one, with brown back and head and a brown band over the 
neck, and a white band length-ways over the wings, as well as a white 
belly.2. Besides these birds I also saw to-day Oceanites oceanicus. 

New Year's Day, 1899.—This afternoon I was out on the ice and shot 
seventeen birds: fifteen Ice Petrels, one Cape Pigeon and one O. oceanicus. 
IT saw two Whales. One of the firemen who was with me found a small 
herring-like fish on an ice-floe. Some of the crew took along trip on ‘“ Shi” 
over the ice, and brought back to me a number of shrimps, one inch and 
a half long, which they had found on the ice. I noticed some Meduse ; 
some were oblong, but one was round, of a blue colour, with four round 
brown eyes, like the stinging Medusa, and with long brown tendrils. 

January 2nd.—At 5 a.m. to-day I was called by the second mate to 
come and shoot a Penguin. When I came on deck the bird stood on a 
floe about 100 yards from the ship, but when I stepped down on the ice 
he jumped into the water and dived. I thought that he was frightened, 
and [ should see him no more, but a few moments after he came up on a 
floe about 100 feet away from the ship. It was a funny sight to see him 
sitting there fanning himself with his flippers while he regarded the ship 
and its inhabitants. The noise made by the dogs appeared to interest 
him most, for now and again he uttered a grunting sound, as if in response 
to their barking. His confidence cost him his life, for I killed him with 
a shot from the ship. Later in the day I went up on the bridge to look 
for Seal on the ice, as we now were lying fast in the pack. I soon espied 
a large White Seal lying asleep on a floe about 500 yards distant. With 
my double-barrelled gun, and two men to assist me, I set out for this 
Seal. When I came within easy range I shouted out to him to “ wake up,” 
as I did not like to kill him asleep. An hour later Borchgrevink shot a 
young Leopard-Seal on a floe upon which it had crawled to look at the 
dogs. Of birds I shot only an Ice Petrel and an O. oceanicus. 

January 3rd.—My bag to-day was one White Seal, two Cape Pigeons 
and five Ice Petrels. 

January 4th—I was called up before breakfast, as the Captain 
reported, from the mast-head, a Seal on a floe ahead of the ship. I took 
one of the old needle-rifles and stood waiting on the forecastle-head till 
the ship had come within range. When we were still about 200 yards 
distant from him, he began to show signs of uneasiness and wanted to get 
to the water. I therefore dared not wait any longer, but sent a ball 


1 Priocella glacialoides.—R. B.S. 
2 Thalasseca antarctica.—R. B.S. 


86 Southern Cross. 


through his ribs. This stopped him, and to make quite sure of him I sent 
two bullets through his head. The ship was steered towards him, and we 
got him on board. It was a fine young Leopard-Seal. Like the one 
Borchgrevink killed, his stomach was full of small shrimps. When the 
Captain came down from the mast-head, he told me that he had seen a Seal 
at some distance from the ship. As the vessel was now lying fast in the ice 
again, the Captain, Fougner and I set out on “Shi” for that Seal. Fougner 
was armed with a seal-pick, and I with an old needle-gun. After looking 
about for some time, we found the Seal near a large hummock, where I 
killed him with two bullets. It was a large male of the White Seal. His 
stomach was quite empty. I have also to-day shot four Cape Pigeons and 
sixteen Ice Petrels. 

January 5th.—I was called at 7.30 a.m. to kill a Seal. It was a large 
specimen of the common White Seal. While I was on the ice later in the 
day, I saw a large white bird with a few black spots flying out of range. 
It was presumably one of the same kind that I saw at sea on the 30th of 
October last year. Borchgrevink called it Procellaria gigantea. ‘To-day, 
I bagged eight Ice-Petrels. 

January 6th.—When we stopped to-day, four Seals were seen on the 
ice. Borchgrevink, Colbeck, Bernacchi and I went in one of the small 
canvas boats to shoot two which were lying some distance off on the star- 
board side among some small hummocks. In order not to spoil the 
cranium, which I wanted for the collection, I fired a shot into the ribs of 
one of the Seals, but he appeared to be as lively as ever, so I had to give 
him a ball in the neck, which settled him. The skin of this Seal was like 
that of all the others I had shot as regards colour ; but when I skeleton- 
ised the cranium, I found that the latter was quite different from those 
we had caught before, and it may be that I have obtained a very rare 
species. I cannot find a name for it in any of my books. Later in the 
day I shot a Giant Petrel. 

January 8th.—Fougner and I went out on “Shi” to shoot an Emperor 
Penguin, but he went into the water before 1 came within range. Saw 
some Mutton-birds while I was away. At 3 p.m. the Captain came down 
from the mast-head and told me that he had seen two Seals on the ice 
about a couple of English miles astern of the ship. I went with him up 
to the maintop to get the bearings of the place where the Seals lay. The 
second mate had also seen them from the mast-head, and he wanted to go 
with me. We were in all seven men, who set out armed with seal-picks. 
I was the only one who carried a gun. The ice was very bad, and we had 
not gone far before the second mate fell through a hole and got soaked, 
for he had no “Shi.” We, who had “Shi,” fared better, although in some 
places we slid along only on a thick layer of snow-slush, so we had to move 
quickly in order not to sink through. We had not gone far before I 
thought that we were going in a wrong direction according to my bearings, 
but thinking that the second mate had a better idea of the locality than 
myself, I said nothing. When, however, we were stopped by an open lane 
of water, and as my three English companions were now fagged out and 
wanted to return to the ship, I set out on my own account to find the 
Seals. I had not gone far before I saw them lying by a large hummock. 
When I came within range I found that there were three large White 
Seals, instead of two. Three shots fired in as many seconds laid them low. 


Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 87 


Three of the men who had accompanied me came and assisted me to skin 
them and drag the skins on board. We had a tough job to get the 
heavy skins on the ship, as the ice was full of water-lanes and hummocks, 
so that we had more than double the distance to traverse before we 
reached the ship. On the way back to the vessel I shot three small 
Petrels and an Ice Petrel. The Seals were of the common white species, 
and their stomachs were quite empty. They were a male and two female 
Seals, large, full-grown animals. 

January 10th.—Killed two young female Seals to-day. Stomachs 
quite empty. One was of a new species, which I have not seen before. 
Saw a Mutton-bird. The Brown-backed Petrel, which was so common in 
the outer edge of the ice, I have not seen since the 6th of this month. 

January 11th.—To-day I shot two Silver Petrels, one Cape Pigeon, 
one Ice Petrel, and one O. oceanicus. 

January 12th.—While we were lying fast to-day in the ice, I went out 
shooting and bagged one Emperor Penguin, eleven Silver Petrels, six 
Ice Petrels, four Cape Pigeons, and three O. oceanicus. 

Jaunary 13th.—One of the crew shot two Penguins on a floe : other- 
wise only the usual birds were seen. No Seals about. Took two good 
casts with the large Plankton-net this evening. Saw a fish about six 
inches long. 

January 14th.—I had just turned into my bunk this morning when 
Borchgrevink came to fetch a rifle and cartridges to shoot a Seal. I went 
on deck with him, as I wanted the skin for the collection. When the ship 
had approached the Seal to within fifty yards, Borchgrevink fired five 
shots at him, but only two hit him, one in the hind-quarters, the other in 
the neck. Two of the crew went away to bring him on board, but, as he 
still moved, they dared not lay hold of him, so I went to their assistance 
and killed him. While we skinned the Seal on the floe, the ice slackened, 
and we had to be fetched back by a boat. I went to bed again and slept 
till noon, when Lieut. Colbeck came and called me, and told me that he 
had killed a Seal of the same kind as the one I got on the 10th inst. It 
was a fine specimen, and I preserved the skin and the cranium for the 
collection. 

January 16th.—To-day at noon I killed a Seal of the same kind as the 
one Colbeck killed two days ago. The whole pack of dogs were with me 
and they ate the flesh of the Seal as fast as I skinned the animal. It 
was like working in the midst of a pack of wolves. The skin and 
cranium went into the collection. It was a fine specimen of a female 
Seal. 

January 18th.—As to-day we moved into tolerably clear water I saw 
some birds, more in fact than I have seen for many days past, and among 
them was one of the Brown-backed Petrel, which was so common on the 
outer edge of the pack. Just as we were sitting down to supper, it was 
reported: “A large Penguin on the starboard bow!” I ran up, armed 
with a gun and a seal-pick; but we were still some distance from the 
bird, which could be seen on a large ice-floe on which there was a 
hummock. Under the lee of this hummock, sheltered from the wind, the 
big bird sat crouching. As we approached it, the colour of its plumage 
became more and more strange in appearance, and I even thought that 
we had met with a bird of an unknown species. Suddenly we discovered 


88 Southern Cross. 


another bird of the same kind, but of a darker colour, in our wake ; but 
this bird disappeared suddenly, and all our attention was turned to the 
one on the floe. This sat quite still, undisturbed by the noise made by 
the ship as it worked its way through the ice nearer to it. All at once 
the Penguin, which we had seen in our wake, shot up out of the water and 
on to the floe on which the first Penguin was sitting. When the two 
birds met, they greeted each other and opened a conversation, gesticu- 
lating in a most funny manner. It was curious to observe the power of 
location these birds possessed even under water, as shown by the fact 
that this last comer could at once find the floe where its mate was sitting. 
The distance it had to swim under water was about 200 yards, and, as 
far as we saw, it was not above water once during its journey. When 
we were about 200 yards distant the birds showed signs of fear, and I 
fired two shots at each of them from the forecastle-head ; but both set 
off as if nothing was the matter with them. One of them—the one 
first seen—broke down, however, before it reached the water and fell 
dead on the ice. Then, with a couple of men, I jumped on to the ice 
to reclaim the dead bird, while the other bird dived and disappeared 
among the pieces of ice. While the men brought the bird on board, I 
inspected the place where it had been sitting. All over the floe, feathers 
were thickly scattered, and round the ice-hummock, behind which the bird 
had been sitting, a path had been trodden, as the bird had apparently 
shifted its position in order to be sheltered from the wind, for, as I found 
afterwards, it was moulting, and for that reason was probably very 
sensitive to cold. These birds do not change their plumage like other 
species, but more in the way in which snakes cast their skins, the new 
skin being ready before the old one is cast off. In the same way with 
these birds. The quill of the old feather is connected with the top of 
the new feather by a skin capsule ; the new feather begins to grow under 
the quill of the old feather and pushes it before it until the new feather 
is fully developed, when the old one loosens and drops off, together with 
the capsule which connected the two feathers. The old feather is so 
loose that it drops off when stroked by the hand. During the moulting 
the Penguins apparently do not like to go into the water. How long this 
bird had stayed on the floe I could not judge, owing to the short time 
which I had to make my observations. 

As soon as this specimen was brought on board, I observed the other 
bird sitting crouching with its head down between the shoulders, on a 
piece of ice further ahead of us. The ship was steered in its direction, 
and, as we approached it, I could see the blood trickling down from a 
wound in-its side. J again gave it two shots, and so added another 
Emperor Penguin to my collection. This bird had finished its moulting, 
and was very pretty in its new plumage. The first bird was a female, 
the second a male. 

January 19th.—The animal life has been proportionally plentiful 
around us to-day, as we have killed seven White Seals (of these five fell 
to my rifle and two to Borchgrevink’s). We have also seen a couple of 
Whales and some Penguins, and more of the birds we are accustomed to 
see every day. The Seals were all moulting and their stomachs were 
quite empty. Twice we found three together. The seventh jumped up 
on the ice as the ship was passing through a long lane. To judge from 


Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 89 


the teeth, the six Seals first killed were very old, as the teeth were very 
dark and worn. Have preserved the two Emperor Penguins I shot 
yesterday, and, on opening their stomachs, my conjecture as to the 
moulting bird not having been in the water for some time was proved to 
be true ; for in it were found only some beaks of Octopus, stones, and a 
green substance, which in appearance was most like the brown vegetable 
substance found underneath the ice-floes. The stomach of the other bird 
was, on the contrary, quite full of different fishes, fragments of shrimps, 
and small stones. These last, I suppose, are meant to assist digestion, 
although the stomach does not appear constructed for this kind of 
assistance. 

January 20th.—Another fact which goes to prove that we are far from 
open water is, that the number of birds decreases from day today. To- 
day the bird-life about us has been very poor. I have, however, obtained 
a new bird, a Skua-Gull. The body is somewhat bigger than that of our 
Skua (Lestris parasiticus) at home, but the tail is shorter, and the wings are 
not so pointed. It has no claw on the hind toe; on the wings there is a 
white spot at the base of the spurious wing-feathers; the two middle 
tail-feathers are about ? inch longer than the others. Besides this I shot 
an O. oceanicus. 

I also killed three Seals to-day—the prettiest I have seen yet. One 
was a female of the common White Seal, but the other two were of a 
dark grey colour, with lighter spots and black flippers. These two were 
male and female. Both the females had tumours in their inner sexual 
organs, which in the doctor’s opinion had made them sterile. The milt 
of the male was also diseased (tubercles ?). This, with the ovaries of the 
females, I preserved in spirits. 

January 21st.—While the ship was going through the ice to-day I saw 
numbers of Penguins of the small species (Pygoscelis adelix). In the 
largest flock I counted nine on one floe, but ordinarily they sat two and 
two together. Saw one white-throated and one black-throated Penguin 
sitting together. This is the first perfectly white-throated Penguin I 
have seen as yet. The first I shot was nearly pure white under the 
throat. About 1 p.m., I observed a large Penguin far away on a 
large floe, and the ship was at once turned towards it and stopped. As 
we were slowly passing along the edge of the floe, we saw a Seal scamper 
away and hide between some large hummocks; but I wanted to secure 
the Penguin, which I considered of more value to me than the Seal. 
After some racing, I added my third Emperor Penguin for the collection. 
One of my companions brought the bird on board, while I went after the 
Seal. I soon reached him behind the hummocks and came within range 
of him ; but, just as I peeped out, he caught sight of me and made off again 
at a great speed, which is faster than a man can run, when there is a 
little snow on the ice. But his speed availed him little, for a ball through 
the neck settled him at once. If the Seal had been surprised on seeing 
me, I was no less surprised when I came near to him, for a stranger animal 
I had never'seen. The head was short and thick, with large eyes and a 
terribly big lower jaw ; no molar teeth, and only two front teeth in the 
lower jaw and six in the upper jaw. These teeth were sharp as awls, and 
shaped like ordinary carnivorous cutting teeth. The tail was short and 
narrow ; he had nails on all toes, before and behind, and his hind-flippers 


eye) Southern Cross. 


were very large, in proportion to his fore-tlippers. The colour was greyish- 
brown on the back, under the belly silver-grey, with lighter spots on the 
division. The fur was much softer than the common Seal-fur, more like 
Otter-skin. The dimensions were: Total length, 6 feet 10} inches. Girth 
behind the ears, 2’ 10"; behind the fore-flippers, 4’ 11"; over the hips, 2’ 94”. 
Distance from the foremost corner of the eye to the point of the nose, 
0' 4"; from the hinder corner of the eye to the point of the nose, 53"; 
between the eyes: forward, 63"; behind, 103". The Seal was photo- 
graphed by Mr. Bernacchi, and Mr. Borchgrevink took a sketch of it. 
The contents of the stomach consisted of sea-weed. In the intestines he 
had an immense number of worms. 

January 22nd.—In spite of the severe weather to-day, two of the crew 
killed a White Seal close to the ship. Afterwards we killed four small 
Penguins. The collection increases day by day, and will soon be too 
large for the space we can at present spare for it. 

January 23rd.—To-day I have obtained one Seal, one Emperor 
Penguin, three small Penguins, and one Prion vittatus, the first I have 
seen this year. 

January 24th—When we came out into a water-lane to-day we 
observed an Emperor Penguin and two Seals on a floe, and these we at 
once decided on capturing. As we steered for the Seals, two Whales came 
before our bows, and as I was on the forecastle head, I quickly got the 
harpoons into both guns, but the Whales became frightened by the ship 
and disappeared under the ice. The Seals, one white and one grey, I 
managed to secure. Fougner and Borchgrevink caught the Penguin. As 
we went through the ice we observed several Seals, one of the same kind 
as the one I shot on the 21st, but he was lying too far out on the ice for 
us to stop the ship. Several White Seals were seen on the ice, and in the 
water, but we could not stop for them. Soon after supper it was 
reported from the mast-head that a Seal was on the ice, and as we came 
nearer I saw that it was one of the rare kind, and this became No. 2 of 
this species in my collection. It was a female. Colour: steel grey on 
the back, lighter underneath, with light irregular stripes along the sides. 
This one has more teeth than the first, as it has six molars on each side 
in the upper jaw, and five in the lower jaw, and six front teeth in each 
jaw. The four middle teeth in the lower jaw were only slightly developed. 
The most strange peculiarity connected with these teeth was that they 
were all loose, so they could be moved with a finger. The contents of 
the stomach consisted of remains of Octopus and vegetable stuff. Have 
seen more Whales and Seals to-day than at any other time since we 
entered the ice. The birds have also been very numerous, but were only 
of the ordinary species. 

January 25th.—Still fast in the ice. Numerous Whales, Seals and 
birds have been round us to-day, but we have not got many of them, for 
the ice is so full of holes underneath the snow that it is nearly impossible 
to travel about on it. I managed, however, to get away twice after 
Seals. The first time I went after three, which were lying about two or 
three miles away from us. Fougner and Colbeck went with me, and we 
brought with us one of the small canvas-boats to assist us over the water- 
lanes, but when we came to the place where we had seen the Seals, they 
were gone into the water, so we had all our trouble for nothing. I had 


Extracts from Diary of Nicolat Hanson. 91 


barely returned on board when I again saw a Seal some distance astern of 
us. I took one of the Finns with me, and in a quarter of an hour we had 
it in the boat ; it was one of the common white ones. This forenoon we 
caught three large Penguins on the floe near which we were lying. They 
swam round the ship and we had a good opportunity to study their way 
of moving in the water. 

January 26th.—Killed three of the common Seals, and also two 
Megalestris. Saw some Giant Petrels. These birds must have a very 
keen sense of sight or smell, for no sooner is a Seal skinned on the ice 
than they put in an appearance. 

January 27th.—Last night, soon after I had turned in, I was called up 
by the cry: ‘Seal on the ice!” and I scrambled up on deck as fast as I 
could. There were two Seals lying not very far off. Some of the crew 
were already on the ice, but when I made a jump on to it, I missed my 
footing and fell into the sea. I soon hauled myself up, however, on the 
edge of the ice and ran off after the others, who were now some distance 
off. As soon as I had shot the two Seals, a third crawled up on the ice, 
and I immediately killed this one also. It was rather a chilly pastime to 
travel about on the ice wet through, clad only in shirt and trousers and 
sea-boots, and without either a cap or stockings. We have seen no 
Whales to-day, and birds have been very scarce. 

January 28th.—About 4 p.m. a Seal was seen lying far in on an 
immense floe, about two miles away from the ship. Some of the crew went 
with me to fetch it, and we had a splendid run on “ Shi” over ice which 
probably was several years old, as it was covered with iarge hummocks. The 
Seal was a male of the rare, thick-necked species. He was shedding his 
hair, and, to all appearance, he had been lying several days in the same 
place where we found him, as there was a lot of hair and excrement 
scattered round about on the ice, and, on opening the stomach, it was 
found to be quite empty. Like the first I killed, the stomach and part of 
the intestines was crowded with an immense number of worms. There 
was hardly an inch thick of blubber on the skin. While three men 
hauled the skin on board I took two men with me up to some adjacent 
open water. The distance the Seal lay from the nearest open water was 
not less than 1500 yards, and we walked along the lane towards the ship 
to look for more Seals, but found none. Some Whales and White Seals 
have been seen in the open lane. Few birds. Took the temperature of 
the sea and found it to be + 4° Celsius at a depth of 1000 yards. 

January 29th—Some Whales and Seals about to-day. I saw twenty 
or thirty small Penguins. The Black Petrels and Cape Pigeons have 
disappeared. 

January 30th.—This evening I shot four Silver Petrels and two Ice 
Petrels. Some Whales and Seals have been seen, but none killed.  S21, 159°°29" EL., Dee: 3st, 
1898. 

Iris dark brown ; bill brown; feet and webs light grey. 

501. 6 ad. Ditto ditto. (H. B. Evans.) 

ole) 6. ad: Ditto ditto. (NV. Hanson.) 

a. 6 ad. Cape Adare. April 27th, 1899. 


The last specimen is much darker than the other three, especially 
on the throat, where the colour is dark brown, even on to the sides of 
the fore-neck. | 

Of the range of the Antarctic Petrel, Mr. Howard Saunders gives 
the following account :—“ It was found by the ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror’ 
Expedition as far as Lat. 77° 49’ S. in Long. 181° 10’ E. It seems to 
occur along the ice-border, but I cannot find any definite account of 


144 Southern Cross. 


its breeding-places. This species, which seems to be the “ Aglet ” or 
“ Kaglet ” of Weddell and early explorers, has the upper surface brown, 
and has twelve tail-feathers.” 

The first specimens met with by the ‘ Southern Cross’ were 
observed by Mr. Hanson on the 30th of December, 1898, when the 
ship entered the ice-pack; it is the “dark-coloured” bird mentioned 
by him (supra, p. 83). On Jan. 10th (supra, p. 86), he records 
that the “ brown-backed bird,” which was so common on the outer 
edge of the ice, had not been seen since the 6th of this month. The 
‘Southern Cross’ was then fast in the ice-pack; but on the 18th of 
January, when the ship “moved into tolerably clear water,” he saw 
some birds, more, in fact, than he had seen for many days past, and 
among them was one of the Brown-backed Petrels. On Feb. 10 he 
writes: “None of the ordinary kinds of birds have been very 
numerous; only once in a while a single individual of the Brown- 
backed Petrel has been about. No Penguins” (p. 93). At this date 
the ‘ Southern Cross,’ after having been forty days in the pack (see 
Bernacchi, p. 61), was heading northward for the open sea again, in 
order to enter the pack further to the eastward. On the 12th and 
13th of February, when the ship had regained the open sea, the 
Brown-backed Petrel was again observed in Lat. 65° 33'8., Long. 
165° 48’ E. Hanson says that a number of them were seen on an 
iceberg, which had lately capsized. On the 14th the ship re-entered 
the pack, which was then traversed in six hours (¢f. Bernacchi, p. 61), 
and on the 15th, when there was a hurricane, and the ship was hove to 
off Victoria Land, Hanson records having seen “large numbers of the 
Brown-backed Petrel, as many as a hundred birds in a flock” (supra, 
p. 93). The species was again noticed on the 24th of April, off Cape 
Adare, when numbers were seen fishing in the mashed-up ice (supra, 
p- 98); one was shot on the 27th. The bird was once more seen on 
the 3rd of September, outside the house at Cape Adare (swpra, p. 104). 
Mr. Bernacchi (p. 315) says that 7. antarctica was found as far south 
as Lat. 78° S. At Cape Adare they were seen early in November, 
flying in large flocks towards the south. Mr. Borchgrevink also 
states that he saw one of these birds on the 5th of May (p. 120). His 
notes on the species are as follows:—“ The Brown-backed Petrel, 
with white borders on the wings, was also evidently nesting on 
Victoria Land, but we never found it on its nest. When we first 
approached Cape Adare, dense flocks of them sailed about in the gales. 
During the summer we saw few of them, but in the autumn they 
again sailed about in the air, at great heights, while during the gales 


Aves. 145 


they swept low over the peninsula like a cloud. Although I never 
found them on Geikie Land, I believe that they have their nests in 
that vicinity.” On the 25th November, 1899, he says that a heavy 
gale started from the S.E. . . . and that large flocks of Brown-backed 
Petrels pierced the air (p. 226). 

Dr. Racovitza (p. 18) says that this species was a rare visitor to 
the ‘Belgica.’ 


PRIOCELLA, Hombr. and Jacq. 
PRIOCELLA GLACIALOIDES. 


Procellaria glacialoides, Smith, Il. Zool. S. Afr. Aves., pl. 51 (1840); Gould, 
B, Austr., VII, pl. 48 (1848); Buller, B. N. Zeal., p. 801 (1873); Moseley, 
Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha), 


Thalassceca glacialoides, Coues, Proc. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1866, p. 393; Gigl., 
Faun. Vert. Oceano, p, 47 (1870); Salvin, P. Z. S., 1878 (ice-barrier, Feb.) ; 
Moseley, Notes Nat. Chall., p. 253 (1879, edge of pack ice); Buller, B. N. 
Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 228 (1888); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, p. 315 (1901) ; 
Saunders, Antarctic Manual, pp. 280, 236 (1901). 


Thalassceca tenuinostris, Sharpe, Phil. Trans. CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 123 
(1879, Kerguelen Isl.), 


Priocella glacialoides, Baird, Brewer, and Ridgw., Water Birds, N. Amer., II., 
p. 373 (1884); Salvin, Cat, B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 393 (1896); Sharpe, 
Hand-list B., 1., p. 125 (1899). 


Tagalassoica glacialoides, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 65, 66 
(1901). 


Silver Petrel, Hanson, /. s. ¢., pp. 86, 87, 90, 92, 93. 


Nos. 52, 54 K. 9 ad. Shot om the pack-ice, 62° 52’ SL, 
[oooh ie eos ho dg ad. Dec. sist, 1898: 

Iris brown; bill flesh-colour, tip and nostrils grey ; feet pale 
grey, webs flesh-colour. 

No. 62 K. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice, 63° 40’ S.L., 160° 36’ 
E.L., Jan. 4th, 1899. 

Nos. '73,74,75 K. ¢@. ‘72,76,77 K. @ ad. Shot.on the pack- 
ice, 65° 3’ S8.L., 161° 42! E.L., Jan. 12th, 1899. 

a. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice, Feb. 6th, 1899. 


Of this Silver-grey Petrel, Mr. Howard Saunders writes as follows 

(‘ Antarctic Manual,’ p. 230):—“The range of this species extends 

along the Pacific coast of America, occasionally as far north as 

Washington Territory, and also to the Cape Seas; while Kerguelen 

Island seems to be a breeding-place, although I am not aware of any 

authenticated eges. It reaches the ice-barrier, and a specimen was 
L 


146 Southern Cross. 


obtained by the ‘ Belgica’ just before her escape from the pack-ice, on 
March 14th, 1899, in Lat. 70° 40’ S., and Long. 102° W.; while the 
‘Challenger’ brought back one example, taken on the edge of the 
pack, in about 66° S. Lat., on the 14th of February, 1874.” 

This species is doubtless one of the “ three new species of birds ” 
which met the ‘ Southern Cross,’ when the ship entered the pack-ice 
on the 30th of December (supra, p. 83). On the 31st (supra, p. 84) 
Mr. Hanson shot several specimens of the Silver Petrel, which, as 
he truly observes, is very like the Fulmar (Fulmarus glacialis) of the 
northern seas. While laying fast in the ice, he shot a number of 
specimens on the 11th and 12th of January (supra, pp. 86, 87), and 
again on the 30th (p. 91). Two were shot by him on the 6th of 
February (p. 92); and he saw the species again on the 12th of that 
month, when the ‘ Southern Cross’ returned to the open sea, before 
making a second endeavour to get through the pack-ice. 

Mr. Borchgrevink (p. 65) speaks of this species as being, next to 
Pagodroma, the best represented in the pack-ice. “ They were always 
seen swimming about in the open spaces in the ice, seeking food, 
which mainly consisted of crustacea. Only in a few instances a very 
small fish, like a Herring in shape, has been found in them.” 


MAJAQUEUS, Reichenb. 
MAJAQUEUS AQUINOCTIALIS. 


Procellaria sequinoctialis, Linn., Syst. Nat., I., p. 213 (1766); Moseley, Notes 
Nat. Chall., p. 187 (1879, Tristan da Cunha); Milne-Edwards and Grand., 
Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 671 (1885). 

Procellaria conspicillata, Gould, B. Austr., VIL, pl. 46 (1848). 


Majaqueus zquinoctialis, Coues, Proc. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1864, pp. 118, 142; 
Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 35 (1870); Salvin, in Rowley’s Orn. Misc., L., 
p. 282 (1876); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 119 (1879, 
Royal Sound, Kerguelen); Moseley, Notes Nat. Chall. p. 208 (1879, 
Kerguelen), p. 254 (edge of pack ice); Saunders, P. Z. S., 1880, p. 164 
(lat. 29° 45’—84° 39’ 8., long. 8° 51’ E.); Sharpe, P. Z. 8., 1881, p. 12 
(Valparaiso); Salvin, Cat. B, Brit, Mus., XXV., p. 395 (1896); Sharpe, Hand- 
list B,. L., p. 125 (1899). 

Majaqueus conspicillatus, Coues, Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci., Philad., 1864, pp. 118, 
142; Gould, Handb. B. Austr., IL, p. 445 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, 
p. 86 (1870). 

Cape Hen. Hanson, /. s. ¢., pp. 81, 82. 


960. gad. 42° 23’S.L., 20° 32’ EL., Oct. 24th, 1898. 
Iris dark brown; bill yellow; feet and webs black. ‘This 
specimen has a patch of white feathers in the middle of the abdomen. 


Aves. 147 


37,380. 6 9 ad. 44°23'S.L, 72° 5 E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. 
400. 9 ad. 44° 23'S.L., 72° 5’ E.L. Soft parts as above. 


This large Petrel was first obtained in the Cape Seas on the 24th 
of October, 1898; and, on the voyage to Hobart Town, as many as 
eight specimens were obtained on Noy. 7th and 8th in Lat. 44° 23' 
S., Long. 72° 5’ E.; of these, three appear to have been preserved 
(supra, p. 82). Mr. Hanson also records the species as having been 
seen about the ship from Nov. 13th to the 18th; but by the 25th of 
that month he remarks that they had nearly all disappeared (p. 82). 


GSTRELATA, Bp. 


CESTRELATA MOLLIS. 


Procellaria mollis, Gould, Ann. and Mag. N. H., XIII, p. 363 (1844); id., 
B. Austr., VII, pl. 50 (1848); Layard, Zbis, 1862, p. 98 (lat. 44° S., 
long. 188° E.), 1872, p. 337 (lat. 8° 40’ N., long. 34° 31’ W.); Newton, bis, 
1863, p. 186 (Madeira), 1868, p. 340. 

#Estrelata mollis, Coues, I'roc. Acad, Nat. Sci., Philad., 1866, pp. 150, 170; 
Gould, Handb, B, Austr., IL, p. 453 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p, 42 
(1870). 

Gistrelata mollis, Salvin, Zbis, 1877, p. 480; id., P. Z. S., 1878, p. 7388 
(Nightingale Island); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII., p, 128 (1879); E. L. 
and L. C. Layard, Ibis, 1882, p. 539 (New Caledonia, Feb., breeding); 
Dalgleish, Zbis, 1890, p. 886 (Porto Santo); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., 
p. 406 (1896), 

CGistrelata philippi, Saunders (nec Gray), P. Z. 8., 1880, p. 164 (South Trinidad 
Island), 


No. 36G. 9 ad. 42° 23’S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. 
Iris dark brown; bill black ; feet and web grey. 


The single specimen obtained forms part of the great capture of 
Petrels of Oct. 24th, 1898, all of which Mr. Hanson had prepared by 
the 27th of the month (supra, pp. 81, 82). This was probably the 
species which followed the ship on Oct. 6th and 16th (swpra, p. 81). 


1 After leaving Hobart Town, Mr. Hanson (supra, p. 83) records some “ white- 
headed Petrels” as seen on the 24th of December, and it is doubtless this bird 
which he calls istrelata lessoni, on December 30th. The latter species, he says, 
left them on their approach to the ice-pack. Mr. Borchgrevink has a similar 
record (p. 54). No specimen of (2. lessont appears to have been secured. 


L 2 


148 Southern Cross. 


CESTRELATA BREVIROSTRIS. 


Procellaria brevirostris, Less., Traité d’Orn., p, 611 (1828). 


Gistrelata brevirostris, Salvin, in Rowley’s Orn. Misc., L., p. 235 (1876); id., 
P. Z. §., 1878, p. 788; Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 124 
(1879, Royal Sound, Kerguelen); Salv., Voy. ‘Challenger, H., Birds, p. 145 
(1881); id., Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 409 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-list B., 
I., p. 126 (1899). 


No. 27D. 9. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. 
Iris dark brown; bill grey; feet and webs black. 


Only one specimen was obtained, in the Cape seas on the 24th of 
October, the day when the officers of the ‘ Southern Cross’ captured 
so many Petrels of different kinds. 


PAGODROMA, Bp. 


PAGODROMA NIVEA. 
(Plate X., figs. 1-3.) 
Procellaria nivea, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 562 (1788); Cassin, U.S. Expl. Exped., 
p- 415, pl. 42 (1858, lat. 64° 8., long. 104° W.). 


Pagodroma nivea, Cones, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Philad.. 1866, pp. 160, 171; 
Sharpe, Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, App., p. 37, pl. 84 (1875); Salvin, P. Z.8., 
1878, p. 737 (ice-barrier); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘Challenger, p. 253 (1879, 
Antarctic ice-pack) ; Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 419 (1896); Forbes, 
Bull. Liverp. Mus., IL, pp. 48-50 (1:99); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux 
Antarct., p. 17 (1900); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 229 (1901); Borch- 
grevink, First on Antarct. Cont., pp. 64, 219, 228, 226, 230, 239; Bernacchi, 
S. Polar Regions, p. 226 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 84, 85, 86, 91, 92, 93, 
94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 102, 104. 


45 H. g ad. Pack-ice, 62° 52’ S.L., 159° 25’ B.L, Dec: aist, 
1898. (N. Hanson.) Wing 11°8. 

Iris dark brown ; bill black ; feet and webs grey. 

47 H. g ad. Pack-ice, 62° 52' S.L., 159° 25’ E.L., Dec. 31st, 
1898.. Wing 11°6. 

48H. g  . Pack-ice, 62° 62’ SL, 159° 25' HAL Dee. Silat: 
1898. Wing 10°3. 

57 H. ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 63° 27' S.L., 160° 6' E.L., Jan. Ist, 1899. 
Wing 11°8. 

59 H. 9 ad. Pack-ice, 63° 27’ 'S.L., 160° 6’ E.L., Jan. Ist, 
1899: Wine w=: 

63 H. ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 64 8 Sil, 160°.52' BL Jan 5, 1899! 
Wing 11°5. 


Aves. 149 


68 H. 9 ad. Pack-ice, 65° 3’ S.L., 161° 42’ E.L, Jan. 12th, 
1899. (NV. Hanson.) Wing 11°8. 

a. 9 ad. Cape Adare, April 27th, 1899. Wing 10°6. 

b. 2 ad. Cape Adare, April 28th, 1899. Wing 9°9. 

ce. 6 ad. Cape Adare, April 29, 1899. Wing 10°6. 

d. 9 ad. Cape Adare, April 30th. (4. B. Evans.) Wing 9°8. 

e. @ ad. Cape Adare, Dec. 13th, 1899. (2. B. Evans.) Wing 10°6. 

fog. 6 aa. Deer loth, 1899) (A.B. Evans.) Wing 10-1. 


The difference in size between specimens of the Ice Petrel is 
somewhat remarkable, and at first I thought that there must be two 
species of Pagodroma, as the size of the bill is so much less in 
certain individuals, and the length of the wing varies also. I have 
therefore given the dimensions of the latter in the series of specimens 
brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross, and it will be seen that this 
variation in the length of wing is not due to any difference of sex, 
as in the males it ranges from 10°1 to 11°8 inches, and in the 
females from 9°8 to 11°8 inches. 

The eggs are white, and measure :—Axis 2°01 to 2°38; diameter 
1°35 to i 67. , 

Mr. Howard Saunders gives the following concise account of the 
range of this species :—“ This bird has been obtained as far north as 
the Falkland Islands, but it does not occur in any numbers until 
Lat. 60° S. is passed, whence it can be traced as far southward as 
man has penetrated. Every expedition has noticed it. Ross found 
it laying its bluish-white egg, measuring 2*2 by 1:6 inches, among 
the crevices of the cliffs at Cockburn Island ; Surgeon Webster, of 
H.M.S. ‘ Chanticleer, met with the bird from January to March on 
Deception Island, South Shetlands; and the German expedition 
found it nesting at the end of December on South Georgia. From 
the Enderby Quadrant it has not yet been recorded.” 

The Ice Petrel was first seen by Mr. Hanson (supra, p. 84) on the 
31st of December, 1898, directly the ship got into the pack-ice, and 
four specimens were preserved on that day. On the 1st of January, 
1899, no less than fifteen of these birds were killed, and some were 
preserved. On most days in this month he seems to have noticed 
the species (supra, pp. 85, 86). On the 30th and 31st, when the 
‘Southern Cross’ was still in the pack-ice, Mr. Hanson procured some 
more specimens (p. 91). On the way north towards the open sea, he 
records having seen a few Ice Petrels sitting resting on the ice on 
the 9th of February, but they do not appear to have been seen after 
leaving the pack (p. 93). They were again found off Victoria Land 


150 Southern Cross. 


on the 15th of February among the large flocks of Thalasswca 
antaretica (p. 93), but they were not often seen near Cape Adare 
when the party first landed. One is recorded on the 4th of March, 
and another on the 31st (pp. 94,96). On the 13th of April, however, 
a number were seen by Mr. Hanson (p. 97), and several were 
obtained by himself and Mr. Evans near Cape Adare towards the 
end of the month (see list of specimens). 

On the 24th of April, Mr. Hanson says that a gale was blowing 
and he saw a number of Ice Petrels fishing in the mashed-up ice 
(p. 98), and again on the 26th he writes :—“To-night, at 9 p.m., I 
heard, just above my head, a bird cry four or five times. The note 
sounded like ‘kaw-kaw. It was too dark to see the bird, but it 
was the cry of the Pagodroma. I had heard it before on the 30th of 
last month” (p. 98). Twelve specimens were procured on the 10th 
of May by Mr. Hanson and Mr. Evans (p. 99). The species was 
now apparently more scarce, as a single specimen is recorded as 
having been seen on May 15th (p. 100), and again on June 17th 
(p. 102). Mr. Hanson’s last note is on the 13th of September, 
1899 :—“ Yesterday they observed some Pagodroma nivea on Duke 
of York Island. They kept about 1,000 feet up in the mountain, 
and when they flew, they played about in pairs, incessantly giving 
vent to the before-mentioned sound ‘kaw-kaw, but they were 
perfectly silent when sitting on the rocks ” (p. 104). 

Mr. Borchgrevink writes (p. 64):—“ Since we entered the ice, 
we were met by quite a different bird-life to that we had seen in 
the open sea. Pagodroma nivea and Tagalassoica [lege Thalasseca] 
glacialoides were best represented. They were always seen swimming 
about in the open spaces in the ice, seeking food which mainly 
consisted of crustacea. Only in a few instances a very small fish, 
like a herring in shape, has been found in them.” He noticed the 
species from time to time soaring about the peninsula at Cape Adare 
(p. 124) during a very heavy gale. Again he writes (p. 200) on the 
9th of November :—“I travelled to the eastward of Cape Adare 
amongst very heavy screw-ice. Many Pagodroma nivea were resting 
among the rocks ; they kept up a continual noise during the night.” 
He continues on p. 219:—“ From the time we first entered the icy 
regions they had soared around the vessel. They were difficult to 
distinguish against the pure white snow. Spotless and white, this 
bird, with its large black eyes, black beak, and black, webbed feet, 
is perhaps the most striking bird of the Antarctic regions. It seemed 
almost transparent as it sailed swiftly along in the rays. The couple 
are greatly attached to one another, and the courage of the male bird 


Aves. 151 


to help his mate when in danger is marked. It builds its nest in 
cavities of the rocks, or cracks in the mountain side, and lays but 
one egg.” On the 15th of November (p. 222) he writes :—‘“ How 
different it was to travel on those bright nights, instead of having to 
work in the darkness as we did in the winter-time.” 

“Many of the Pagodroma nivea were about” (p. 222), “and the 
air sounded with their original and remarkable half-whistling, half- 
shrieking voices. They did not seem to have immediate intentions 
of settling down to the quiet family life of the season; they were 
still seen to flirt about in pairs in the air, though some of them began 


ICE PETREL IN ITS NESTING-PLACE. 


(By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) 


to repair their old nesting-places in cavities of the rocks. Their 
nests were still in many instances filled with snow, and the bird was 
gradually thawing a hollow downwards towards the rock by sitting 
at the place from time to time. They were, however, very restless, 
and I expected that still a fortnight would go before they would 
begin to lay their eggs. 

“On the 20th November I discovered a fine Payodroma on its 
nest some 300 feet above my tent. I at once set to work, and 
managed to mine a hole through the roof of the cave in which it was 
resting, so that the light could come in for photographic purposes. 


152 Southern Cross. 


We were unable to get a photo of the nest as it was, on account of 
the depth and darkness of the cave. But Mr. Bernacchi managed 
to get some very fine photos, showing the characteristic stratifica- 
tions of the rocks.” 

On the 10th of December, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink started on 
his last sledge journey into Robertson Bay, “ principally for the 
purpose of securing eggs of the different birds.” He “secured 
Pagodroma eggs,’ and says that the hunt was “arduous, and at 
times involved difficult climbing” (p. 231). 

Mr. Bernacchi gives the following note (p. 226) :—‘“ Towards the 
end of November a short sledge journey was undertaken to the end 
of Robertson Bay, for the purpose of collecting eggs of the Snow 
Petrels. Travelling on the surface of the bay ice, which had already 
commenced to break up, and was traversed by huge cracks and open 
lanes, was difficult work. The surface snow, too, was soft and 
slushy. A large number of eggs, however, were gathered.” On 
p. 204 he writes :—“ The Snow Petrel (Pagodroma nivea) nests high 
up on the mountain sides of South Victoria Land, in long tunnel-like 
holes under the large slabs of rock, some being as much as six feet 
in depth, others only a foot or two. The actual nest is as crude as 
that of the Skua-Gull. The female sits on the nest long before she 
lays her single egg; when the bird is approached in its nest it 
expectorates a reddish fluid towards the intruder. This fluid has a 
most obnoxious fishy odour, and no doubt is a very effective means 
of defence. They are able to eject it to a distance of eight feet, and, 
if it catches the garments, the smell clings to them for many days 
after. I believe this method of defence is common to most Petrels. 
Some dozens of small white eggs were gathered at a height of 800 
feet above the sea,” 

During the voyage of the ‘ Belgica, Dr. Racovitza says (p. 17): 
“The most faithful of our winged companions was the White or 
Snow Petrel. It is one of the most graceful little birds possible to 
see. Its plumage is of a satiny white, purer even than the white of 
the snow itself. Its eyes are of jet, its bill and feet are black, and its 
flight is rapid and graceful. It seeks its food, which consists of small 
marine animals, when skimming over the cracks and channels in 
the ice. With a sudden plunge it seizes its prey, scarcely ruffling the 
water as it does so. Between whiles it makes long excursions 
over the ice, and nothing can be more pleasing than to see these 
little white woolly-looking objects disporting themselves over the 
white pack-ice. 

“But it is better not to make too intimate an acquaintance 


Aves. 153 


with these lily-white beings, for thus one is saved from some cruel 
disillusions. Its voice is shrill and disagreeable, and its ways are 
deplorably low caste. It possesses the faculty of being sea-sick at 
will; and when one attempts to seize it, it discharges full in one’s 
face the oily contents of its chest. I can affirm, from personal 
experience, that one does not come off with the perfume of the rose. 
One must add, however, to do strict Justice, that it merits extenuating 
circumstances ; for this unpleasant habit of the bird serves as a pro- 
tection for its feeble person, and that is a reason of a certain value.” 


GENUS OSSIFRAGA, Hombr. and Jacq. 


OSSIFRAGA GIGANTEA. 

Procellaria gigantea, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 563 (1788); Gould, B. Aust., VIT., 
p- 45 (1848). 

Ossifraga gigantea, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 48 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. 
Trans., CLXVILI. (extra vol.), p. 142 (1879, Kerguelen Isl.); Salvin, P. Z.58., 
1878, p. 787; Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da 
Cunha), pp. 180, 183 (Crozet Islands), p. 205 (Kerguelen Isl.), p. 254 (edge of 
pack-ice); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 225 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. 
Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 422 (1896); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux Antarct., p. 18 
(1900); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., p. 64 (1901); Saunders, 
Antarctic Manual, p. 231 (1901); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, pp. 78, 316 
(1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 86, 93, 94, 96. 


Giant Bird, Borchgrevink, ¢. c. p. 54 (1901). 
Gigantic Petrel, Borchgrevink, ¢. c. p. 220 (1901). 


Giant Petrel, Bruce in Burn Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 363 (1894, Danger 
Isl.) ; Cook., First Antarctic Night, p. 229 (1900); Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83, 
86, 90. 


Nelly, Burn-Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 315 (1894). 


No. 80 M. ? ad. Pack-ice, 65° 43'S.L. 164° 93, E.L., Jan. 16th, 
1899. (Nicolai Hanson.) 

Iris brown; bill dirty yellow; feet sooty brown; webs black. 

No. 2 g alb. Campbell Island, May 28th, 1899. (Captain 
Jensen.) 

a.b. 6 Y imm. Cape Adare, Jan. 2nd, 1900. (Hugh Evans.) 

c. @ semi-alb. Cape Adare, Jan. 13th, 1900. (Hugh Evans.) 


The Campbell Island bird is pure white, excepting for a few 
leaden grey feathers scattered over the back and breast. 

I take the following note on the distribution of this great Petrel 
from Mr. Howard Saunders’s essay in the Antarctic Manual’ 
(pp. 230, 231) :— 


154 Southern Cross. 


“The Giant Petrel (Ossifraga gigantea), which approaches the 
larger species of Albatros in size, was observed by Dr. McCormick 
soaring over Possession Island, Victoria Land, and the ‘ Belgica’ found 
it a constant attendant in the ice-pack. The ‘ Nelly,’ as sealers 
call it, is, in fact, the Vulture of the sea, visiting every spot where 
carcases and refuse of Seals and Penguins, or any other means of 
subsistence, can be found. Its breeding and habits on Marion and 
Kerguelen Islands have been described by Moseley and others, and 
the bird probably nests on Heard Island; Webster found it on 
Deception Island, South Shetlands, from January to March; and, 
as regards South Georgia, where the eggs are laid in the beginning 
of November, the practical Weddell remarks that these are inferior in 
taste to those of other species. The beak of this voracious bird is 
very powerful, and assertions have often been made by sailors that 
it will attack a drowning man and accelerate his death. Dr. 
McCormick states that when, after leaving Kerguelen, the boatswain 
of the ‘ Erebus’ fell overboard and could not be saved, the Giant 
Petrels swooped at him as he struggled to keep afloat, and it is 
doubtful if they did not actually strike him with their bills; while 
Mr. Arthur G. Guillemard states that a sailor, who was picked up, 
had his arms badly lacerated in defending his head from the attacks 
of an ‘ Albatros,’ which may well have been this Giant Petrel.” 

The first specimen recorded by Mr. Hanson was on October 
30th, 1898 (antea, p. 82), when the ‘ Southern Cross’ was nearing the 
Crozet Islands, and the species was again observed as the ship 
approached Tasmania, being noticed nearly every day. On December 
28th, when nearing the ice-pack, the Ossifraga is again recorded 
(antea, p. 83), and it was seen on several occasions in the ice in 
January (antea, pp. 86, 90). On the 26th, Mr. Hanson writes: 
“Saw some Giant Petrels. These birds must have a very keen sense 
of sight or smell, for no sooner is a Seal skinned on the ice than they 
put in an appearance” (antea, p. 90). When the ‘ Southern Cross’ was 
retracing its steps after its long imprisonment in the ice, he remarks 
(p. 93), under date of February 11th: “ Of birds, I have seen all my 
old acquaintances of the ice-pack, except the Penguins and Giant 
Petrels.” The latter species, however, reappeared when the ship was 
hove to off Victoria Land, on the 16th and 17th of February (antea, 
p- 93). By the 7th of March it was getting scarcer near Cape Adare, 
and was only to be found singly (antea, p. 94), but he captured two 
specimens in the middle of March (antea, p. 94), and the last one 
recorded was seen on the 31st of that month (antea, p. 96). 

Mr. Bernacchi (p. 316) says that during the summer the Giant 


Aves. B55 


Petrel was frequently seen at Cape Adare, and down near the Great 
Ice Barrier. 

Mr. Borchgrevink’s account of the species is as follows (p. 220) :— 
“The Gigantic Petrels also visited Camp Ridley. They were very 
scarce during the summer, but we saw several of them during the 
autumn. We did not find one of their nests, and their visits to 
the peninsula were always short and interrupted; and, to a great 
extent, I ascribe their visits to Robertson Bay and our peninsula to 
strong gales at sea, which drove them in towards shore for shelter. 
In fact, during the strongest gale wa had in the autumn, they arrived 
at Camp Ridley the day before the gale commenced, and left imme- 
diately after it was over. So I, at least, came to look upon their 
arrival as the sign of an approaching gale. These large birds, which 
in their flight much resemble the Albatros, vary somewhat in colour 
—perhaps as much as the Zestris—from dark brown to light faded 
brown ; and albinos are occasionally seen. I secured one of these 
latter, and Captain Jensen secured another. We had both of us great 
difficulty in obtaining a specimen; a noble, rare bird as he is, he 
seemed to soar about higher and more lonely than the rest, and 
remarkable was it that an albino—although of exactly the same 
species as the dark one—was seldom or never seen in its company. 
Whether this is because the others combine against him and hunt 
him because of his whiteness, or because he, in modest ignorance of 
his value, seeks his own sphere I do not know, but certain is it that 
he, willingly or compulsorily, soared about in higher regions than the 
rest.” 

Mr. Burn-Murdoch, who was on the ‘ Balaena,’ gives the following 
note on the species (p. 315) :— 

“ A number of Nellies or Giant Petrels come circling over us as 
we slowly drift from our shelter to leeward. They gorge themselves 
with the ‘ cran’ (scraps of Seals’ flesh cut off the blubber: this name 
is also given to the carcase of the Seal when its skin and blubber has 
been stripped off), that is constantly being thrown over our sides, then 
fly back to the snow and sit down beside their Penguin friends. 
Strange, ugly birds they are, the apparent coarseness of their build, 
and their grey-green clumsy beaks and rough brown feathers, give the 
impression that Nature has turned them out in a very wholesale 
fashion. Some of them are partly white, and a few, of the same kind 
of bird I belheve, perhaps one in twenty, are pure white, all but one 
or two brown feathers. The different stages of colouring are rather 
like those of the Gannet. We call them ‘Scavengers.’ They appear 
to be on a friendly footing with the living Penguins, and when one 


156 Southern Cross. 


of the latter dies the Nellie swallows it, and the relations of the 
deceased do not seem to mind. Two Penguins that were shot the 
other day were gobbled up before there was time to row the boat 
round a piece of ice to pick them up.” 

Dr. Racovitza’s account is as follows :— 

“The Giant Petrel is a hideous and repulsive bird. The size is 
that of a Goose, and the extent of wing in the males, which are larger 
than the females, exceeds two metres. Some are entirely white, and 
others entirely brown, but the colour often consists of a mixture of 
chocolate brown, white and grey, which imparts a generally dirty 
aspect to the bird. Add to this a formidable hooked bill of a flesh 
colour, and large webbed feet, and you have an ensemble which would 
never gain a prize in any beauty show started by the feathered races. 
For the rest, its vile employment is on a par with its vile appearance. 
The Giant Petrel performs on the pack-ice the ré/e of the Vultures. 
It is a knacker of repute, who knows how, in the course of his 
wrial manceuvres, to discover the corpses of Seals and birds out 
on the pack-ice. Constantly in motion, it traverses immense dis- 
tances in search of its food. When the object is detected, it descends 
to its meal at once, gorging itself with blubber and meat, more or 
less decomposed, to such an extent that it is not able to fly. Do not 
believe that this is a good time to approach it! The Giant Petrel 
has the same faculty as the Snow Petrel for ridding itself of an 
enemy. With a vigour equalled by its size, it discharges the contents 
of its digestive canal, and, in a twinkling, you are covered with bits 
of blubber and partially-eaten meat, together with the oil from its 
stomach. If the projectile of the Snow Petrel is not otto of roses, 
the bomb fired by the Giant Petrel spreads around a smell calculated 
to astound even a zoologist, who during his experiences has to see, or 
rather suffer from, all sorts of queer effects.” 


DAPTION, Steph. 
DAPTION CAPENSIS, 


Procellaria capensis, Linn., Syst. Nat. I., p. 218 (1766); Milne-Edwards & 
Grandid., Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 671 (1885). 


Daption capensis, Gould, B. Austr., VII., pl. 53 (1847); Gigl., Faun. Vert. 
Oceano, p. 46 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 118 
(1879, off Kerguelen Isl.) ; Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, 
Tristan da Cunha), p. 183 (Crozet Islands), p. 229 (Heard Island); Salvin, 


Aves. bey 


Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 428 (1896); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic 
Cont., pp. 54, 64, 66 (1901); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 230 (1901). 


Cape Pigeons, Burn-Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 281 (1894); Bernacchi, 
S. Polar Regions, pp. 15, 315 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 81, 82, 84, 85, 86, 
S701, 93: 


Noi 2, Ay 6 ad: “37° 3) Sis 8°) Wis, Oct. 15th, 1898. 

Iris dark brown; bill black ; feet black with a little grey on the 
inside, webs grey. 

Nas: 3.4.5.6, 7, A. 2? ¢ ad, 38° 29'S.1L,,.5°5 W.L,, Oct. U6th, 
1898. 

Soft parts as above. 

Nos. 98, 9) 10) 13, -A. 6 ad. 12 9 ad. 47° 27 Si 0 20 EL, 
Oct. 18, 1898. 

Nos14, 16, 117, 18,19, A. 2 ad-d5. A. gad. 39° 55 S:L.;3° 16' 
K.L., Oct. 19th, 1898. 

No: 20, A. @ ad. 44° 52'S.L.,, 5 

Nos. 42, Ac 9: g ad. 62° 52 
1898. 

No. 56, A. 9 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 27’ S.L., 160° 6' 
fas. Jan. Isé, 1899; 

No. 60, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 41'S.L, 160° 16’ 
EK.L., Jan. 2nd, 1899. 

No. 61, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 40’ S.L., 160° 36’ 
E.L., Jan. 4th, 1899. 

No. 66, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 65° 3’ S.L., 161° 42’ 
E.L., Jan. 11, 1899. 

No. 69, A. ¢ ad., 70, 71, A. 2 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 65° 3’ 
S.L, 161° 42’ E.L., Jan. 12th, 1899. 

A. ? ad. Shot on the pack-ice. Feb. 3rd, 1899. 


7° 32’ E.L., Nov. 2nd, 1898. 
SLs, Loo? 25) Hale Dee. 3iist, 


In the ‘ Antarctic Manual, Mr. Howard Saunders observes :— 
“The well-known Cape Petrel, or ‘Cape Pigeon’ (Daption capensis), 
is another of the medium-sized species which has hitherto succeeded 
in concealing its eggs from the gaze of naturalists, although the bird 
has been found in burrows with its young on Kerguelen, and there 
can be no doubt that it breeds on South Georgia, as well as other 
suitable localities in the Antarctic regions. It occurs throughout 
the Southern seas, and has even been obtained on one occasion off 
Ceylon. At long intervals individuals have been taken in the North 
Atlantic, from the United States to the British Islands; but among 
the numerous birds captured at sea many are known to have been 


158 Southern Cross. 


carried hundreds of miles before their eventual liberation, and this 
may account for occurrences so far beyond the usual limits.” 

The first Cape Pigeons are recorded in Mr. Hanson’s diary as 
having been noticed by him on the 8th of October, when between 
St. Vincent and the Cape, and many were snared by him between 
the 8th and 29th of that month (antea, p. 81). The 2nd of 
November was the last time that he observed Cape Pigeons in flocks 
before reaching Tasmania (p. 82). By the 25th of November, when 
nearing Tasmania, they had nearly all left the ship (antea, p. 82): 
but he notes that when the latter entered the ice-pack on the 30th of 
December, “our old acquaintance, the Cape Pigeon, also appeared 
again” (p. 83). He procured specimens in the pack from the Ist to 
the 12th of January, 1899. On the 29th he notices that the birds 
disappeared, so that up to that time they must have been generally 
observed in the pack (p. 91). On the 12th of February, when 
the ship had escaped from the ice and regained the open sea, Cape 
Pigeons were again observed, and they were also seen during the 
hurricane off Victoria Land on the 15th of February (p. 93). 

Mr. Borcherevink mentions his having seen Daption capensis in 
the ice-pack, especially on the 12th of January, when they were 
“swimming about in the open water catching crustacea” (p. 68). 
He also speaks of the species as moulting at the end of December, 
“and flying with some difficulty ” (p. 54). 

Mr. Bernacchi writes:—“ A general favourite among seamen is 
the Cape Pigeon, a pretty, busy little sea bird about the size of a 
dove, but plumper, with a black head and an elaborate pattern in 
black, grey, and white upon its wings. Around the stern of any 
passing ship large numbers of fluttering visitors hover continually, 
their shrill cries and unweary manceuvres contrasting pleasantly with 
the deep monotone made by the driving keel through the foaming 
sea. In common with most Southern sea-birds having hooked beaks, 
they are easily caught with hook and line, but will not live in 
captivity. Thoughtless passengers often amuse themselves by 
shooting these graceful wanderers, although what satisfaction may 
be found in reducing a beautiful living thing to a useless morsel of 
draggled carrion is not easy to see.” 


1 Cf, Hanson’s Diary for October 18th, 1898 (antea, p. 81). 


Aves. 159 


PRION, Lacép. 
PRION BANSKI.? 


Prion banksi, Gould, Ann. and Mag. N. H., XIII., p. 366 (1844); id., Handb. 
B. Austr., IT., p. 474 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 44 (1870); Salvin, 
P. Z. 8., 1878, p. 739 (Marion Island and at sea near Crozets); Buller, B. N. 
Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 211 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 434 
(1896). 
Nos. 28, 29, E. g¢ ad. [Cape Seas], 42° 23’ S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., 
Oct. 24th, 1898. 


Only one specimen of Prion was in the collection, and this is 
undoubtedly P. banksi. 


Mutton Bird, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp 52, 54 (1901); Hanson, 
antea, pp. 88, 86, 92. 


P.S.—The “Mutton Bird” of Australia is Puffinus tenuirostris 
(Temm.), which is Puffinws brevicaudus of Gould’s ‘ Handbook’ (IL., 
p. 549). Nospecimen was procured by the ‘Sowthern Cross’ expedition, 
so that I can only conjecture that this is the species intended by Mr. 
Borchgrevink and Mr. Hanson in their notes. It was noticed at sea 
on nearing Tasmania (antea, p. 83), and on several occasions on the 
voyage from Hobart to the pack-ice. Some were even noticed in the 
ice-pack itself from the 6th to the 10th of January (antea, p. 86), 
and many were seen in the open sea on the return of the ship, after 
its long imprisonment, on the 7th of February (p. 92). On the 13th 
of February, Mr. Hanson also speaks of a ‘Grey Petrel,’ which was 
again seen off Victoria Land on the 16th of the same month (p. 93). 


* Whether it was this species which is recorded as Prion vittatus by 
Mr. Hanson and Mr. Borchgrevink, I have no means of judging, as specimens do not 
seem to have been obtained. The former (antea, p, 82) noticed a species of Prion 
round the ship from November 13th to 18th on the voyage to Tasmania, and when 
approaching the last-named island. On leaving Hobart it seems to have been again 
noticed, and Mr. Hanson states that, on nearing the ice-pack, “ Prion vittatus” 
appeared, after the ‘ Southern Cross’ had passed the 60th degree of south latitude 
(antea, p. 82). He says that it was the only species which followed them in 
among the ice, the others having left before they sighted it. On the 23rd of 
January, 1899, Mr. Hanson states (antea, p. 90) that he obtained a specimen of 
Prion vittatus, the first he had seen that year, when the ship was in the ice-pack, 
but the skin of this bird, which would have been so interesting for the identification 
of the species, was not in the collection brought to the Museum. A species of 
Prion was again noticed when the open water was reached after the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ came out of the ice-pack, before entering it for the second time (antea, p. 93). 
Mr. Borchgrevink’s first notice of “ Prion vittatus” is on the 20th of December, 
1898, and again on the 21st. After leaving Tasmania (p. 58) on the 29th, “ Prion 
vittatus”” appeared in far greater quantities than he had ever seen them before 
(p. 54). On the 80th he mentions the species again among other kinds of Petrels, 
as recorded also by Mr. Hanson (antea, p. 83). He further says that it followed 


the ship for some distance into the pack, but it left long before the latter came to 
the dense pack. 


160 Southern Cross. 


DIOMEDEA, Linn. 
1. DIOMEDEA EXULANS. 


Diomedea exulans, Linn., Syst. Nat., L, p. 214 (1766); Gould, B. Austr., VII., 
pl. 38 (1844); id. Handb., I., p. 427 (1865); Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 49 
(1870) ; Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 145 (1879, Kerguelen) ; 
Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha, breeding), 
p- 171 (Marion Island), p. 180 (Crozet Islands); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. 
XXV., p. 441 (1896); Hanson in Borchgr. Antarctic Cont. App., p. 822 (1901). 


No.1 A. g. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1899. 

Iris brown, the eyelids bluish grey; bill bluish livid, the tip 
white ; feet light bluish red, with the webs of the same colour. 

No.2 A. @. 44° 26'S.L., 37° E.L., Oct. 29th, 1898. 

Soft parts as above. 


Neither bird is completely adult, though the male has the 
secondaries for the most part white, with brown frecklings; on the 
crown are the remains of a brown patch. In the younger female 
the crown is dull brown, and the entire wing is blackish, as pointed 
out by Mr. Salvin. 

No. 1 is the specimen mentioned by Mr. Hanson (antea, p. 81) on 
the 24th of October, 1898. ‘This morning, as soon as I came on 
deck, I caught a large Albatros.” And again on the 29th he says :— 
“Caught a large Albatros. It is a little darker than the first, and 
perhaps a year younger. The number of Albatroses about the ship 
increases every day. Last night I observed at one time eight large 
ones” (p. 82). Previous entries in his diary record the occurrence 
of the species on the voyage south to the Cape seas. Nearing 
Tasmania, towards the end of November, Albatroses were noticed, 
and one was caught on the 25th, but was apparently not preserved. 
These may have been Diomedea regia, and not D. exulans, as may 
also have been the Albatros recorded by Mr. Borchgrevink as 
“plentiful” on December 20th, the day after the ‘ Southern Cross’ 
left Hobart. He saw some more on the 23rd (p. 53). 

Mr. Hanson observes (antea, p. 93) on the 14th of February :— 
“ A Diomedea, apparently D. exulans, followed us also for some time, 
and I believe that this is the first time that this bird has been seen 
so far south (69° 13'S. Lat.),” but the species seen may have been 
D. vegia. It was noticed when the ‘Southern Cross’ had left the 
ice-pack and was in the open sea again. 


Aves. 161 


2. DIOMEDEA REGIA. 


Diomedea regia, Buller, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., XXIII., p. 2830 (1891); Salvin, 
Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 443 (1896). 


No. 11, imm., Campbell Island, Oct. 4th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) 
No. 12, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 5th, 1899. 

No. 13, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 6th, 1899. 

No. 14, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 7th, 1899. 

No. 19, ad., Campbell Island, Oct. 7th, 1899. 


Three specimens carry a great deal of nestling down. One is full- 
grown, with white back and white breast, but still bears nestling 
down round the neck and on the breast. The only one which has no 
down on the plumage has the wings black, with white margins to the 
wing-coverts ; the scapulars also are for the most part black, with white 
bases and fringes, but showing a tendency to become more entirely 
white. 

The other whitish bird was procured on the 13th of January, 1900. 
It is more grey than white, and seems to be in an intermediate stage 
of some kind. The other birds are in the dark brown young 
plumage, with the throat rather lighter brown. 


3. DIOMEDEA MELANOPHRYS. 


Diomedea melanophrys, Boie in Temm., Pl. Col. V., pl. 456 (1828) ; Gould, 
B. Austr. VIL., pl. 48 (1884); id., Handb. II., p. 488 (1865) ; Salvin, P. Z.8., 
1878, p. 740 (Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen); Sharpe, Phil. Trans, CLX VII. 
(extra vol.), p. 146 (1879); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 254 (1879) ; 
Milne-Edwards and Grandid., Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 669 (1881); Baird, Brewer 
and Ridgw., Water B. N. Amer., IL, p. 357 (1884); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 
2nd ed., II., p. 198 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 447 (1896) ; 
Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 538, 54 (1901); Hanson, antea, 
pp. 81, 83; Hanson in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., pp. 821, 324 (1901). 


Thalassarche melanophrys, Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 57 (1870). 
Yellow-billed Mollymawk, Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83. 


No. 4B, dg ad. 33° 37’ S.L., 9° 54’ E.L., Oct. 13th, 1898. 

Iris greyish-brown ; bill yellow, tip red; feet fleshy-red, the webs 
of the same colour. 

No. 3 B, 6 ad. 33° 37'S.L., 9° 54’ E.L., Oct. 13th, 1898. Soft 
parts as above. 

No. 13 B, ? ad. 44° 20 S.L., 68° 28’ E.L., Nov. 6th, 1898. Soft 
parts as above. 

M 


162 Southern Cross. 


No. 20 B, 9 ad. 44° 23’ S.L., 72° 5’ E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. Soft 
parts as above. 

No. 22 B, 6 ad. 44° 23’ S.L., 72° 5’ E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. Soft 
parts as above, 


Although Mr. Hanson has given the colour of the bill as the same 
in all the specimens, there is a good deal of hlack near the tip. In 
some the general colour of the back is rather browner, and the white 
head and neck are shaded with grey; all these points I believe to be 
characteristic of the immature bird. 

The first specimens captured by Mr. Hanson were those of 
October 13th, 1898, which he prepared on the following day (antea, 
p. 81). The species is also recorded as the “ Yellow-billed Molly- 
mawk” on November 6th and 7th (p. 82); and he again mentions it 
by this name as noticed after leaving Hobart, on the 21st and 24th 
of December. It was one of the species which accompanied the ship 
to the ice-pack, but left before it entered the ice on the 30th of 
December (p. 83). On emerging from the pack in February, the 
Yellow-billed Mollymawk was again seen (p. 93). Mr. Borchgre- 
vink observed the species on the same days recorded above by Mr. 
Hanson. He also records “ Diomeda chlororhyncha” [sic], as having 
been noticed by him on the 26th of December, six days after leaving 
Hobart, but the species is not mentioned by Mr. Hanson. 

The latter states (antea, p. 13) that the ‘‘ Short-tailed” Albatros 
was also seen on nearing Tasmania, on the 27th of November. Mr. 
Borchgrevink also says that on leaving Tasmania “ the Short-tailed 
Albatros followed the ship, until the 20th December, when no more 
were to be seen” (pp. 52, 53). Which species of Albatros is here 
intended I cannot determine, but it cannot have been the Short-tailed 
Albatros (Diomedea brachyura) of Gould’s ‘ Handbook’ (IL., p. 433), 
which is the northern D. albatrus of Pallas [¢f. Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. 
Mus. xxv., p. 444]. 


THALASSOGERON, Ridew. 
1. THALASSOGERON CULMINATUS. 


Diomedea culminata, Gould, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XIII., p. 361 (1844, 
South Pacific and Atlantic Oceans); id., B. Austr., VIL, pl. 41 (1848); id., 
Handb. B. Austr., II., p. 486 (1865); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra 
vol.), p. 147 (1879); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 129 (1879, ‘Tristan 
da Cunha), p. 183 (Crozet Islands); Hanson in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., 
pp. 322, 333 (1901). 


Aves. 163 


Thalassareche culminata, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 59 (1870). 


Thalassogeron culminatus, Baird, Brewer and Ridgw., Water Birds N, Amer., 
IL., p. 358 (1884); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 451 (1896) ; Sharpe, 
Hand-list B., [., p. 129 (1899). 


Black-and-yellow- billed Mollymawk, Hanson, antea, pp. 81, 82, 98. 
Black-billed Mollymawk, Hanson, wntea, pp. 82, 83, 93. 


No. 56,C, ¢ 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32' E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. 

Iris light brown; bill black, with yellow edge above and _ below, 
the tip red; feet and webs fleshy grey. 

Nos, 9,10) 145 15, €; 12 B, ¢ adi: 44°20" S.L, 68° 28 H.I:., 
Nov. 6, 1898. 

No. 17, C, 9 ad. ~ 44° 23’ S.L.; 72° 5' E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. 

Nese 8s19) Cee 2 imm, 45°9' S.L., 77° 13’ ELLs Nov. 9th; 
1898. 

Bill black, the tip yellow. 


The younger birds are recognised by their black bill and browner 
plumage, the whole head and sides of face being leaden grey, and the 
throat paler grey. There is no trace of the yellow band along the 
culmen, but a slightly paler appearance at the base of the lower 
mandible; otherwise the bill is black. In the youngest example 
there are indications of lighter brown edges to the feathers of the 
mantle. The white head and throat are only gradually assumed and 
are evidently the signs of very old birds. In the majority of 
specimens these parts are of a beautiful dove-grey. 

This species is of wide distribution in the Southern oceans. Mr. 
Hanson records the first capture of the Albatros, with “black-and- 
yellow bill,” on the 24th of October, 1898 (antea, p. 81). Two more 
were caught on the 2nd of November (p. 82), but were apparently 
not preserved, and on the 6th of the same month four “ black-billed ” 
specimens were obtained. This Albatros followed the ship to 
Tasmania, and is recorded nearly every day in Mr. Hanson’s Diary. 
After leaving Tasmania, it was seen on the 26th of December (antea, 
p. 83) and is again recorded as occurring in the open sea, after the 
ship emerged from the ice-pack in February (p. 93). 


PHG:BETRIA, Reichenb. 


PHGBETRIA FULIGINOSA. 


Diomedea fuliginosa, Gm. Syst. Nat. I, p. 568 (1788); Gould, B. Aust., VII., 
pl. 44 (1848); Salvin, P. Z. S., 1878, p. 740 (Ice Barrier); Sharpe, Phil. 
Trans. CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 148 (1879, Royal Sound, Kerguelen) ; 

M 2 


164 Southern Cross. 


Moseley, Notes, Nat. ‘ Challenger, pp. 180, 183 (1879, Crozet Islands), p. 254 
(margin of the pack ice); Saunders, P. Z. §., 1880, p. 165 (lat. 37° 59’ S., 
long. 29° 18’ E.); Scl. Ibis, 1894, p. 498 (edge of pack ice); Hanson in 
Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., p. 822 (1901.) 


Phebetria fuliginosa, Gould, Handb. B. Austr., IT., p. 441 (1865); Coues, Proc. 
Atad. Nat. Sci., 1866, pp. 186, 188; Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 60 (1870) ; 
Baird, Brewer and Ridgw., Water Birds, N .Amer., II., p. 359 (1884); 
Salvin, Cat. b. Brit. Mus., XX VI. p. 453 (1896); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, 
p- 280 (1901); Bernacchi, 8S. Polar Regions, p. 816 (1901). 


Diomeda fuliginosa, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 58, 54 (1901). 


Sooty Albatros, Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83, 93; id. in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., 
p. 324. 


No. 7, D, g@. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. 

Tris dark brown; bill black, with a white streak on either side of 
the lower mandible; feet and webs greyish brown. 

No. 23, D, 9 ad. Nov. 8th, 1898. 

Iris dark brown ; a blue edge along the under mandible. 

No. 24, D, g ad. 45° 9'S.L., 77° 30’, Nov. 9th, 1898. 

No..25, D, 9 ad?. 46°90 SiL.(%2 30 Now 1th soe: 


The Sooty Albatros has also a wide range over the Southern 
oceans, and extends to the edge of the ice-pack, where a specimen 
was obtained by the ‘ Challenger’ on the 10th of February, 1874. 
Mr. Hanson’s diary records many observations of the species, and 
his first specimen was obtained in the Cape seas on the 24th of 
October, 1898. On the voyage to Tasmania it was seen on the 2nd 
of November, and thence nearly all the way thither (p. 82). On the 
24th and 28th of December the Sooty Albatros was seen on the 
voyage from Hobart to the ice-pack, but it was last seen on the 30th 
when nearing the latter, which it did not enter. When the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ left the ice-pack for its second attempt to penetrate to Cape 
Adare, this Albatros was observed directly the ship regained the 
open sea (p. 93). 

Mr. Bernacchi (p. 316) states that the Sooty Albatros actually 
entered the ice-pack, and was occasionally seen during the month of 
January, 1899, but I think that the Ossifraga must have been 
mistaken for the present species, as it seems almost certain that 
Hanson would have recorded the fact. 


Aves. | 165 


OrpER LARIFORMES. 
STERNA, Linn. 


1. STERNA VITTATA. 


Sterna vittata, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 606 (1788); Pelzeln, Reise Novara, Vog., 
p. 152 (1865, St. Paul’s Island); Saunders, P. Z. 8., 1876, p. 647, 1877, p. 795 
(Inaccessible Island, Tristan da Cunha); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII. 
(extra vol.), p. 1138 (1879, Kerguelen Island); Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., 
XXV., p. 51 (1896); id., Antarctic Manual, p. 233 (1901). 


No. 15, 9 ad. Campbell Island, Oct. 15th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) 


On this species Mr. Howard Saunders gives the following note :— 

“There is ample evidence that Terns are found in large numbers 
in the South Polar Regions, and even within the Antarctic circle, for 
Bellingshausen, of the Russian ship ‘ Wostok,’ has recorded Terns on 
the 18th February, 1820, 68° S., while McCormick saw one in 76° 
52' S., and 178° W., said he had previously observed ‘ flocks’ on 
the ice between 65° 66’ S., and in about 158° W. On the third 
attempt of the ‘ Hrebus, McCormick noticed Terns breeding on 
Cockburn Island. Webster found birds of this family in the South 
Shetlands, and the Dundee whalers brought back specimens from 
that neighbourhood, which are referable to a well-known South 
American species, Sterna hiruwndinacea, akin to our own common 
Tern, though quite distinct. This distribution might be expected, 
and it may be reasonably assumed that all the Terns found to the 
southward of America are of this species. But the species found off 
Victoria Land has still to be identified, and all that can be said is 
that, inasmuch as the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition obtained at Camp- 
bell Island an adult of Sterna vittata, there is a probability that this 
species may go as far as Victoria Land.” 


2. LARUS SCOPULINUS. 


Larus scopulinus, Gray in Dieffenb. Trav. N. Zeal., 11. App., p. 200 (1843: 
New Zealand); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II. p. 55, pl. XXIX. (1888); 
Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 238 (1896). 


No. 1,imm. Campbell Island, May 2nd, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) 
Nos. 16, 17, g 9 ad, Campbell Island, Oct. 16th, 1899. (Capt. 
Jensen.) 


166 Southern~ Cross. 


Two species of true Gulls occur within the Antarctic area. 
One of these is the Southern Black-backed Gull (Larus dominicanus), 
which was found by Dr. McCormick breeding on Cockburn Island, 
and it was also met with by Capt. Fairweather of the ‘ Balaena’ in 
Lat. 64° 18’ S. (¢f. Saunders, ‘Antarctic Manual, p. 232). The 
same observer obtained a specimen of Larus scoresbit in Lat. 64° 55’ S., 
in the vicinity of the South Shetland Islands (cf. Saunders, /.c.). It 
was probably Gabianus pacificus, which Mr. Hanson noticed off the 
coast of Tasmania (cf. antea, p. 83) as very like Z. marinus. 


MEGALESTRIS, Bp. 
1. MEGALESTRIS MACCORMICKI. 


(Plate IX.) 
Lestris, apparently a new species, McCormick, Voy. Discov. Antarctic, I., p. 154 ; 
Possession Islands, off Victoria Land (71° 56’ 8.L., 171° 15’, E.L.) 


Stercorarius antarcticus, (nec Less.), Saunders, P. Z. §., 1876, p. 822; id. Journ. 
Linn. Soc. Zool., XV., p. 393 (1878). 


Stercorarius maccormicki, Saunders, Bull., B. O. C., IlL., p. 12 (Dec. 1898, 
Possession Islands). 


Megalestris maccormicki, Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 321, pl. 1 
(1896); Sharpe, Hand-l. B. I., p. 14£ (1899); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, 
pp. 231, 287 (1901); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, pp. 74, 317 (1901); 
Hanson, antea, p. 94, 96, 97, 98. 

Megalestris antarctica (nec Less.), Racovitza, Vie des animaux dans 
PAntarctique, p. 39 (1900). 

Skua-Gulls, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 105, 193, 216, 218, 228, 
226, 242, 257, 262, 291 (1901); Bernacchi, ¢.c., pp. 286, 244 (1901); Hanson, 
antea, pp. 89, 94, 95, 96. 

No. 3, B, ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 66° 4’ S.L., 166° 50’ E.L., Jan. 20th, 

1899. 

Iris dark brown; bill slaty black; feet and webs black. 

(NV. Hanson.) 

No. 4, 5, B, ¢@ @ ad. 'Pack-ice, 66> 34° Si, 160.75) Bag 

Jan. 26th, 1899. (N. Hanson.) 

Soft parts as above. 

a.b. g @ juv. Cape Adare, Feb. 19th, 1899. (WV. Hanson.) 
c. ad. Cape Adare, Oct. 29th, 1899. (H. B. Evans.) 

d. 9 ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 6th, 1899. (i. B. Evans.) 

e. g ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 20th, 1899. (ZH. B. Lvans.) 

d. g ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 29th, 1899. (H. B. Evans.) 

e. g pull. Cape Adare, Dec. 29th, 1899. (A. B. Hvans.) 
About three days old. 


Aves. 167 


g.h. g pull. Cape Adare, Jan. 9th, 1900. (H. Bb. Hvans.) 
k. 6 9 ad. Cape Adare, Jan. 14th, 1900. (//. B. Evans.) 


Ff. 2 pull. Cape Adare, Jan. 8th, 1900. (H. B. Evans.) 
]. 
. @ juv. Mount Melbourne, Feb. 6th, 1900. (#7. B. Evans.) 


2 

/ 

Nestling (about two days old). Covered with greyish-white down, 
with a pinkish-brown tinge on the interscapular region and on the 
rudimentary wings. 

As the nestling grows older, the brown tinge becomes more 
prevalent. 

The full-grown young birds, killed in February, are much darker 
than the adults, and are sooty grey, with edgings of lighter sooty 
erey to the feathers of the upper surface. Two of these young 
birds have a lighter grey hind neck, and are paler grey below, while 
the third has no lighter area in the hind neck, and is everywhere 
darker and somewhat melanistic. 

The sign of an old bird is undoubtedly the yellow on the hind 
neck and throat, and this becomes more and more bleached, like the 
rest of the plumage. 

The eggs of this Skua are plentifully varied in colour. There are 
at least three distinct types of ground-colour—an olive brown, more 
or less dark, an olive-grey stone-colour, and a pale green. The 
latter are not so plentifully spotted as the rest of the series, having 
faint brown spots and lines, with nearly obsolete underlying spots 
and blotches of purplish grey. The series measures :—Axis, 2*58— 
3°09; diameter, 1:86-2:08. 

The brown eggs have the underlying marks very distinct, but not 
sO prominent or so dark as the overlying spots and blotches, which 
take a variety of shapes, and are sometimes confluent near the larger 
end of the egg, so as to form a large irregular patch. Of this species, 
Mr. Howard Saunders writes in the ‘ Antarctic Manual * :— 

“ After the Penguins and some of the Petrels, the most prominent 
species within the Antarctic circle is a predacious and aggressive 
Gull, McCormick’s Skua, named after its virtual discoverer. It was 
first obtained at Possession Island, Victoria Land, where a pair had 
taken up their residence in the midst of a colony of the Adélie 
Penguins, and subsequently examples were obtained or seen nearly 
as far south as 78°, while Long. 178° W. was the furthest record in 
the direction of America. The‘ Belgica’ brought back four examples, 
from lat. 82° and 86° W., in the ice-pack. The ‘Southern Cross’ 
obtained a fine series, from the downy plumage upwards ; these young 
birds being of a dark slaty grey, and very different from those of the 


168 Southern Cross. 


other Great Skuas, of which four representatives are now recognised. 
The species known as the ‘ Bonxie,’ of the Shetlands, frequenting the 
North Atlantic, is not known south of the coast of Morocco; but in 
the Southern Ocean, from the New Zealand area to Heard, Kerguelen, 
Marion and Crozet Islands, and westward to the Falklands, is found a 
larger and darker Skua (Megalestris antarctica), which seems to breed 
as far south as the South Shetlands and Cockburn Island, and I have 
examined a specimen obtained by the Dundee whalers. Some six or 
seven degrees of latitude separate this dark form from McCormick’s 
Skua, which is a much paler bird, almost dirty straw-colour about 


MACCORMICK’S SKUA. 


(By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) 


the head and neck. The fourth species, I/. chilensis, has the under 
parts of a warm chestnut colour. Further specimens of these Southern 
Skuas, with notes on their geographical distribution, are much wanted, 
but anything approaching the extermination of a colony is to be 
deprecated.” 

This large Skua was observed in large numbers on several 
occasions by the ‘ Southern Cross, and a great many were shot by 
Mr. Hanson at Cape Adare, but only two of the skins thus procured 
were in the collections brought to England, and the series consists 
principally of skins prepared by Mr. Evans after Mr. Hanson’s death. 


Aves. 169 


The first specimen was procured by the latter in the ice-pack on 
the 20th of January, 1899 (antea, p. 89). Two more were obtained 
on the 26th (p. 90). This Skua was one of the species noticed on 
landing at Cape Adare on the 17th of February (p. 93), and on the 
3rd of March Mr. Hanson shot eighty-two specimens, as the birds 
were becoming destructive to the stores of Seal and Penguin-meat. 
As winter approached the Skuas became less plentiful, but fourteen 
were shot on the 12th of March (p. 94). On the 26th of the month, 
Mr. Hanson records the finding of two young birds “hardly 
able to fly,” at an altitude of 1, °050 ‘feet (p. 95). The species was 
noticed in diminishing numbers throughout April up to the 20th, 
when Mr. Hanson’s diary mentions that none had been recently 
seen (p. 98). 

Mr. Bull (Cruise of the ‘ Antarctic,’ p. 182) speaks of the 
mortality among the Penguins as frightful in Victoria Land, judging 
by the number of skeletons and dead birds lying about in all 
directions. At Cape Adare he says, “the raptorial Skua-Gull was 
present, as everywhere in the neighbourhood of Penguin nurseries, 
and was busily occupied with its mission in life, viz., the prevention 
of over-population in the colony.” 

Mr. Borchgrevink says that the Skuas were in great numbers on 
the arrival of the Expedition at Cape Adare, but began to get scarce 
in the middle of March (p. 105). On the 31st of October they returned, 
and he shot five of them (p. 193). He writes :—‘ The worst enemy of 
the Penguin is the Skua-Gull, which constantly soared over their nests, 
watching for an opportunity when they might steal an egg or catch a 
young one. As I already observed in 1895, I now also often saw two 
of these birds attack a Penguin family ; whilst one kept the old ones 
away, the other took the young one” (pp. 215, 216). The Skua-Gulls 
arrived somewhat later than the Penguins, and their nesting also 
took place later. They had their nests in the heights, for instance, 
1,000 feet up on Cape Adare, amongst the rocks, while a small Skua 
rookery was also to be found some fifty feet above the peninsula, 
on a small rocky gallery close to the perpendicular wall of the Cape. 
Their eggs were of a greyish brown, with dark brown stains. 
Gancuilly: two eggs were found in each nest. The young ones were 
exceedingly pretty in their fluffy coats of light grey down. The old 
Skuas were very bold at ordinary times, and attacked us frequently 
with wings and beak when we climbed the rocks, but when they had 
young ones their indomitable courage and audacity surpassed that of 
any other bird of prey I have seen” (p. 218). On November 20th he 


' See also Mr. Bull’s account, antea, p. 128, 


E70 Southern Cross. 


writes :—“ We daily saw fresh proofs of the audacity of the Skua- 
Gulls. On several occasions they attacked the dogs, and nearly all 
of us were, on more than one occasion, also attacked by them. They 
shot down from a great height in the air straight on our heads, hit 
us with their wings, only to rise again and renew the attack. We 
killed several of them with short sticks” (p. 223). On November 
27th we learn that Mr. Evans (p. 226) “brought in his first Skua- 
Gull’s egg. The colour was light green, brown or grey, with dark 
brown spots” (!). On the 27th of December, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink 


SKUA-GULL ON NEST. 


(By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) 


says that he caught some very fine specimens of young Skua-Gulls 
when he went to the top of Cape Adare (p. 242). The species was 
also observed on Possession Island (p. 257), and again near Mount 
Melbourne on February 5th on a beach where “there were no 
Penguins, but a great many Skuas, with nearly full-grown young 
ones” (p. 262). The note of the bird, according to Mr. Borchgrevink, 
is a “cruel screech” (p. 291). 

Mr. Bernacchi has also several notes on the species. On landing 
at Cape Adare a great number of Skua-Gulls “seemed to resent our 


A ves. LTE 


visit, for they repeatedly darted at our heads, and made a noisy 
outery ” (p. 74). On the 3rd of February, 1900, some young ones were 
procured on Possession Island (p. 236). He also writes :—‘ At nine 
o'clock in the evening of the 5th of February we landed in a boat on 
a pebbly beach at the foot of Mount Melbourne. The place upon 
which we landed was a pebbly bank, even larger in extent than that 
at Cape Adare, entirely free from snow and ‘ponds, and occupied 
by Penguins and Skua-Gulls” (p. 244). 

Dr. Racovitza’s notes on the species as observed by him during 


YOUNG SKUA-GULLS IN NEST. 


(By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) 


the voyage of the ‘ Belgica’ are as follows:—‘ Among the Gavi 
there was our old friend the Brown Skua-Gull, against whom I have 
a considerable grudge. One day when I was at the foot of the high 
chiff on De Cuverville Island, I saw, by the aid of my spy-glass, on 
a platform in the perpendicular wall, a little tuft which seemed to 
me not to be formed of moss, but of real grass. It was the first time 
I had made such an identification, so I felt that I must at all hazards 
try to reach this little platform and capture this unique specimen of 
a plant. I laid aside my gun and collecting-bag, and was soon 
scaling, with the aid of my alpenstock, the wall of the cliff{ The 


172 Southern Cross. 


task was not easy ; one had to hang on with the tips of the fingers 
to the rough rocks, or to hoist oneself by the force of one’s wrists by 
sticking the alpenstock into crevices. I was already a great height up, 
when two of these Skuas began to interest themselves in my affairs. 
They had made their nest on the top of the cliff, and there were two 
little nestlings, covered in down, sitting quietly in the nest. The 
father and mother, evidently believing that I wanted to carry off 
their progeny, addressed themselves to the task of preventing my 
upward climb. 

“With vigorous strokes of their wings, they threw themselves 
upon me, and attempted to strike me with their wings and bills. 
With my left hand gripping a point of rock, one foot resting on a 
tiny excrescence and the other hanging in the air, I fenced with my 
stock with all the force of my right arm, glancing all the time at 
the beautiful bed of pebbles upon which I had the chance of 
extending myself after a fall of thirty metres, and I vowed that 
henceforth I would never part with my gun. A few well-directed 
blows with my stock rid me for a few moments of my enraged 
aggressors, and I was thus enabled to reach the platform and at last 
secure the little plant I was in search of. My contest with the 
Brown Skuas must not prevent my rendering justice to a brave 
enemy, whom I recognise as the most courageous bird of the 
Antarctic, the true representative of the Eagle among the birds ot 
the ocean.” 


MEGALESTRIS ANTARCTICUS. 


Lestris antarctica, Less. ‘lraité d’Orn., p. 616 (1831, Falkland Isl.; New 
Zealand) ; Gray in Dieffenb., Trav. N. Zeal., 1I., App., p. 200 (1843): id. Voy. 
‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, p. 18 (1846). 


Stercorarius antarcticus, Gray, List Bb. Brit. Mus. Anseres, p. 167 (1844, 
Campbell Isl.) ; Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, ». 61 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. Trans, 
CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 109, pl. 7, figs. 1, 2 (1879, Royal Sound and 
Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen); McCormick, Voy. Discovery, I., p. 142, cum 
tab. (1844, Campbell Isl.); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., p. 63 (1888), 


Megalestris antaretica, Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 321,pl. I. (1826). 


No. 18. Campbell Island, Oct. 20th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen). 


This species is much darker than JZ. maccormichi, and has an 
extensive range over the islands of the Southern oceans, but does not 
extend to the Antarctic ice-pack. 


Aves. 173 


OrpER PELECANIFORMES. 


PHALACROCORAX, Briss. 
PHALACROCORAX CAMPBELLI. 


Urile campbelli, Filhol, Buli. Soc. Philom. (2), II., p. 132 (1878, Campbell Is!.). 


Phalacrocorax campbelli, Filhol, Mém. Pass. Venus 2 Vile Campbell, III., 
pt. HL., p. 55 (1885); Ogilvie Grant, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXVL., p. 387 (1898). 


No. 3, ? ad. Campbell Island, May 29th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) 
Nos. 5, 6, 6 ad. Campbell Island, June 10th, 1899. (Capt. 
Jensen.) 


N.B.—Mr. Howard Saunders speaks of Cormorants being found 
breeding on Deception Island, South Shetlands, and again on Cock- 
burn Island (‘ Antarctic Man., p. 234). Dr. Forbes identifies the 
last-named bird as Phalacrocorax atriceps of King [Bull. Liverp. 
Mus., II., p. 48]. 


174 Southern Cross. 


Vo ELS iis: 
By G. A. BOULENGER, F.RB.S. 
(Plates X1I.—X VIII.) 


LEAVING out a few Fishes obtained on the way to the Antarctic 
region and about New Zealand and Tasmania, as well as a number 
of others, the decomposed condition of which precluded any attempt 
at identification, the collection on which this report is based con- 
sisted of about 200 specimens, referable to sixteen species, eight of 
which are new, two belonging to undescribed genera. 


CHONDROPTERYGII. 
SPINACIDAE. 
1. EUPROTOMICRUS LABORDII, Q. et G. 


A single female specimen from Campbell Island, south of New 
Zealand. First discovered by Quoy and Gaimard near Mauritius, 
this very rare little Selachian has since been reported from the 
Antarctic Ocean, west of Cape Horn (R. O. Cunningham, Proc. 
Zool. Soc., 1899, p. 732). 


TELEOSTEL. 


SCOPELIDAE. 
2. SCOPELUS ANTARCTICUS, Gthr. 


A single specimen was obtained on an ice-floe in Robertson Bay. 


NOTOTHENIIDAE. 


Not long ago,' whilst examining the skeletons of the “Tra- 
chinoid” Fishes with a view to a more natural arrangement of this 


1 Ann. and Mag. N. H. (7) viii., 1901, p. 261. 


Pisces. 175 


artificial group, I came to the conclusion that a valuable character 
existed in the position of the fenestra at the base of the pectoral fin, 
situated either in the scapula or between the latter and the coracoid. 
Although I had myself pointed out the variable position of this 
fenestra within the limits of a natural family, the Mormyridae,* | 
felt justified in assigning to it the importance of a family character 
in the higher group Acanthopterygians, the more so as various 
authors? had even regarded it as worthy of defining Sub-orders or 
Orders. In this, however, I was mistaken ; and, after having reduced 
its importance to that of a family character, I must now abandon its 
use for anything higher than generic definition. 

This result is brought about by the study of the ‘Southern Cross’ 
collection. The genus Notothenia, the type of the family Notothe- 
niidae, is possessed of a pectoral arch similar to that of the Z’rach- 
inidae, Callionymidae, and Gadidae, i.e. with the scapular fenestra 
between the scapular and coracoid bones, as I have ascertained on the 
type species of the genus, NV. corticeps, Richards., as well as on all 
the other species represented in the British Museum. But now, on 
examining the condition of things in some of the new fishes dis- 
covered in Robertson Bay, which, so far as external characters are 
concerned, do not differ materially from Notothenia, I find, to my 
ereat surprise, that the fenestra is situated in the scapula, as in the 
Leptoscopidae. It is perfectly clear, therefore, that the value of the 
character in question has been over-rated, and its claim to anything 
higher than generic importance is out of the question. Even this 
might be contested by some systematists, but the facility with which 
the point may be ascertained, without injury to the specimen, by 
lifting up the skin and muscles at the base of the pectoral fin, 
should encourage the use of a character which is after all of import- 
ance and may still help in defining family groups other than the 
very generalised Nototheniidae. These differ from the Zrachinidae, 
Percophiidue, Parapercididae, Leptoscopidac, and Uranoscopidae in 
having a single nostril instead of the two possessed by most Teleosts. 
I have attempted, in the following synopsis, to enumerate and define 
the genera grouped under the Nototheniidae. The pectoral arch has 
not been examined in the genera marked with an asterisk ; otherwise 
all except Zrematomus conform to the type to which Notothenia 
belongs. 

The air-bladder is constantly absent, and every form examined 

1 Poiss. du Bassin du Congo, p. 50 (1901). 


2 Cope, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (2), xiv., 1871, p. 458. Gill, Proc. Acad. 
Philad., 1884, p. 170. Jordan and Evermann, Fish. N. Amer., iii., p. 2528 (1898). 


176 Southern Cross. 


by me, including Bathydraco, has pseudobranchiae. The ventral fins 
are never close together, as in the Zrachinidae and Uranoscopidae. 


I. Gill-membranes free or narrowly attached to the isthmus. 


A. Dorsal formed of two portions, which may be united at the base. 
1. Two lateral lines, the lower of which may be confined to the caudal 
region; palate toothless. 
a. Body covered with ctenoid scales; teeth in several series; snout 
not spatulate. 
a. Anterior dorsal formed of slender, flexible rays. 


Scapular foramen in scapular bone..............ssscetescsceeees Trematomus, &. 1. 
Scapular foramen between scapula and coracoid ............ Notothenia, Rich. 
8, Anterior dorsal formed of short, pun- 
Sent SPINES «ov ccecaenaeer seas wemesene Macronotothen, Gill.* 


b. Body covered with very small cycloid 
scales; teeth ina single series; snout 


NOG SPAtUlAte 5. cos -ncitsiseicorhiswenicaves Dissostichus, Smitt.* 
c. Body naked; snout spatulate. 
Lateral line with granulated plates ........ .....cescsceeceees Chaenichthys, Rich. 
uateralline without plateste.cehesnseccees rence aaeereraes Champsocephalus, Gill. 
2. Three lateral lines; body naked; snout spatu- 
late ; palate toothless ............ ivanasmers Cryodraco, Dollo.* 


5. A single lateral line. 
a. Body scaly. 
Teeth on vomer and palatines ; head armed...............008 Centropercis, Ogilby.* 
Teeth on vomer and palatines; opercle with a flat spine... Psewdaphritis, Casteln. 
Teeth on vomer only; a praeorbital spine............ceeeceees Acanthaphritis, Gthr. 
Palate toothlesss.<;0c.. 
Figs. 7, 8.—Clione antarctica. 
Figs. 9, 10.--Anatina elliptica. 
Fig. 11.—Pecten colbecki. 


214 Southern Cross. 


VIIL ECHINODERMA. 
By F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A. 
(Plates XX VI-X XVIII.) 


THE collection of Echinoderma is poor in species though compara- 
tively abundant in specimens. The condition in which they arrived 
can hardly be said to be satisfactory, and it is to be seriously 
considered by collectors whether they should continue to use formol 
for objects which contain a large quantity of carbonate of lime. It 
will be observed that the collecting stations were not numerous and 
that there are but slight differences in the depth or temperature of 
the water. 

The interest of the collection centres in the instructive series of 
variations of Cycethia simplex, and in the two well-marked new 
genera of Ophiuroids. 


a ANAC TEN O GO Nd Dae 
I HOLOTHURIOIDEA. 


1. CUCUMARIA CROCEA. 


Holothuria crocea, Lesson, Cent. Zool. (1832), p. 153, Pl. LIL. 


Cucumaria crocea, Wyv. Thomson, Journ. Linn. Soc. XIII. (1878), p. 55; 
Lampert, Seewalzen (1885), p. 149. 


Station.—Franklin Island, February 9th, 1900, 10-24 fathoms, 
29°8° Fahr. 

Distribution. Apparently cireumpolar, as it has already been 
reported from Kerguelen and the Falkland Islands. 


2. THYONE, sp. 


There is a five-banded species in the collection which will, I hope, 
be more fully represented in the collections of the ‘ Discovery.’ 


Eichinoderma. Dis 


3. HOLOTHURIA, sp. 


There is likewise a species of Holothuria, on which I propose to 
suspend my judgment. 


BAGO LNG OIG O8N DA ALE ae 


II ASTEROIDEA. 
4. ASTERIAS NEGLECTA. 
Asterias neglecta, Bell, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1881, pp. 94 and 506. 


The name I gave this species had reference to its past; it might 
well be regarded as prophesying its future. For twenty years the 
single specimen found by Dr. Cunningham in the Straits of Magellan 
has been unnoticed and without a companion; as a larger specimen 
comes from Franklin Island we are led to suppose that the distribu- 
tion of this southern species is circumpolar. 


5. ASTERIAS ANTARCTICA. 


Asteracanthion antarcticum, Liitken, Vidensk. Meddel., 1856, p. 105. 
Asterias antarctica, Perrier, Arch. Zool. Expe. LV. (1875), p. 315. 


This species does not appear to have been studied by any other 
naturalists than the two named above. I had begun a correspondence 
with the late Dr. Liitken regarding our lately acquired specimens, 
but the state of his health and his lamented death prevented my 
having the advantage of his judgment. As Litken’s specimens 
came from the Straits of Magellan, and the ‘ Southern Cross’ examples 
from Cape Adare (28 fathoms), it may be supposed that the distribu- 
tion of the species is circumpolar. 


6. CYCETHRA SIMPLEX. 


The following appears to be the synonymy of this species; to 
Professor Perrier belongs the credit of having been the first to 


216 Southern Cross. 


recognise its great variability, and his establishment of seven species 
after the appearance of Mr. Sladen’s ‘ Challenger’ report can only be 
regarded as a piece of Gallic gaiety. 


Cycethra simplex, Bell, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 96; Studer, Abh. Ak. Berl. (Anhang), 
(1884) [5], p. 41; Verrier, Miss. Cap. Horn. (1891), 
10s Ike, WAP 

electilis, Sladen, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Ast. (1889), p. 377. 


nitida 5 - - lob ee 
i pinguis = 3 5 pear 
, elongata, Perrier, Miss. Cap. Horn. (1891), p. K. 172. 
x media i % Pe p. K. 174. 
- asterindg ss 53 - Jos Ie IAG. 
zs subelectilis  ,, = a jos TKS Mteill. 
6 calva , - . p: K. 183: 
i regularis * 4 & p- K. 184. 
i. asteriscus ,, “4 es i 


Professor Perrier’s observations on the variability of this singular 
form, which it fell to my lot to describe, from a single specimen, 
twenty years ago, are fully borne out by the very interesting series 
before me. 

Distribution.—Apparently circumpolar. 

Stations—Cape Adare: 5:7 fathoms: Nov. 22nd, 1899 (28°9° F.). 

Cape Adare: 24 fathoms: Jan. 2nd, 1900 (29° F.). 

Cape Adare: 26-28 fathoms: Jan.-9th, 1900 (29: 2° F-). 

Cape Adare: April 6th, 1899. 

Franklin Island: 10 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). 

Frankhn Island: 10-24 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). 

Robertson Bay: 2 fathoms: Sept. 27th to Oct. 2nd, 1899. 


ODONTASTER MERIDIONALIS. 


Astrogonium meridionale, HE. A. Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. XVII. 
(1876), p. 109. 


Odontaster meridionalis, Bell, P. Z.8., 1¢98, p. 261, ibique citata; Leipoldt, 
Zeit. f. Wiss. Zool., lix. (1895), p. 620. 


A young specimen of this variable species was found washed up 
on shore at Cape Adare after a gale. I cannot think that Prof. Verrill 
(Trans. Connect. Acad. x. (1899), p. 202) has sufficiently weighed the 
variability of this starfish and its allies. 

Its distribution would appear to be circumpolar. 


Eichinoderma. iy 


III OPHIUROIDEA. 


A large number of specimens of two species were collected, both 
of which are representatives of new generic types, allied to Ophiura 
(Ophioglypha of Mr. Lyman), but distinguished by several striking 
characters. These new genera are perhaps the most valuable 
additions to our zoological knowledge made by the ‘Southern Cross’ 
Expedition. There are also two specimens of an Ophiactis, which 
recalls at once O. asperula, Phil., known from the southern parts of 
South America, but which is distinguished by the want of delicate 
spines at the edge of the disc; the condition of preservation of the 
collection does not justify one in coming to any conclusion as to the 
exact position of this form. There are moreover three specimens of 
a creature which appears to be allied to, if not a member of, the 
genus Ophiomusium, but this is a group which requires revision 
before any addition is made to it; it will be sufficient to put on 
record that an Ophiomusium-like Ophiurid has penetrated into 
Antarctic waters. 


7. OPHIOZONA INERMIS. 


An Ophiozona with two small tentacle-scales at base of arm and 
none further out. Three minute peg-like arm-spines. Radial 
shields inconspicuous and separated. Side arm-piates large and 
meeting below. 

Diameter of disc, 10 : 9: 12 mm. 

Length of arm (ca.), 25 : 25 : 28. 


This is a type not uncommon among Ophiurids, where there are 
many forms so distinct as to be called “species,” but exhibiting no 
morphological characters of any apparent interest or significance. 

Cape Adare, 26 fathoms, 28°5° Fahr. 


@PHIOSTHEIRA. 


This new genus is remarkable for the possession of a large 
keel-like plate on the disc, at the base of each arm, which completely 
overshadows the radial shields. The arms are compressed laterally, 
so that they are almost triangular in cross-section; the upper arm- 
plates are separated from one another by a slight groove, and stand 
up high so as to give both a serrated and a keeled appearance to the 


218 Southern Cross. 


arm; the arm-spines are numerous, but so small as to merge imper- 
ceptibly into the tentacle scales. Under arm-plates small, separated 
from one another by the side plates, which unite in the middle line. 
Like Ophioglypha it has “ the innermost pair of tentacle pores shaped 
like slits, surrounded by numerous tentacle scales, and opening 
diagonally into the mouth slits.” Mouth-papillae as in Ophioglypha 
(Ophiura). 

It is very likely that Ophiostewra is derived from Ophiuwra, but 
the keel-like plates on the disc, the serrated keel formed by the 
upper arm-plates, and the reduction in size of the arm-spines, are 
points by which this Antarctic form may be distinguished from any 
Ophiurid yet known to us. 


8. OPHIOSTEIRA ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XX VI. and XXVII_). 


With the exception of the large plates noted in the generic 
diagnosis nothing definite can be said as to the plates on the 
upper surface of the disc, for, as Plate XXVII. shows, the most 
extraordinary variations are to be seen. 

The colour of the specimens in spirit is more constant; the 
ereater part of the disc is dark grey, and the arms cream-yellow. 
The disc is high and arched; the arms taper gradually and carry 
about eight very short spines; the side arm-plates have a swollen 
appearance. 


Diam. of disc. Length of arms (¢a.). 
S mm. 20 mm. 
(( 2a) rave 19 mm. 
10 mm. 26 mm. 


Stations—Cape Adare: 26 fathoms: Noy. 4th, 5th and 10th, 
1399 (288° EF): 

Cape Adare : 20 fathoms : Jan. 6th, 1900 (20° F.). 

Cape Adare: 24 fathoms: Jan. 6th, 1900 (20° F.). 


OPHIONOTUS. 


A genus allied to Ophiwra (Ophioglypha), but distinguished by 
having a number of supernumerary arm-plates, no incision to the 
disc above, and no comb of spines at the base of the arms. 

These characters in combination appear to be sufficient to justify 
the formation of a new genus, and an opportunity such as this may 
be taken for pointing out that an exhaustive revision of the genus 
Ophiura would be a real service for students of brittle-stars. 


Etchinoderma. 219 


9. O. vicroriaz. (Pl. XXVIIZ). 


Dise large, rounded, smooth and shining above, with numerous 
small scales; the scales below slightly larger; the whole covered 
with a smooth skin. Arms broad at base and narrowing rapidly 
but not abruptly, quite delicate at tip; arm-spines moderately stout, 
pointed, generally three, with two tentacle-scales ; beyond the middle 
of the arm one scale. 


Diam. of D.sc. Length of arm. Breadth at base. 
30 mm, — 7mm. 
27 mm. 74 (ca.) mm. 6°5 mm. 
24 min, 70 (ca.) mm. 6 mm. 


Stations.— Cape Adare : 24 fathoms : Nov. 4th, 1899 (28°8° F.). 
Cape Adare: 26 fathoms : Nov. 14th, 1899 (28°8° F.). 

Cape Adare: 20-24 fathoms: Jan. 2nd, 1900 (29° F-). 

Cape Adare: 27 fathoms: Jan. 9th, 1900 (29:2° F.). 

Franklin Island: 10 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). 


IV. ECHINOIDEA. 


10. ECHINUS MARGARITACEUS. 


Echinus margaritaceus, Lamk. Anim. s. Vert. (1816), p. 47; A. Ag. Rev. Ech. 
(1872), p. 124, tbiyue citata ; id. op. cit., p. 493; id., ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Echin. 
(1881), p. 117. 


It is with some diffidence that I assign to this species (of which 
it is known that specimens exhibit marked variability) two examples 
from Franklin Island (29°8° Fahr., 10-24 fathoms), as they appear 
to want the large pedicellariae that are so characteristic of the 
creature ; the general condition of the collection, with other points 
for consideration, apparently justifies the course adopted. 

Distribution.—Appareutly circumpolar. 


11. HEMIASTER CAVERNOSUS. 


Tripylus cavernosus, Philippi, Arch. f. Nat., 1845, p. 345. 


Faorina antarctica, Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VII.(1851), p. 182; éd., Cat. 
Ree. Echin. B. M. i. (1855), p. 57. 


Hemiaster cavernosus, A. Ag. Rev. Ech. I. (1872), p. 1382; id., ‘ Challenger’ 
Rep. (1881), p. 177. 
This species has been so fully discussed by Professor Alex. 
Agassiz in his ‘ Challenger’ Report that it would be superfluous to 


220 Southern Cross. 


dilate on it here. It is of some interest to note that Gray’s 
specimens were collected by Ross in the “ South Polar Seas.” 

Distribution.— Circumpolar. 

Stations —Cape Adare : 20-24 fathoms : Jan. 2nd and 9th, 
POOO (295 Es): 

Cape Adare : 26 fathoms : Nov. 10th, 1899 (28° F.). 

Franklin Island : 20-24 fathoms : Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Prate X XVI. 
Ophiosteira antarctica. 


Fig. 1.—The animal, natural size, from above. 

Fig. 2.—The disc, from above, magnified four times, showing the large keel- 
shaped plate between the radial shields. 

Fig. 3—The same, showing an abnormal increase and diminution of the plates 
in two rays, x 4. 

Fig. 4.—The disc from below, magnified four times, showing the Ophiura-like 
arrangements of the oval skeleton. ' 

Fig. 5.—The disc from the side (interradial view), x 4. 

lig. 6.—An arm, near its base, from above, x 8. 

Fig. 7—An arm, from the side, showing the gap between the upper arm- 
plates, x 8. 

Fig. 8.—An arm, from below, showing the small under arm-plate, the large side 
arm-plates meeting in the middle line below, and the short arm-spines, x 8. 

Figs. 9, 10, 11—Views of the arm at some distance from the base, from above, 
from the side and from below, all x 8. 


Pirate XXVIII. 


Five photographs of the disc of Ophiosteira antarctica to show tlie extraordinary 
variations of the plates of the disc. 


PuaTE XXVIII. 
Ophionotus victoriae. 


Vig. 1—The creature from above, natural size. 

Fig. 2.—The disc, from below, x 2, showing the same Ophiura-like character of 
the mouth as Ophiosteira. 

Fig. 3.—An arm, near the base, from above, x 4, showing the way in which the 
side arm-plates encroach upon the upper arm-plates, and their mode of breaking up. 

Fig. 4.—The same, from below, x 4, showing the encroachment of the side arm- 
plates on the under arm-plates. 

Figs. 5, 6.—An arm near its end, from above and from below, x 4. 


221 


Le INS he Ex: 


APTERA. 


COLLEMBOLA. 


By GEORGE H. CARPENTER, B.Sc. Lonp., 
(Plate XLVII.) 


THE presence of at least one species of springtail on the Antarctic 
Continent is not the least interesting fact established through the 
voyage of the ‘ Southern Cross. ight specimens of an Isotoma were 
collected. on Geikie Land at the head of Robertson Bay (about 
71° 40'S. Lat., 169° 50’ E. Long.) in the month of November, 1899, 
by Dr. Klovstad, who found the insects among lichens when engaged 
in a botanical expedition.! Springtails are fairly numerous in the 
Arctic regions, as many as sixty-one species being recorded in the 
recent comprehensive summary of Schaffer.2 Among these the genus 
Tsotoma is predominant, sixteen of the sixty-one species belonging 
to it. It is of interest that the first discovered Antarctic springtail 
should prove to be an Isotoma, especially as the genus has been 
traced into the southern hemisphere only during the last few years. 

The insects were mounted as microscopic preparations in balsam 
shortly after their capture. Unfortunately, the delicate integument 
of springtails renders them very liable to shrivel in such a medium, 
and all the specimens are more or less distorted. But from the 
number of slides available, it has been possible to make out all the 
principal structural features of the insect. Isotoma is readily 


1 C¢. E. Borchgrevink, ‘First on the Antarctic Continent,’ London (1901), 
pp. 231-2. 

2 ©. Schiffer, ‘Die Arktischen und Sub-Arktischen Collembola,’ in Rémer and 
Schaudinn’s ‘ Fauna Arctica,’ Jena (1900), pp. 237-258. 


222 Southern Cross. 


distinguished from other genera of its family by the forwardly 
directed head, the close equality in length between the third and 
fourth abdominal segments, and the entire absence of scales. 

As might have been expected, the Geikie Land Isotoma does not 
seem to be referable to any described species, though, as will be 
seen, it closely approaches one from Tierra del Fuego. 


Faminry ENTOMOBRYIDAE. 


ISOTOMA KLOVSTADI. 
Plate XLVII., figs. 1-8. 


Antennae 1:6 times as long as the head, the second seement 
shghtly longer than the third, but markedly shorter than the fourth. 
Eight ocelli on each side; post-antennal organ elongate, about twice 
as long as an ocellus. Feet without tenent hairs; both upper and 
lower claws without teeth; third abdominal segment slightly longer 
than the fourth. Spring (apparently borne on the fifth abdominal 
segment) with very slender dentes, 2} times as long as the manu- 
brium; mucro narrow and elongate, with straight ventral edge, 
prominent apical and sub-apical teeth, and two less prominent 
dorsal teeth close together. 

Colour.—Dark blue-violet ; legs and spring yellowish-brown. 

Length.—2 mm. 

This springtail seems to be related to the common European and 
American /sotoma palustris (Miller); in that species, however, the 
feelers are relatively longer and the mucro much shorter and thicker 
than in this. 

No member of the genus Isotoma was known outside the 
Holarctic region until Lord Avebury in 1879 recorded an unde- 
terminable species from Kerguelen.1 Kecently, however, several 
species have been described by Schaffer from the southern regions of 
America, and it is one of his Fuegian Isotomae—ZJ. silvatica*—that of 
all hitherto known species seems the nearest to our insect from 
Geikie Land. The feet of Z. silvatica seem to agree almost exactly 
with those of /. Klovstadi. So do the antennal segments in their 
relative lengths. Only in the Antarctic insect the antennae as a 


' Sir J. Lubbock, ‘Collembola in “The Collections of Kerguelen Island,”’ Phil. 
Trans., CLX VIII. (1879), p. 249. 

* C. Schiffer, ‘Hamburger Magalhaensische Sammelreise: Apterygoten,’ Hamburg 
(1897), p. 18, figs. 84-7. 


[nsecta. 223 


whole are relatively longer than in 7. silvatica, while in the latter 
species the third and fourth abdominal segments are equal to one 
another, and the mucro is comparatively short and stout. It could, 
however, be readily derived from the mucro of J. Klovstadi, as the 
general arrangement of the teeth is identical in the two species. 
The post-antennal organ in J. si/vatica is more rotund than in 
our insect. 

Several of the specimens were so mounted as to exhibit portions 
of the jaws. It seemed advisable, therefore, to figure the parts 
visible—the labium (Fig. 3) and the extremity of a maxilla and its 
palp (Fig. 2). The maxillary palp in this species is prolonged into 
a thin leaf-like process bearing four bristles, while the fifth bristle 
is borne on a very prominent papilla. 

Our knowledge of the distribution of these insects is as yet too 
incomplete to elucidate any details of ancient geography. But the 
existence of a species of this order of wingless insects in Geikie Land 
—a species belonging to a genus widely spread in the northern 
hemisphere— cannot but support the theory of a former extension of 
the Antarctic Continent. And the further fact that the species is 
closely related to a Fuegian insect is consistent with the view that 
there may have been a southern route of migration between eastern 
and western lands. 


EXPLANATION OF FIGURES. 
Prats XLVI. 


Fig. 1.—Isotoma Klovstadi. Dorsal view, x 18. 

Fig. 2.—Left maxilla (ventral aspect), showing head and extremity of palp, x 850. 
Fig. 3.—Labium (ventral aspect), x 350. 

Fig, 4.—Ocelli and post-antennal organ of right side, x 200. 

Fig. 5.—Fore-foot, x 350. 

Fig. 6.—Hind-foot, x 350. 

Figs. 7, 8.—Mucro drawn from two specimens to show variation, x 350. 


224 Southern Cross. 


Pia G Ore 


HEMIPTERA PARASITICA. 


PEDICULID A. 


By THE Hon. N. C. RoTHSCHILD, B.A. 


ECHINOPTHIRIUS SETOSUS. 
Pediculus setosus, Lucas, Magazin de Zool., IV., p. 121, f. 12. 


Thirteen specimens of this species were secured by the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ Expedition from the Antarctic Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx) on 
October 6th, 1899 (cf. Borchgrevink, ‘ First on Antarctic Continent,’ | 
p. 184). 

This species is known to be a parasite of the common seal 
(Phoca vitulina). I have, however, failed to find any distinguishing 
characters between the thirteen specimens from the South Polar 
Seas and examples from the better known host. 

Piaget’ characterizes the genus Echinopthirius as possessing four- 
jointed antenne, pointing out, moreover, that by this character 
Echinopthirius may be readily distinguished from Hamatopinus. 

I am inclined to consider Piaget to be mistaken in this respect, 
as the first two joints of the antenne are, under a low power, some- 
what difficult to distinguish. Lucas, moreover, in his description of 
Pediculus setosus, mentioned the five-jointed antenne. 


' Les Pédiculines, Vol. I., p. 656, 


225 


Nee oe ty ae Eley PA. 


ACARINA.' 


Par LE Dr. BE. L. TROUESSART, 


Président de la Société Zooloyique de France, Membre Correspondant de la 
Zoological Society of London. 


PENTHALEUS BELLI. 


Ew ovale allongé avec les flancs sub-paralléles, le sillon thoracique 
formant en dessus et sur les flanes une saillie transversale bien 
marquée au niveau du premier tiers du corps. Abdomen arrondi en 
arriere. Couleur (sur la préparation dans le baume) d’un brun 
verdatre, avec les pattes plus claives (tres probablement rouges sur 
le vivant). 

Rostre bien découvert, & palpes robustes, présentant la forme 
typique du genre: le 1 article tres court, le 2° allongé, renflé a 
Vextrémité, le 3° plus court que le 2°, le 4° un peu plus long, aminci 
a’ son extrémité et terminé par des poils tactiles assez courts et 
plumeux. Chéliceres de la forme normale dans ce genre. 

Tronc ovale. Face dorsale tronquée an avant par Vouverture du 
camérostome, qui est assez resserrée, en forme de cou, et dépourvue de 
dilatation en forme de collerette évasée, ’épistome coupé carrément 
ou méme un peu échaneré en avant, ne recouvrant que la base du 
rostre; cette face dorsale est nettement séparée par le sillon 
thoracique en région thoracique et région notogastrique, arrondie en 
arriere mais légerement échancrée de chaque coté de la protubérance 
anale. (Je n’ai pu voir les yeux.) Face ventrale fortement échancrée 
en avant par louverture du camérostome; les épimeres formant 
deux groupes, lantérieur (épimeéres 1 et 2) en forme de plaque 
sternale, les hanches de la 1 paire fortement dilatées et saillantes 

Q 


226 Southern Cross. 


de chaque coté du rostre, deux fois plus larges que le 1 article des 
pattes; celles de la 2° paire pas plus larges que le 1° article. 
Kpimeres postérieurs (3 et 4) largement séparés sur la ligne médiane 
et placés vers le milieu de la longueur totale du corps. De chaque 
cdté, en dehors des hanches, il existe une ligne longitudinale saillante, 
partant des cotés du camérostome, ot elle est un peu dentelée, et se 
terminant a l’extrémité de labdomen par une petite bosse, de telle 
sorte que cette extrémité présente, de chaque cété de la protubérance 
anale, une échancrure plus marquée qu’a la face dorsale. En dedans 
des épiméres on voit une seconde ligne longitudinale, partant de la 
plaque sternale pour aller rejoindre la face interne de la petite bosse 
latérale. Plaque génitale (? ) grande et large, sub-quadrangulaire, a 
angles fortement arrondis, l’ouverture en forme de fente longitudinale. 
Anus infere, a cadre petit, elliptique, situé en dessous de la 
protubérance qui termine l’abdomen. Une paire de poils plumeux a 
Vextrémité de ’abdomen. 

Paties gréles, de 5 articles (par soudure du 3° au 2°), sensiblement 
de la longueur du corps et décroissant de taille dans Vordre suivant: 
1,4, 3,2. La 1° paire a premier article court, conique; le 2° trés 
long, étranglé a sa base, la soudure du 3° bien visible vers les # de 
la longueur totale; le 4° moitié plus court; le 5° un peu plus court 
que le précédent ; le 6° un peu plus long, terminé par une double 
eriffe assez faible et un petit pulvillum en brosse. L’extrémité du 
tarse est brusquement atténuée et un peu échancrée en dessus, 
permettant aux griffes de se relever verticalement. La 2° paire plus 
courte, a 2° article presque moitié plus court que celui de la premiere 
paire, la soudure du 3° placée vers les 2 de V’article. Les deux paires 
postérieures semblables, mais la 4° paire presqu’aussi longue que la 
premiere. Des poils plumeux assez courts au tarse; d’autres poils 
plus longs et tres gréles assez rares sur les autres articles. Le 
tronc en est presqu’entierement dépourvu, sauf a lextrémité de 
Vabdomen. 

Longueur totale 0°62 mm.; largeur 0°35 mm, 

Tous les exemplaires examinés sont femelles et renferment 3-4 
ceufs gros et d’un jaune orangé avec une petite tache rouge. 

Habitat—Sur les Mousses du Cap Adare (Terre Victoria). 
Lespece est dédiée a Mr. Francis Jeffrey Bell, Emeritus Professor in 
King’s College, London. 

Remarques, rapports et différences—La soudure du 3° article 
des pattes au 2° est la régle dans ce groupe: je l’ai constatée 
sur les genres Penthaleus, Halotydeus, Notophallus et Norneria 
( =Scyphius). 


A rvachnida. 227 


Penthaleus Belli, est une espece parfaitement typique, que j’al 
comparée ici & P. ovatus, Koch (Berlese, “ Acari, Myriopod. Scorp, 
Ital.,” fase. 60, no. 2); elle en differe par son trone plus allongé, a 
flancs sub-paralléles. Elle differe d’une autre espece antarctique 
(qui sera décrite dans la Partie Zoologique de PExpédition Antarctique 
Belge), par absence d’une large collerette, rabattue sur le rostre, qui 
caractérise cette derniére espece (Penthaleus villosus, Trt.), par le 
dernier article des palpes plus allongé, et par absence d’une fine 
pubescence qui couvre tout le trone sur lespece du détroit de 
Gerlache. 


228 Southern Cross. 


x1 CRs ak Clie 


By I. V. HODGSON. 
(Plates XXIX-XL.) 


For the opportunity of examining the collection of Crustacea 
brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition, I am indebted to 
Professor F. J. Bell, and I am much more indebted to him for his 
kind assistance and advice during the progress of the examination. 
The collection came to me in about sixty bottles, for the most part 
of two-ounce capacity. The state of preservation of the specimens is 
a matter which calls for some comment; as a rule, far too many 
specimens were crammed into one bottle, the result being that they 
arrived at the Museum in a more or less macerated condition ; some 
were very bad. 
A summary of the results may be expressed as follows :— 


Decapoda . . .  . 6 genera, 6 species, including 1 new species 
Schizopoda” 3. on Ly | Ah; 99 EN 
Isopoda i any On es 3» LOL5 Fe 
Pycnogonida . ae 29 aes: 
Cumacea . he BI 

Copepoda 2 yn oe 


With regard to the Amphipoda, I sincerely regret that my duties 
have prevented me from seriously dealing with this group. 

A preliminary examination has been made, and the species 
roughly sorted out; from this I should assume that there are 
upwards of thirty-five species in the collection, and that at least 
twenty-five will prove to be new. This group then, as might have 
been expected, is the most important of the Arthropod phylum.? 

The Cumacea was represented by a single mutilated specimen 
from Cape Adare, and Iam unable to assign even its generic rank. 
Two genera of Copepoda were found in a bottle containing an 
assortment of specimens, but they were so macerated as to be useless 
for identification. They represented two genera of Calanids. It is 


* I am glad to say that Mr. A. O. Walker has kindly undertaken to examine 
it.—F. J. B. 


Crustacea. 229 


noteworthy that no Decapods were found within the Antarctic circle 
or anywhere near it, and further that no new genera were discovered ; 
most of the species belong to well-known genera, and on the whole 
show a close relationship to northern forms. 

I am also indebted to the Rev. T. Stebbing, F.R.S., for assistance 
with regard to the Isopoda, and more particularly to Mrs. L. E. Sexton 
for the drawings, which have been made with extreme care under 
very disadvantageous conditions. 


CRUSTACEA THORACOSTRACA. 


1. DECAPODA. 


Famiry PORTUNIDAE. 
NECTOCARCINUS ANTARCTICUS. 


Portunus antarcticus, Jacquinot and Lucas, Voyage au Pole Sud (Hombron 
and Jacquinot), vol. iii. (1853), Crustacea, p. 51. 


Nectocarcinus antarcticus, A. Milne Edwards (21, p. 407.) 


This species was one of the discoveries of Dumont d’Urville on 
his celebrated voyage to southerp regions. It was also obtained by 
Ross (16). The large genus Portunus was broken up into numerous 
genera by Milne Edwards in 1861 (21), and that author ascribes as 
the distinctive features of the genus Nectocarcinus the presence of 
only four anterolateral teeth on the carapace, and the sub-lanceolate 
character of the dactylus of the last pair of thoracic appendages. 
In the paper cited above, Milne Edwards assigns three species to 
this genus, and figures two of them, but not this species. Milne 
Edwards does not refer to the dactylus of the last thoracic appendage 
of this species, which is broadly ovate and typically “ portunid,” 
and is so figured by Mr. Miers in the ‘ Zoology of the “ Hrebus” and 
“ Terror,’ and shown by the specimen in the National collection. 

The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens are two in number, an adult male 
and a young one, and were taken at the Auckland Islands in ten 
fathoms. 

Distribution—Known only from New Zealand and Auckland 
Islands, 


230 Southern Cross. 


FAMILY PERICERIDAE. 
PRIONORHYNCHUS EDWARDSI. 


Prionorhynchus Edwardsii, Jacquinot and Lucas, Voyage au Pole Sud, 

Zoology, vol. iii. (1853), Crustacea, p. 8; Rathbun (25, p. 243). 

A single specimen of this species was taken at the Auckland 
Islands on Dumont d’Urville’s voyage to the South Pole, and upon 
this the genus was established. The genus is characterised by the 
depressed lamellate and emarginate rostrum. In describing the species, 
MM. Jaecquinot and Lucas allude to a second specimen, a female, in the 
possession of the British Museum, and it would appear that their figure 
was drawn from this specimen. The figure in question is admittedly 
defective; the tubercles on the carapace are much too prominent, 
while the rounded elevations with which they are associated are not 
indicated, neither is the granular nature of the appendages shown. 

Two specimens, ¢ and @?, occur in the National collection, but 
nothing is stated as to the locality from which they were obtained. 
The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens, three in number, were taken at the 
Campbell Islands in 1898, and are all much larger than the 
specimens alluded to above. The carapace and the greater part of 
the appendages are concealed by a dense incrustation of Polyzoa, 
and in addition to this, on the two smaller specimens, there is an 
interesting growth of a stout foliaceous green alga. These growths 
very largely conceal many details of structure, but there can be no 
doubt as to the identity of the species. The granular character of 
the limbs, which has been made a specific character, is practically 
absent, but enough remains on the female specimen to show that 
this feature is doubtless dependent on age. Another point to which 
it is desirable to call attention is the abdomen of the ?. In the 
specimen in the National collection the abdomen is narrow, and 
scarcely covers more than half of the sternal area, whereas in the 
‘Southern Oross’ specimen the abdomen is much broader, and entirely 
occupies the sternal area. This latter specimen bears ova, the 
condition of which indicates they were not far from hatching. 

1 g. Size of carapace, 160 x 135 mm. 

2 6. Size of carapace, 133 x 114mm. Two legs and a cheliped 
missing. 

3 2. Size of carapace, 114 x 102mm. _ Both chelipeds missing. 
Bearing ova. 

Istribution.—This species is only known from the Campbell 
and Auckland Islands. 


Crustacea. 225 


FAMILY MAIIDAE. 
PARAMITHRAX PERONI. 


Paramithrax Peronii, Milne Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crustacés, vol. i., p. 324; 
Jacquinot and Lucas (15, p. 10); Miers (17, p. 5); Haswell (9, p. 13). 


Two small ovigerous females of this species were obtained in 
Adventure Bay, Tasmania. As with numerous members of the 
Maioid Crustacea, these specimens are covered with alge, sponges, 
&c. A few dried specimens, showing considerable variation in size, 
occur in the National collection, and from the available information 
it appears clear that this crab is not uncommon in the shallow 
waters of the South Australian region. 

Distribution.—“ Indian Ocean” (20), “ Australia” (17), “New 
Zealand ” (15). 


FAMILY PINNOTHERIDA. 
HALICARCINUS PLANATUS. 


Cancer planatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. ii. (1793), p. 446. 
Halicarcinus planatus, White, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. xviii. (1846), p. 178. 


Hymenosoma planatum, Haswell, Cat. Austral. Crust. (1882), p. 114, ibique 
citata. 


This is a very abundant and widely distributed species in the 
Southern Hemisphere. It is subject to a considerable amount of 
variation, but this after all is confined to comparatively narrow 
limits. These variations and the immense area over which this 
species is distributed has led to the existence of a number of 
synonyms. The ‘Southern Cross’ specimens are three in number, 
males, and quite small, being barely a quarter of an inch across 
the carapace, and were obtained at Auckland Islands in ten 
fathoms. 

The habitat of this species seems to vary from between tidemarks, 
rock-pools to a depth of 150 fathoms, and a bottom of sand, mud or 
00ze. 

The National collection contains a large number of specimens 
from various localities, showing a circumpolar distribution. 


222 Southern Cross. 


FamMity GALATHBEIDAE. 


MUNIDA SUBRUGOSA. 


Munida subrugosa, Miers, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, Crustacea (1874), 
p- 8; Henderson (10, p. 124); Milne Edwards (22, p. F 36). 


This is one of the widely distributed species of the Southern 
Hemisphere and is very closely allied to its congener M. rugosa of 
the northern region. A. Milne Edwards (22) points out that it is 
subject to a not inconsiderable amount of variation, and Professor 
Henderson, relying on the distribution of spines on the dorsum of the 
carapace, names a particular variety australiensis. Mr. Miers invari- 
ably maintained that IZ. gregaria, which is found in company with 
this species in the Falkland region, is only the young of MZ. swbru- 
gosa. General opinion does not, however, favour this view, though 
it is generally admitted that the only reliable points of distinction 
are to be found in the maxillipeds, The specimens brought home 
by the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition were numerous and were obtained 
at the Auckland and the Campbell Islands. None of them, however, 
show the distinctive features of Professor Henderson’s australiensis, 
although it is true that the characteristic row of four spines is 
usually present. These should be sub-equal, but they are not, for 
the outer ones are extremely minute and not readily seen. Spines 
on or near the cervical groove may or may not be present and are 
usually minute. The absence of spines is more noticeable in the 
Auckland Island specimens, but as these are much smaller it is only 
to be expected. 

Fifty-one specimens, 6, @, and young, Auckland Islands. 
Ten fathoms. 

Thirteen specimens, ¢, Campbell Islands. 

Distribution.— Circumpolar. 


Famiry HIPPOLYTIDAE. 


In dealing with the Crustacea Macrura of the ‘Challenger’ 
Expedition Spence Bate (1) sub-divided this family into some ten 
genera, but these do not appear to be generally accepted. At any 
rate, a number of new species belonging to the family have been 
described since the appearance of that report, and in many cases 
(Milne Edwards, 22) without either reference to Spence Bate’s 
classification, or the essential features upon which it is based. This 


Crustacea. 222 


can only cause confusion, and having no desire to add to it I have 
accepted Spence Bate’s classification in its abbreviated form as 
quoted by Mr. Stebbing in his “ Crustacea ” (30). This summary 
admirably answers all practical purposes and serves to discriminate 
fairly readily between a large and increasing number of species. 

The genus Merhippolyte of Spence Bate had two species assigned 
to it by its author and, for the reason alluded to above, I have not 
been able to ascertain whether any further additions have been made. 


MERHIPPOLYTE AUSTRALIS. 
(Pll EX.) 


Carapace rather short, the posterior two-thirds straight, the 
anterior third produced into a prominent rostrum, the two together 
bearing seven or eight prominent teeth. The rostrum is deep and 
bears two or three teeth on the under margin. The carapace bears a 
stout spine at the outer margin of the orbit and another exists at the 
lower angle. Posteriorly the carapace is curved backwards. Pleon 
smooth, epimera large, those of the first three segments rounded and 
the second much the largest, the remainder are pointed posteriorly, 
the last being small and spinous. Telson moderately long, narrow, 
five spines at the extremity, two pairs of spines and a few setae on 
the dorsal surface. 

First antenna. A stout three-jointed peduncle, of which the basal 
joint is longer than the other two and bears a very large spine, 
reaching to the extremity of the following joint. Of the two 
multiarticulate flagella, the inner one is long and somewhat tapering, 
the outer one is exceedingly stout for nearly two-thirds of its length 
and then suddenly becomes quite slender. 

Second antenna. The basal joint bears a stout spine externally 
at the articulation of the exopoditic squame. The second joint of the 
two-jointed peduncle of the flagellum is long and the two basal 
joints of the flagellum are larger than the remainder. The flagellum 
is comparatively long. The squame is spinose at its exterior 
termination and bears a close fringe of long setae; the broadest part 
of the squame is rather less than one-third of its length. A row of 
red pigment spots (in spirit specimen) occurs along the margin of 
the muscles of the organ. 

Eye large, pyriform, cornea hemispherical with ocellus con- 
tiguous. 

Mandible is stout, with a broad cutting edge bearing five blunt 


234 Southeri Cross. 


teeth. The molar process is a somewhat oval pad surrounded by a 
close fringe of stout papillae. The palp is well developed and 
consists of a three jointed appendage, the joints being nearly uniform 
in length but differing considerably in breadth from the basal one. 

First maxilla. The coxa is somewhat crescentic in shape, the 
horn directed forwards and thickly covered with long spinose setae ; 
the basis is large, irregularly oval, and its inner margin very thickly 
covered with stout setae; the endopodite is a curved, tapering joint, 
its truncate end being indented and the inner lobe bearing two long 
setae. 

Second maxilla consists of a small rounded setose coxa, and a 
large bilobed basis, the distal lobe being much the largest, both 
are setose. The endopodite is a comparatively long, slender process 
armed at the extremity with two slender spines. The scaphognathite 
is large and its entire margin is setose, excepting the innermost 
posterior portion. It is truncate in front and fairly broad, curved 
and narrow behind. 

First maxillipede is lamellar, the coxa is comparatively small 
and somewhat rounded, the basis is half as large again, the inner 
margin being slightly incurved and the distal margin rounded, both 
coxa and basis are very setose. The endopodite is a two-jointed 
setose appendage with a terminal claw. The exopodite is a thin 
lamellar appendage provided with long setae, and from its inner 
margin arises a multiarticulate flagellum which bears long plumose 
setae at its extremity. 

Second maxillipede is a large lamellar appendage. The propodos 
is almost the largest joint, and somewhat pyriform in shape; it is 
reflexed on the remainder of the limb. ‘The dactylus is a narrow 
band-like joint which runs along the apparent posterior half of the 
propos. Both are richly setose. The exopodite is a large multi- 
articulate flagellum, setose, more particularly at its extremity; at 
the base is a fan-like appendage of numerous segments. 

Third maxillipede. The first joint is small, the next is very long 
and stout, with small tufts of setae throughout its entire length, and 
these not confined to any part of the margin. The two following 
joints are not so long as the latter, and the longer terminal one 
appears to be broken ; if so, the wound is an old one, and the tip is 
much discoloured. These two joints bear horizontal rows of setae 
throughout their length. 

The thoracic appendages vary in size; the first two are chelate, 
the former being very stout and with small tufts of setae throughout 
its length; these are specially noticeable at the extremity of the 


Crustacea, 235 


propodos and dactylus. The chela of the second appendage is similar 
but smaller, and the entire limb is much more delicate and, by a 
good deal, the longest of the series. The carpus is divided into 
fourteen more or less distinct joints, and of these the most distal is 
as long as any other two. Of the remaining appendages, the next or 
third is the longest. It is stoutly built, and the carpus and meros 
respectively, bear one and two distal spines. The inner margin of 
the propodos and dactylus bear smaller spines along their entire 
length, and the latter terminates in two claws. The fourth and 
fifth are similar, but the propos in the latter bears a conspicuous 
tuft of setae at the distal extremity. 

In the specimen most closely examined it was found that the 
second and fourth appendages were obviously replacements due to 
injury, as they were very much less than normal size. 

The pleopods consist of a stout peduncle and a lanceolate exo- 
and endopodite, the pair forming the caudal fan being large and 
ovoid. The exopodite is scarcely as long as the endopodite, but is 
obscurely divided near the extremity ; this division is marked by 
the presence of a stout spine on the outer border. Another stout 
spine exists at the proximal end, but this belongs to the peduncle. 

The telson is long and gently tapering, rounded at the extremity, 
which bears five spines among the setae. The middle one of these is 
small, the adjacent pair are very long and the outer of moderate 
size. The dorsal surface bears two pair of lateral spines and a few 
stout setae near its Junction wrth the body. 

This species is a very close ally of Hippolyte magellanicus of 
Milne Edwards (22, p. F. 46), but the specific descriptions afforded 
by that work are by no means satisfactory. Four specimens of this 
species were taken at Auckland Island in ten fathoms. The speci- 
mens varied in size from thirty-eight to twelve millimetres, 
measured from rostrum to telson. The species also appears subject to 
some variation as regards the rostrum; the specimen examined had 
§ teeth, two of the others %, and in one of these a lower tooth was 
very small, and the fourth specimen had 3 teeth. 


a 
5 
= 


A large member of the Palaemonidae was taken from the stomach 
of a seal on Duke of York Island, but it is in such a mangled 
condition that no satisfactory description can be made. 


236 Southern Cross. 


2. SCHIZOPODA. 


Professor Sars, in his ‘ Challenger’ Report (27) on this group, gives 
a synopsis of all the species of Huphausia known at the date of 
publication of that report. Mr. Stebbing (31), in describing a new 
species from the Falkland Islands, adds the more recently discovered 
species to the synopsis of Professor Sars. The latter author gives a 
brief critical summary of the characters usually made use of in 
determining the species. In spite of deficient information on many 
points, I have decided to describe the two following species as new ; 
concerning one, Z. glacialis, there can be no doubt, but with regard to 
the other, #. australis, there may be some question as to whether or 
no it is not identical, the differences noted being due to age. The 
locality is the same, the date of capture does not vary by a fortnight 
(12 days). Size is the most conspicuous difference, and at present it 
is very much open to question whether the proportions of the joints 
of the appendages are trustworthy characters. 


EUPHAUSIA GLACIALIS. 
(PL XOEKe) 


Body about twenty-five millimetres long, from rostrum to telson. 
The anterior part of the carapace is keeled and produced into a 
short and broad rostrum, of which the base occupies the entire width 
of the carapace. 

The ventral margin of the carapace bears a small spine anteriorly 
and a larger one laterally about the middle of its length. The 
hinder margin is produced backwards to form a pair of lateral 
rounded wings. The pleon segments are very nearly equal. 

Telson comparatively long and slender, lateral appendages large 
with a slight outwardly directed curve. Uropods approximately two- 
thirds the length of the telson. yes large, pyriform, the cornea 
very large, and a luminous organ in close connection with it 
externally. 

First antenna. The first joint of the peduncle is at least twice 
the length of the second, and at its distal extremity it bears a 
membranous lappet on one side and a spine on the other. The 
second joint also bears a small lappet, and the third carries two sub- 
equal multiarticulate flagella ; the outer flagellum has a swollen base 
and this bears a few sensory setae, 


Crustacea. 227, 


Second antenna. Basal joint of peduncle large and bearing a 
long slender spine externally at the base of the antennal squame. 
The spine bears a row of forwardly directed teeth on its inner 
margin, The squame is of moderate size, outer margin straight, 
terminating in a small tooth, distal margin somewhat rounded, only 
very slightly projecting beyond the tooth and like the inner margin 
setose ; setae long. The multiarticulate flagellum is of moderate 
length and supported on a three-jointed peduncle, the proximal joint 
is small and the following one the longest, the three together being 
about three-quarters the length of the squame. 

Mandible. Cutting edge irregularly dentate, the two jaws being 
dissimilar. The molar process is large and its extremity covered 
with closely set ridges. The palp is very long, three jointed. The 
basal joint is short, the middle one is the largest, but only by a little, 
and sparingly setose. The terminal joint is more slender, and near 
the distal extremity bears a few stout setae, the terminal ones being 
long and pectinate. 

First maxilla normal; the free margin of the coxa is rounded 
and bears spinose setae, those which are proximally situated being 
the longest ; the inner margin of the basis is truncate and beset with 
short spines. The palp is ovoid and carries a few stout setae. The 
epignath is very large and thin, ovoid and without setae. 

Second maxilla. The coxa and basis are both bilobed; in the 
former case the lower lobe is the largest, and in the latter the distal 
lobe is nearly twice the size pf the other. The lower coxal lobe is 
rounded, the other lobes merely having their angles more or less 
rounded off. The inner margin of both segments of the two joints 
are closely beset with stout setae, most of which are spinose, and 
they occur on the surface of the appendage, some distance from its 
edge. The palp is ovoid, and a little longer than the basis; it bears 
comparatively long setae on its inner edge. The epignath is narrow, 
about as long as coxa and basis together, and is sparingly setose. 

Maxillipede. The dactylus is about half the length of the propos, 
and the carpus has the same proportion to the meros. The ischium 
is the longest joint, twice the length of the meros, and slightly 
exceeds the exopodite in length. Its inner margin is provided 
rather sparingly with comparatively short setae and long plumose 
setae throughout its entire length. The exopodite consists of a 
basal portion, which terminates on the outside in an obtuse point, 
and a terminal natatory portion setose only on the outer margin. 
The proportions of the first maxillipede practically hold good for 
the two following appendages, the ischium, however, increasing in 


238 Southern Cross. 


size to the penultimate limb. In the thoracic appendages, strictly 
so-called, these proportions fail. In the last three limbs the carpus 
shortens, and the meros is not only longer in proportion, but of equal 
size in the three limbs. 

The pleopods are subequal in size and of uniform structure, with, 
of course, the exception of the last. The coxa is very short, its 
distal margin being very sinuous; the basis is comparatively long 
and stout. The exopodite is the largest, lanceolote, with long 
plumose setae on the distal one-third of the outer and two-thirds 
of the inner margin. The endopodite is smaller, its distal portion 
being more equally setose on both sides, and the inner margin bears 
a long finger-like process about the middle of its length. 

The uropods are large, the basipodite is broad, and bears on its 
rounded outer margin a row of plumose setae. The exopodite 
reaches to the origin of the telsonic appendages, and very closely 
resembles the antennal squame in structure. The endopodite is 
about the same length, tapering, and has long plumose setae on 
both sides. 

The telson is proportionately broad at the base ; about one quarter 
of its length it tapers somewhat rapidly for a short distance, and then 
very gradually. Between the distal half and the origin of the lateral 
appendages are three teeth on either side. Beyond the third spine, 
which is the largest, the telson tapers quickly, and then terminates 
in a lanceolate manner. The appendages are a pair of large, some- 
what outwardly curved blades. 

Some twenty to thirty specimens of this species were taken 
between the ice-floes on January 135, 1899, in lat. 65°52° long. 
162°32° E. Temperature 31° Fahr. 


EUPHAUSIA AUSTRALIS. 


Body about forty-five millimetres in length from rostrum to 
telson, and very stoutly built. 

In general anatomical details this species so closely resembles 
the last that I was disposed to regard glacialis as the young of this 
form. Close examination proves that the two forms seem distinct, 
and it is only necessary here to call attention to the points of difference. 

The carapace is precisely similar, save that the rostrum is 
narrower; its base does not occupy the entire width of the carapace. 

First antenna. Occurs both as singular and plural. The lappet 
at the distal extremity of the first joint is bi-lobed, and that at the 
end of the second extends to half the length of the third joint. 


Crustacea. 239 


Mandible. Second joint of palp a little stouter, and sparingly 
setose. 

First maxilla. Very similar. 

Second maxilla. Palp somewhat more conical. 

Maxillipede. Proportions of the joints differ slightly, and may 
be represented as follows: dactylus, 4; propodos, 5; carpus, 6, and 
meros, 11. The two following maxillipedes do not differ con- 
spicuously from this, but in the two first thoracic limbs proper the 
dactylus is rather less than half the length of the propodos and the 
carpus is more than half the length of the meros. In the last 
limb the proportions are, dactylus, 4°55; propos, 4°5; carpus, 3; 
meros, 19°5. 

The telson is much more slender, but otherwise precisely similar. 

A score or so of individuals of this species were taken between 
the ice floes in lat. 62° 8. on the 1st of January, 1899, the temperature 
not recorded. They were in a terribly bad state of preservation. 


3. CUMACEA. 


A single specimen of this group was taken off Cape Adare, but it 
is in a mutilated condition. 


CRUSTACEA ARTHROSTRACA. 


Le ESO EO DAC. 
TANAIDAE. 


Like many others, this family stands much in need of revision. 
Fifteen genera, containing something like sixty species, have been 
described, and many of these are only known from single specimens. 
(Dollfus, 8.) The species are separated by very minute characters, 
and very little is known concerning their life histories and the extent 
to which sexual dimorphism occurs. Mr. Beddard has described in 
the ‘ Challenger’ Reports (2) a species under the name of Paratanais 
dimorphus, but this species does not seem to belong to any of 


240 Southern Cross. 


the genera defined by Professor G. O. Sars in his “ Crustacea 
of Norway” (29). The species described below is obviously a close 
relation of Mr. Beddard’s P. dimorphus, and, considering the present 
state of our knowledge, I have preferred to place this ‘ Southern 
Cross’ species with his rather than constitute a new genus, merely 
notifying the fact that Professor Sars’ (29) and Mr. Beddard’s (2) 
genus Paratanais are not in accord. But for the structure of the 
uropods I should have placed this and Mr. Beddard’s species in Sars’ 
genus LHeterotanats. 


PARATANAIS ANTARCTICA. 
(Pl. XXXI.) 


Cephalon very large, pyriform, eyes distinct at the base of the 
antennae. Thoracic segments very slightly tapering, the first one is 
the broadest, and less rounded laterally than the others. The fourth 
and fifth are sub-equal in length. The abdomen continues uniformly 
the slight taper of the thorax, and the first segment is longer than the 
following five, but the last is longest as well as narrowest, and is 
ovoid in shape, with a terminal setose projection in the middle line. 
The uropods are conspicuous, and comprise a short and stout peduncle, 
with two-jointed exo- and endopodites, the former being the largest. 

First antenna. Peduncle two-jointed, the first joint being two 
and a half times as long as the second, The flagellum is three- 
jointed; the first joint is very small, with two setae; the second also 
carries two setae distally, and is twice as long as the rounded terminal 
joint, which carries four long setae. | 

In the female it is triarticulate. 

Second antenna. Peduncle three-jointed. The joints are stout, 
and not very large; the first is shortest and the second longest, the 
third carries a slender spine distally. The flagellum is three-jointed. 
The first joint is about as long as the peduncle, but much more 
slender, and somewhat curved. The second joint is about half the 
length, and both bear distally one or two setae. The terminal joint, 
which carries four setae, is minute. 

Mandible. Cutting edge incurved, with fine serrations on the 
frontal margin. Molar tubercle well developed. 

Maxillipede five-jointed. The dactylus small, digitiform, with 
four long setae, propodos longer and much stouter, inner margin 
expanded about the middle of the joint, bearing four long setae. 
Carpus with three long setae near the inner distal extremity, and 
the meros expanded externally round the carpus. 


Crustacea. 241 


Thoracic appendages. The first of these in the male reaches an 
extraordinary development. The dactylus is very long and slender, 
much curved near its extremity. The propodos is more than half as 
long, stout, and has articulated to it a piece which is curved through 
aright angle. This piece bears a tooth at the extremity on the outer 
margin, and a rounded projection or tubercle on the inner. The 
carpus is distinctly shorter than the propodos, and is broad, somewhat 
irregular proximally. The meros is very large and irregular, besides 
being considerably and irregularly expanded distally. It bears a 
large lateral wing externally near the proximal end. 

The remainder do not present any striking features. The three 
anterior pairs are a little longer and more delicate than the 
posterior three. These latter have one or two truncated spines 
at the termination of some of the joints. 

Pleopoda. A rounded basipodite, with ovoid exo- and endopodites 
arising some little distance apart. The exopodite is smallest, and 
both have long setae on the inner margin. 

Uropoda. The two-jointed exopodite equals in length the first 
joint of the endopodite. The former terminates in two long setae, the 
latter possesses four. 

Owing to an accident with the preparations further anatomical 
details cannot be given. 

Size about 4 mm. 

Eight specimens, four ¢§ four 2, were taken off Cape Adare, in 
20 to 24 fathoms, from the roots of seaweed. Temperature 29° Fahr. 


GNATHIA. 


Of this interesting genus a very large number of species, some- 
thing like twenty-five, are known, nearly all of them coming from 
European waters. For our knowledge of these species we are mainly 
indebted to the works of M. Hesse (11 and 12) and Professor G. O. 
Sars (29). Mr. Beddard has described four species from the ‘Challenger’ 
collections, and, with the exception of the species described below 
and another from New Zealand, these are all that are known from 
extra-European seas. 


GNATHIA POLARIS. 
(Pl. XXXIL) 

Specific character. Pointed cephalon, more pronounced in male. 
Scythe-like character of the mandibles in male, and the markings on 
the two penultimate segments of the thorax. 

R 


242 Southern Cross. 


Description of Male. 


Body of nearly uniform diameter. The cephalon is broad, roughly 
quadrangular, the postero-lateral margins being somewhat rounded. 
The frontal margin bears a broad triangular rostrum in the middle 
line; it then becomes straight for a short distance on each side the 
rostrum, and then incurved, to terminate witha stout pre-ocular spine. 
Eyes small. The anterior portion of the thorax is separated from the 
posterior by a conspicuous constriction. Of the three posterior seg- 
ments, the first is marked in the middle line with an ill-defined rect- 
angular patch, the second bears a median longitudinal groove, and the 
third is very strongly curved. The abdomen comprises the normal 
number of segments, and terminates in an elongate triangular telson. 

Antennae. The first antenna consists of a three-jointed peduncle, 
the last jot being longer than the other two together, and a four- 
jointed flagellum. The second has a four-jointed peduncle, the two 
last being large and sub-equal, and the two proximal ones being 
much shorter. The flagellum is six-jointed. 

Mandible. The mandibles are scythe-like in general appearance, 
the amount of curvature at the free end being variable. The inner 
margin is somewhat sinuous, and the outer drops abruptly a little 
short of its middle. 

Maxillipede. This consists of a roughly triangular plate attached 
by its broad base; the inner margin is straight, the anterior slightly 
sinuous, and the outer is very oblique. The masticatory lobe is a 
clavate process bearing two stout knobbed setae, which interlock 
with those from the opposite side. The palp consists of four 
rounded segments, tapering from the first, and each bearing some 
half-dozen long setae on its outer margin. 

Gnathopod. This consists of two segments, the first being a large 
pyriform plate, the more rounded inner margin bearing long plumose 
setae. The terminal segment is very small, oval, and bears a few 
long plumose setae towards the extremity, and a few small setae on 
the inner margin. 

Pereiopoda. Sub-similar, sub-equal. They present no very 
obvious peculiarities, save that the inner margin has a number 
of button-like tubercles distributed along it. 


Description of Female. 


The fully developed female possesses an enormously swollen 
body. The cephalon is comparatively small, obtusely pointed in 


Crustacea. 243 


front. Two thoracic segments are readily distinguishable, and the 
other three can at times be made out. 

Both pairs of antennae, the pereiopoda and the abdomen closely 
resemble those of the adult male. 

In the younger individuals and larvae the cephalon is narrower, 
and bears very large eyes upon lateral tubercles. The mouth organs, 
which are at these stages of the normal number, are produced into 
a more or less conical structure in front of the head. 

A fairly large number of specimens of this species were taken at 
various times off Cape Adare, most of them coming from a depth of 
twenty fathoms or thereabouts. In one case the tube was labelled : 
“90-24 fathoms. From the roots of seaweed.” But all presented the 
appearance of living in a similar habitat. They were dirty, and 
as a general rule more or less covered with some growth, which con- 
cealed some structural features and gave them a velvety appearance. 
The specimens include well-developed males and females, as well as 
larvae. 


SPHAEROMIDAE. 


Considering the great confusion that exists among the numerous 
members of this family, it is with some hesitation that I put forward 
two new species. The difficult problem is to assign to these species 
the genus which might meet with general approval. Authors do not 
appear to be agreed on the subject of generic distinctions, and on 
that account I may have added to the existing confusion. Notwith- 
standing the obvious differences in form I have placed both species 
in the genus Cymodocea (Leach). The anatomical details do not 
appear to me to warrant their separation. 


CYMODOCEA ANTARCTICA. 


(Pl. XXXIIL, fig. 2.) 


Body ovoid, about twice as long as broad. Pleon terminating in 
a triangular shield with the extremity excavated. It is of a greenish 
colour, more or less irregularly splashed with a warm brown. 

Cephalon comparatively small and having a somewhat truncated 
anterior margin with a small rounded projection between the 
antennae. Eyes small, at the postero-lateral angle, which is produced 
on to the succeeding segment. 

Thorax. The first segment arches outwards, and is half as broad 
again as the cephalon. It is as long as the two succeeding segments, 

R 2 


244 Southern Cross. 


and, 12 common with all, bears distinct epimera. These are very 
well developed and prolonged backwards in the three posterior 
segments. 

Abdomen. Four apparent segments are visible, the second of 
them bearing distinct epimera. The terminal segment is triangular, 
its extremity being excavated. The uropods arise a short distance 
from its anterior margin but do not reach the opposite extremity ; 
they are lanceolate in shape. 

First antenna. <A stout peduncle, of which the second joint is 
about half the size of the first; this is followed by a larger joint 
which from its character might belong to the flagellum. The 
flagellum consists of nine additional joints. 

Second antenna. A four-jointed peduncle, of which the joints 
progressively increase in size, followed by a flagellum of about eight 
joints. 

Mandible strong, cutting edge very prominent, armed with blunt 
tubercles and a tuft of strong setae close underneath. Molar 
expansion well developed. Palp large, of three diminishing joints, 
the middle one laterally expanded, and the two terminal ones setose, 
the setae of the middle joint being of peculiar structure. 

First maxilla. Two parallel plates, the outer one the stoutest 
and provided with five prominent spines at the extremity, the inner 
one with three plumose setae, the inner margin of both bears a few 
slender setae. 

Second maxilla. Inner lobe comparatively broad and somewhat 
pointed, with setae on inner margin and stouter plumose ones at the 
extremity, the proximal two of this series being larger than the rest. 
Outer lobe and palp armed at the extremity with a few serrated 
spines, those of the palp are the longest. 

Maxillipede. The masticatory lobe is produced into a large plate, 
the free terminal margin is irregular and setose, the five terminal 
joints form a palp, three of them bear a finger-like process on the 
inner margin, so that with the terminal joint they occupy approxi- 
mately the same level despite the natural curvature of the organ; 
these processes are all setose. 

Thoracic appendages. The first three slightly increase in size, 
but the remainder are sub-equal. The first has the last joints short 
and stout, it terminates in a claw with one, or two, very small 
accessories. Of the following three, the meros is expanded, the 
carpus and propos setose. The three posterior limbs are similar and 
directed backwards. 

Uropods lanceolate, smooth, endopodite the largest. 


Crustacea. 245 


Three specimens were taken off the Auckland Islands in ten 
fathoms of water. 

No conspicuous difference is exhibited by any of these specimens 
beyond the presence or absence of the two dark spots on the first 
thoracic segment. This may be, and probably is, a very variable 
feature. 


CYMODOCEA AUSTRALIS. 
(Pl. XXXIIL, fig. 3, and Pl. XXXIV., fig. 3.) 


The body is twice as long as broad and covered, though not very 
closely, with short and fine setae. 

Cephalon is rounded in front, longer than any of the thoracic 
segments. Eyes moderately large, and that region of the cephalon is 
produced slightly backwards on to the first thoracic segment. 

The first segment of the thorax is the length of the two following, 
and they all gradually shorten slightly and progressively to the 
posterior. The pleon is marked in rather a complex manner. The 
first segment bears a thumb-like elevation directed forwards and 
outwards which lies between the mid-dorsal line and the lateral 
margin. The two following segments are incompletely separated 
and together form a very broad V-shaped structure on the pleon; the 
extremity of the arms of the V just extend to the margin of the body 
and are bi-lobed, the posterior lobe being the shorter. The base 
of the V is a free backwardly-directed spine. The last pleon 
segment has the postero-lateral margins curved boldly towards 
the middle line, the extremity is broadly notched, and the notch 
is almost completely filled with a rounded lobe. <A short way 
in front of this in the middle line is a rounded tubercle. The 
uropods are very conspicuous and project beyond the extremity of 
the body. The inner branch is much the largest and les parallel 
to the postero-lateral margin of the pleon. It forms an oblong 
structure, roughly rectangular. The outer branch forms a truncated 
cone. 

First antenna. Peduncle two-jointed, the first being long and 
stout, widest distally. Second joimt small, partly sunk in the 
extremity of the first, expanded laterally into a somewhat triangular 
form. Flagellum ten-jointed, first joint longer than the two 
succeeding, fourth joint conspicuously larger than the second or third 
and the remainder becoming reduced in size. 

Second antenna. Peduncle three-jointed, the third as long as the 
other two, Flagellum nine-jointed. 


246 Southern Cross. 


Mandible. Cutting edge forms a stout blunt tooth, molar 
expansion small. Palp three-jointed, first joint fairly stout, the 
second rather more than half the size, setose laterally and distally, 
the distal setae being long. The last joint is about the same size, 
but more slender, and setose along its entire length on one side. 

First maxilla. Outer lobe a slightly curved blade, armed at the 
extremity with some half dozen or more teeth. Inner lobe straight, 
slender, and tapering, the extremity provided with two long curved 
setae. 

Second maxilla. Inner lobe comparatively broad, rounded at the 
extremity, where it is armed with stout setae. Two, near the inner 
extremity, are conspicuously different, have subsidiary setae on 
one (?) side. The outer lobe and palp bear long spinous setae; they 
are all sub-equal in length. 

Maxillipede. Masticatory lobe long and narrow, slightly curved 
outwards distally. The extremity forms a blunt point, and there are 
two or three small teeth a short distance from it; behind these again 
is a small tuft of setae. Palp of five joints, of which the middle 
three possess a digitiform lateral process, setose at the extremity. 
The terminal joint is finger-like, and also setose distally. 

Thoracic appendages. In these there is nothing specially striking. 
In the first, the basal joint is nearly half the length of the entire 
limb, the remaining joints are short and stout, the meros being 
laterally expanded outwards, and the inner margin of the meros, 
carpus, and propodos bear about a dozen long spines and numerous 
very fine ones, which latter also occur on the dactylus. This 
last joint bears a stout claw, a small accessory, and two strong 
setae. 

In the following appendage the joints, except the basal, are much 
longer, and the inner margin is provided with a series of small spines 
with an occasional large one. 

The others are sub-similar, but longer. 

Pleopods. Endopodite obovate, with long plumose setae on its 
inner and distal margin. Exopodite triangular, outer margin straight, 
and till near the extremity with fine setae, near the extremity and on 
the inner margin these become long and plumose. 

Seven specimens were taken by the dredge off Cape Adare in 
eight fathoms. Temperature, 30° Fahr., January 17, 1900. Only 
one of these, the specimen figured, has the abdomen so ornate; in 
the others the spine is absent, and the terminal notch is not so 
conspicuous. 


Crustacea. 247 


ARCTURUS. 


This genus received a large number of additions from the 
‘Challenger’ collections (2); and, later, Mr. Benedict (8) added 
six species to the genus, and gave a synopsis of the whole. 
Another species has since been described by Miss Richardson (26), 
and the three described below make a total of twenty-six species. 
Two other species, described by Haswell, from New Zealand in 1882 
(9), have not been noticed by the authors cited. 


ARCTURUS POLARIS. 
(Ely SMV sion? and Pl, XXX.) 


Specific character. Spines dorso-lateral. Pleon with two promi- 
nent terminal spines, a large lateral spine on each of the three 
distinguishable segments, the remainder somewhat irregularly covered 
with short spines, two of which, about the middle of the lateral 
margin, are more prominent than the rest. 

The largest specimens secured by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition 
measure, exclusive of antennae or spines, some 37 mm. in length, 
but the average size is about 5 mm., or thereabouts, smaller. 

The second antennae are a little shorter than the body. 

The mid-dorsal area is smooth; but dorso-laterally there are 
spines which are more profninent in the anterior thoracic region, and 
less numerous than elsewhere. 

Cephalon. Anterior margin incurved. A prominent spine pro- 
jects outwards, and somewhat forwards, to protect the eye, which is 
large. There is a small spine in front of this organ. 

The third thoracic segment is the largest, the hinder ones tapering 
gradually to the pleon. Laterally each segment bears numerous 
spines of varying size. The spines are most conspicuous on the three 
anterior segments, and each of these has a large spine more dorsally 
situated than elsewhere. 

Pleon nearly as long as the posterior five thoracic segments. 

The first three segments are distinguishable, and bear short spines 
both dorsally and laterally. A lateral spine is especially prominent 
on the third segment, and the remainder of the pleon is covered with 
small spines of approximately uniform size ; but two of them, about 
the middle of the lateral margin, are more prominent than the rest. 
The mid dorsal line is devoid of spines. The extremity is rounded, 
and bears two very large and somewhat divergent terminal spines. 


248 Southern Cross. 


First antenna consists of four joints, the first three of which 
equal the two proximal joints of the second antenna. The first 
three joints slightly decrease in length from the first, but the 
proximal one is very broad and irregularly rounded. The last is 
longer than the two preceding, and is setose along the distal two- 
thirds of one margin. The setae are stout, tapering, and are borne 
on a short, slender peduncle. 

Second antenna not quite as long as the body and comprises a 
long peduncle of five joints and a short multiarticulate flagellum. 
Of the five joints of the peduncle, the two basal are small; the 
others progressively increase in size, the last one being approximately 
as long as the two preceding. The second joint has two spines on 
the outer margin and the third carries two to four; in either case 
the distal spine is the largest. The fourth joint also bears a distal 
spine and, with the preceding, it is setose on the inner margin. 

Mandible short and stout. The cutting edge bears some half- 
dozen teeth and a tuft of strong setae below them. The molar 
process is strongly developed, and there is no palp. 

First maxilla. Outer lobe comparatively long and narrow, slightly 
curved. Armed at the extremity with about nine comparatively 
long spines. The inner lobe is smaller and more slender, provided 
with three long plumose setae. The inner margin of both lobes is 
setose. 

Second maxilla. Base is broad, the inner lobe is somewhat 
rounded, the outer lobe is digitiform, and the palp is similar but 
broader. All are setose, more particularly the inner lobe, on which 
three distinct varieties of setae can be distinguished. A tuft of small, 
simple setae below the inner and distal curve; two or three stout 
plumose setae come next, and following these distally are the com- 
paratively stout setae, which are more or less plumose. 

Maxillipede. Masticatory lobe quadrangular, with rounded 
angles; anterior margin with stout setae. Palp, the five joints, 
comparatively short but broad and lamellar, the inner margin 
richly provided with long setae. The epignath is large, subconical, 
truncate at extremity. 

Thoracic appendages. The first is short and stout, richly setose 
on the inner margin and on the outer margin of the propos and 
dactylus. The setae are spinose in places (carpus). The dactylus 
bears three claws, the middle one being conspicuously the most 
slender, and is folded in a sub-chelate manner. The three following 
appendages are sub-similar. With the exception of the two terminal 
joints all bear distally a prominent spine on the outer margin; the 


Crustacea. 249 


basal joint bears one or two additional ones. Except this joint, all 
possess long setae on the inner margin. 

The three posterior limbs are of the walking type and also sub- 
similar. The basis, ischium, and meros are spinose on the outer 
margin, and, particularly the first of these limbs, the meros_ to 
propos inclusive bear numerous small spines on the inner margin. 

Pleopods. The first pair are coarse and spinose and form a case 
protecting the remainder. These consist of a stout basis, spinose on 
inner side and setose on the other. The exo- and endopodites are 
large, somewhat widening distally, and having their margins richly 
clothed with plumose setae. 

A large number of individuals were taken off Cape Adare during 
November and December in from twenty to twenty-six fathoms. In 
most cases the females had eggs or young in the brood pouch. One 
fine specimen had no less than sixty young in its pouch. 

A small specimen was taken in 6 fathoms off Duke of York 
Island and at a temperature of 28°75° Fahr. 


ARCTURUS ADAREANUS.' 
(Pi XR ig. 4) 


Specific character. Body not spinose but minutely tuberculated. 
Pleon segment uniformly covered with very small blunt spines and 
terminating with two moderately long and parallel spines. 

This species is smaller and more slender than the last. The 
spines, properly so-called, are confined to a pair on the cephalon, the 
anterior thoracic segments, and the pleon. Spines are replaced by 
small tubercles, which, however, take a spinous character in the 
hinder part of the body. 

Cephalon. Anterior margin incurved: a pair of prominent blunt 
spines arise between and somewhat in front of the large eyes. 
Behind these is another pair of very much smaller spines. 

Thorax. The fourth segment is the largest and all are covered 
with a number of small, closely-set tubercles: a pair of spines are 
situated dorsally on the first segment. 

Pleon about as large as the four posterior thoracic segments. 
The first three segments are distinct: these and the terminal shield 
are covered with small spines. The extremity of this shield is 
rounded and bears two prominent but blunt spines. 

The anatomical details bear a very close resemblance to the last 


1 Name altered, after author had sailed for the Antarctic.—F. J. B. 


250 Southern Cross. 


species, and it will be amply sufficient for all practical purposes to 
point out the differences. 

First antenna. The terminal joint is shorter than the two 
preceding together. 

Second antenna. ‘The first joint is very small and the second 
about twice the size, with four small blunt spines. The third joint 
is long and bears three or four blunt spines and a few long setae on 
the opposite side. The fourth joint bears one or two small spines, 
and setae are disposed along the inner margin at fairly regular 
intervals. These also occur on the fifth joint, which is the longest. 

The mandibles, maxillae, and maxillipedes very closely resemble 
those of A. polaris. The epignath of the maxillipede is narrower 
distally, and thus becomes more conical. 

Thoracic appendages. The first almost exactly resembles that of 
A. polaris. The three following are also similar, but practically 
devoid of spines ; the spines of A. polaris are represented by very 
inconspicuous tubercles. The last three limbs bear one or two blunt 
spines on the coxa and basis only and the ischium to the propodos 
bear a row of small curved spines along the inner margin. 

Pleopods. The first pair are large and stout, forming a pro- 
tecting shield to the remainder. Those which serve the branchial 
function are less clavate than in A. polaris, and the basipodite bears 
seven slender teeth as against five stouter ones. 

Five specimens of this species were taken among large numbers 
of A. polaris off Cape Adare. 


ARCTURUS FRANKLINI. 


Specific character. A stout spine near the antero-lateral margin 
of the cephalon, and six long slender spines on the second and third 
thoracic segments. 

Cephalon of normal contour, with two stout spines between the 
eyes, and directed slightly forwards, and a stout pair near the antero- 
lateral angle. 

Thorax, first three segments with six long slender spines, two 
dorsal, two dorso-lateral, and two epimeral. These spines are best 
developed on the second and third segments, where they are particu- 
larly prominent ; posterior segments of the thorax with numerous 
small spines, for the most part situated laterally. 

Pleon, first three segments with a row of rather small spines 
across the dorsum, and the last of the three having a very stout 
lateral spine. The terminal segment bears numerous small spines 


Crustacea. 251 


throughout its length laterally, and a few inconspicuous ones are 
scattered dorsally ; two above the average size are situated dorsally 
about the middle of its length. The extremity is rounded, and bears 
two divergent and prominent terminal spines. 

First antenna, normal structure, reaches to about two-thirds the 
length of the third joint of the second antenna. Setae on terminal 
joint few. 

Second antenna. The two basal joints each with stout spine, 
the third joint with three stout spines, proximal shortest, distal 
largest, fourth joint with two spines proximally situated, and the 
fifth joint is slightly the longest. Flagellum missing. 

Thoracic appendages. The three pairs of setose limbs bear a 
stout spine on the ischium and meros; the basis has several of 
varying length. The three posterior, which are essentially ambula- 
tory in character, have a few blunt spines on the basal joints. The 
meros, carpus, and propodos bear a few slender forwardly-curved 
spines on the inner margin. 

The opercular shield of the pleon is covered with short spines. 

A single specimen of this species was taken off Franklin Island 
in 10-24 fathoms of water, and a temperature of 29°8° Fahr. It is a 
female, and its body is largely concealed by a vigorous growth of 
Spirorbis and other tubicolous worms, as well as diatoms of large size." 
Exclusive of antennae, the animal measures some 15 mm. in length. 

Three other specimens were taken at this locality ; they are of 
smaller size, but I am not as yet disposed to make a new species for 
them. With the exception of the two frontal spines, the two 
terminal spines of the pleon, which are only stumps, and a few very 
small spines on the lateral margin of the pleon, the bodies are quite 
smooth; they are, in spirit, light-coloured, and covered with minute 
brown spots. The second antennae of two of the specimens is per- 
fectly smooth, but in the third, and largest, there are obvious traces 
of developing spines. This would indicate that these specimens are 
not yet mature, and to give them a specific rank does not seem to 
me to be desirable. 


NOTASELLUS AUSTRALIS. 
(Pl. XXXVI.) 


Specific character. Uropoda longer than pleon, which is 
approximately as broad as long, and terminates in a rounded 
projection. 

1 Mr. V. H. Blackman informs me that the diatom belongs to the genus 
Triceratium. 


Bee Southern Cross. 


Body oval, about two and a half times as long as broad, with 
very large uropoda, covered with small dark coloured spots, which, 
however, leave small light coloured vacant spaces here and there. 

Cephalon, the normal size for the genus. It bears a large 
prominent median rostrum, the base of which curves outwards to 
form a stouter if less prominent tooth at the antero-lateral angle. 
The eyes are large and borne on lateral processes of the cephalon, 
which is somewhat constricted posteriorly. 

Thorax. The segments are all short, the fourth is the broadest 
and straight, the three anterior ones having a more or less con- 
spicuous forward curve. The lateral margin of these four segments 
is toothed anteriorly and posteriorly, the intermediate portion being 
bi-lobed. The three posterior segments are curved backwards, 
particularly the last one, their lateral margins are rounded but still 
bi-lobed. 

Pleon, lateral margin rounded, posterior truncated, but with a 
stout rounded projection in the middle line. 

First antenna. Peduncle three-jointed; the first is very stout, 
the other two are more slender, the third being more so. They 
are sub-equal in length, the flagellum is multiarticulate and reaches 
about two-thirds the length of the penultimate joint of the peduncle 
of the second antenna. 

Second antenna. Peduncle six-jointed; the first four are short 
and stout, the third, which is the largest of the four, carries externally 
a small digitiform scale setose at the distal extremity. 

Of the two large terminal joints, the more distal one is slightly 
the longest, both are sparingly setose, as long again as the proximal 
four joints. They are followed by a long multiarticulate flagellum. 

Mandible. Cutting edge, with a prominent bi-lobed tooth and 
below a fringe of stout setae. A deep incision between this and the 
molar expansion. Palp long and slender, second joint twice as long 
as the tirst terminal joint, curved and with setae on the inner 
margin and at the extremity. 

First maxilla. Terminal spines of the outer lobe toothed, a series 
of weaker spines some little distance from the extremity. 

Second maxilla. Inner lobe slightly enlarged at its extremity 
and rounded, the terminal portion densely clothed with rather long 
setae. The outer lobe and palp are both slender and curved 
backwards, the former terminates in three, and the latter in two, 
long setae. 

Maxillipede. Inner margin of masticatory lobe quite straight, 
distal and outer margins slightly rounded, the former bearing a 


Crustacea. 253 


fringe of spinous setae. The palp has the proximal joints stout, the 
meros and carpus being laterally expanded, the propodos and dactylus 
are quite slender. The dactylus, the extremity of the propodos and 
the inner margins of the carpus and meros all bear comparatively 
long setae. The epignath is large and ovoid in shape, but the 
external margin is angular. 

Thoracic appendages. The seven pairs are long, sub-equal and 
much alike. They present no striking features; the meros is 
expanded distally and bears a tuft of stout setae at its extremity, the 
carpus and propodos are sub-equal in length, the latter bearing a 
triunguiculate claw. 

The uropods are large and considerably longer than the pleon ; 
the basal joint is distally expanded and almost bi-lobed ; the podites 
are a long oval in shape, the exopods being much the smallest. The 
entire organ bears tufts of setae at regular intervals. 

Three specimens of this species were taken off Cape Adare in 
13 fathoms with a temperature of 28°9° Fahr., and three or four more 
were found on the beach after a gale. 

Dr. Pfeffer (24) has described a species from South Georgia 
which is undoubtedly very closely allied to the ‘Southern Cross’ 
species. He considered himself justified in creating a new genus 
Notasellus for its reception, though it very closely resembles certain 
northern species of the widely distributed genus Janira. 


HALIACRIS AUSTRALIS. 
(Pl. XXXIV., fig. 1, and PAL, OO MAL) 


Specific character. Pleon ovoid, notched at the insertion of the 
uropods. 

Size. Exclusive of antennae, about 4 mm. 

Cephalon. Wide, truncate in front, with deep recess for the 
origin of the antennae. The lateral margin of this recess forms a 
stout outwardly curved tooth. Eyes large, situated on a lateral 
projection of the hinder part of the cephalon, Part of the mouth 
organs project in front of cephalon and can be seen from the dorsal 
surface. 

Thorax. The first four segments do not conspicuously differ in 
size, although the first is the smallest. The epimera of the first three 
segments are pointed and of the fourth truncate. The three posterior 
segments become reduced in size and more curved in a backward 
direction in passing to the hinder extremity. 


254 Southern Cross. 


Pleon. Two segments are visible in the curve of the last thoracic, 
the terminal one is ovoid with the small uropods placed laterally 
some little distance from the extremity. 

First antenna. Small, reaching about one-third the length of 
the fourth joint of the second antenna. Second joint of peduncle 
longest. 

Second antenna. Very long, half as long again as the body. 
Peduncle five-jointed, the three proximal ones being short and stout, 
the two distal ones being long and slender, sub-equal in size. The 
flagellum is multiarticulate, not so long as the two distal joints of 
the flagellum. 

Mandible. Cutting edge consists of a long slender three-lobed 
tooth and a group of stout setae. Molar expansion well developed 
and somewhat widely separated from the cutting edge. Palp three- 
jointed, rather stout, first and third joint sub-equal, third the 
longest. 

First maxilla. Normal. 

Second maxilla. Inner lobe truncate, with two long setae, 
among others, on the inner margin, outer lobe and palp with very 
long, stout terminal setae. 

Maxillipede. Masticatory lobe with inner margin straight and 
four small spines just above the middle. Extremity truncate and 
outer margin rounded. Palp of five joints, of which the distal two 
are proportionately slender, the next two are much expanded. The 
epignath is large curved, truncate posteriorly, less so anteriorly. 

Thoracic limbs. The first is comparatively short and stout, sub- 
chelate, meros and carpus expanded ; propodos ovoid, dactylus about 
half its length and slender. The second pair of appendages were 
missing, the remainder are long, slender, and increase in length to 
the last, they are alike in structure. 

Uropods. Small, simple. 

Three specimens were taken off Cape Adare in 20 to 26 fathoms. 
Temperature 28°9° Fahr. 

This is another species closely allied to a form described by 
Dr. Pfeffer (24) for which he established the genus Haliacris. 


ECHINOZONE. 


This genus is one of four into which Professor Sars has divided 
his genus Jlyarachna (29). Five species belong to the original genus, 
but one of them is doubtful; the other genera each contain a single 
species. All but one are European or Arctic forms. 


Crustacea, 255 


ECHINOZONE SPINOSA. 
(Pls. XXXVIII. and XXXIX.) 


Specific character. Four prominent spines on each of the four 
anterior thoracic segments, two on the cephalon; smaller spines on 
the epimera and on the posterior thoracic segments. 

Body ovoid, truncate in front but pointed behind, divided into 
two by a deep constriction between the fourth and fifth thoracic 
segments. Body arched and epimera well developed, both spinose. 

Cephalon arched in front, with two prominent spines situated 
laterally ; the epimera are large and angular, with a small spine at 
the antero-lateral angle and another about the middle of the plate. 

Thorax. First segment narrow with the epimera poorly deve- 
loped ; the four large spines are confined to the body portion. The 
three succeeding segments are similar, but the hinder margin of the 
epimera are more rounded, passing backwards. Each segment has 
the four prominent spines and a small one at the antero-lateral angle 
of the epimera, the first two segments having an additional one 
just behind this. The three posterior segments and the pleon taper 
uniformly to a blunt point. The thoracic segments bear a spine on 
either side the middle line, but on the last segment they are mere 
rudiments. Of the first of these three segments there are four small 
spines along the anterior margin. 

First antenna. Peduncle two-jointed. First joint large and 
stout, with long seta on the margin and a spine at the distal 
extremity. Second joint is very small proportionately, and bears 
the multiarticulate flagellum. 

Second antenna. Five joints are visible from the dorsal surface. 
The first of these bears a stout spine externally, the two distal joints 
are very long, particularly the last one; both are setose. The multi- 
articulate flagellum is about half the length of the entire organ. 

Mandible. Anterior margin rounded to the cutting edge, which 
is represented by a large blunt tooth; a tuft of small setae lies close 
below it, and the molar process is a long slender appendage setose at 
its extremity. 

First maxilla. Outer lobe comparatively broad, curved. The 
oblique terminal margin with a series of stout spines, of which 
the two most distally situated are the longest. 

Second maxilla. Inner lobe broad, somewhat curved backwards. 
One very long seta at the terminal angles. Outer lobe and palp 
normal but stout. 


256 Southern Cross. 


Maxillipede. Inner margin of masticatory lobe straight, distal 
and outer margins rounded. Distal part setose, the lateral and outer 
setae being comparatively long and slender, those near the inner 
angle being stout and spinose. Palp of the normal number of 
joints, the meros enormously broad. The carpus bears a large 
ploughshare-like expansion on its inner margin; the edge of this, 
and to some extent the sides, bear stout setae. The propodos and 
dactylus are normal, and both bear setae distally. 

The epignath is large, roughly semicircular. 

Thoracic appendages. The first is missing. The three following 
are more distinctly ambulatory, and increase in size passing poste- 
riorly. They are slender, and the first is almost devoid of setae; the 
second is provided with lone setae throughout its length, and has 
the basis, ischium and meros somewhat swollen. The third is 
attenuated, and is poorly provided with small setae, except at 
the extremity of the various joints. The ischium, however, bears 
numerous delicate spines. 

The three posterior appendages present a different appearance, 
and are sub-equal in length. In the first the basis, ischium and 
carpus are much swollen; in the second the carpus only is thus 
modified; both limbs are provided with long setae. The joints 
of the last appendage do not present any striking feature. 

The uropods are minute, and are concealed from the dorsal aspect 
by a slight projection of the pleon. 

Two specimens of this species were obtained off Cape Adare, in 
26 fathoms. Temperature 28°8° Fahr. 


COPEPODA. 


Two genera of Calanids were taken with Huphausia glacialis in 
lat 65° 52 S., long. 162° 32 E., between the ice floes; temperature, 
31° F. They were in a terribly bad state of preservation, much 
macerated and unfit for description. 


PYCNOGONIDA. 


Of the large number of specimens obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross’ 
Expedition, all may be referred to a single species, and that, as might 
be expected from the locality, a new one. 


Crustacea. 257 


YY 


The genus Vymphon isa large one, and a list of twenty-five reliable 
and eleven doubtful species is given by Dr. Hoek (13) in the 
‘Challenger’ Report referring to this class. 

Prof. Sars, in 1891 (28), while adding a few species, divides the 
genus into three—Nymphon, Chatonymphon, and Boreonymphon. 


NYMPHON AUSTRALE. 
(El Xai) 


Body rebust, with lateral processes of a large size; these are 
setose, though the body is apparently smooth. Neck short and 
constricted. Head segment two and a half times as long as the 
following one. Ocular peduncle long, but very variable, sometimes 
rounded at the extremity, sometimes obtusely pointed, and occa- 
sionally much reduced in size. Lenses apparently rudimentary ; 
sometimes four may be detected, but more commonly only two; a 
very large proportion of the specimens, however, only show an 
irrecular mass of pigment, the quantity and its precise position 
being very variable. Proboscis cylindrical, directed downwards. 

Mandibles. Scape longer than proboscis, becoming stouter at its 
distal extremity, and provided with stout setae, many of which are 
very long. 

Chela stout, setose, the claws being longer than the propos 
bearing them. They are slender, somewhat abruptly curved at the 
tips, and beset along their entire biting edge with teeth, which, 
though conspicuously large and small, are not arranged in strict 
alternation. 

Palp slender, five-jointed; the second joint is the longest, the 
fifth is a little shorter than the preceding. All are setose ; the setae on 
the two terminal joints being the smallest and the most numerous. 

Ovigerous legs, ten-jointed ; the first two are very small, and the 
third is equal in length to the two, the fourth and fifth are much 
longer, and sub-equal; the last three are also sub-equal in length, 
the terminal joint bearing a lone pectinate claw. The last four 
segments bear a single row of denticulate spines. 

These spines bear three or four lateral teeth on each side. The 
entire limb is more or less setose. In the ovigerous individuals the 
first six joints of this appendage are usually much swollen, and this 
more particularly apples to the fifth joint. 

The four walking legs are alike. The second coxa is conspicuously 
the larger of the three, and the third bears a prominent swelling cn 

S 


258 Southern Cross. 


its inner margin. This last joint is more setose than the others. 
The femur is the stoutest joint of the limb, and is longer than the 
three coxae together. On its inner margin the setae are short, but 
on the outer they almost amount to spines, especially at the 
extremity. 

Of the two tarsi, the proximal is both longer and stouter, both 
exceed the femur in length, setose on the inner margin, the outer is 
more thickly covered and the setae are almost in the nature of long 
spines. The distal tibia bears three spines at its extremity ; of these 
the middle one is much shorter than the other two. The tarsus and 
propos together are a little shorter than the second tibia, they are 
slightly curved and tapering. The latter bears a long terminal claw 
with a single minute accessory. ‘The tail is an elongate ovoid. 

A very large number of individuals of this species were taken off 
Cape Adare at various dates and at depths varying between 20 and 
26 fathoms. Almost all were in an exceedingly dirty condition, 
due to a thick growth of diatoms of the genus Zriceratiwm or 
an ally, and other vegetable matter in a more or less decomposed 
state. This foreign matter is very adherent and it is almost 
impossible to clean satisfactorily many of them. It gives the 
animal quite a woolly appearance to unassisted vision. Many 
specimens, which apparently have recently moulted are quite light- 
coloured and have a more “refined” appearance, being cleaner, and 
the spines and setae are much sharper. 


REFERENCES. 


1. Barr, C. Spence. Report on the Crustacea Macrura collected by H.M.S. 
‘ Challenger’ during the years 1873-76. 

H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 24, Zoology. 1888. 

2. Bepparp, F. E. Report on the Crustacea Isopoda collected by H.M.S. 
‘ Challenger’ during the years 1873-76. Part II. 

H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 17, Geology. 1886. 

8. Benepicr, J. EK. The Arcturidae in the U.S. National Museum. 
Proc. Biol. Soc., Washington. Vol. 12, pp. 41-55. 1898. 

4, Courthre, H. Note préliminaire sur les Crustacés décapodes provenant de 
Pexpédition antarctique belge. 

C. R. Acad., Paris. Vol. 180, pp. 1640-1648. 1900. 

5. Cunnincuam, R. O. Notes on the Reptiles, Amphibia, Fishes, Mollusca and 
Crustacea obtained during the voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Nassaw’ in the years 
1866-69. 

Trans. Linn. Soc., London. Vol. 27, pp. 465-502. 1871, 


13. 


14. 


Crustacea. 259 


. Dana, J. D. Crustacea. 


United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838-42, under the 
command of C. Wilkes, U.S.N. Vol. 18. 1852. 


. DotiFus, A. Crustacés Isopodes. 


Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn, 1882-83. Vol. 2. 1891. 


. Dotirus, A. Note préliminaire sur les Tanaidae receuillis aux Acores pendant 


les Campagnes de I’Hirondelle, 1887-88. 
Bull. Soc. Zool. de France. Vol. 22, pp. 207-215. 1897. 


, Haswett, W. A. Catalogue of the Australian and Sessile-eyed Crustacea. 


The Australian Museum, Sydney. 1882. 


. Henperson, J. R. Report on the Anomura collected by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ 


during the years 1873-76. 
H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 27, Zoology. 1888. 


. Hesse, HE. Memoire sur les Pranizes et les Ancées. 


Ann. des Sci. Nat. Ser. 4. Vol. 9, pp. 93-119. 1858. 


2. Hesse, E. Memoire sur des Crustacés rares ou nouveaux des cédtes de France. 


No. 28. Pranizes et Ancées nouveaux. 
Ann. des Sci. Nat. Ser. 5. Vol. 19, pp. 8-29. 
Horx, P. P. C. Report on the Pycnogonida collected by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger ’ 
during the years 1873-76. 
H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 38, Zoology. 1881. 
Horx, P. P. C. On four Pyenogonids dredged during the cruise of the 


‘ Challenger.’ 
Tijdsch. Neder. Dierk Ver. Ser. 2. Vol. 5, pp. 290-300. 1898. 


. Hompron and JAcquinor. Crustacea. Jacquinot and Lucas. 


Voyage au Pole Sud et dans l’Oceanic. Vol. 3, Zoology. 1853. 


. Miers, HK. J. Crustacea. 


Zoology of the voyage of H.M.S. ‘Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ 1839-48. Vol. 2. 1874. 


7. Miers, E. J. Catalogue of the Stalk and Sessile-eyed Crustacea of New Zealand. 


London. S8vo. 1876. 


. Miers, E. J. Account of the Crustacea collected during the survey of 


H.M.S. ‘Alert’ in the Straits of Magellan and on the coast of Patagonia. 
Proc. Zool. Soc., London. pp. 61-79. 1881. 


. Miers, E. J. Report on the Brachyura collected by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ 


during the years 1873-76. 
H.MLS. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 17, Zoology. 1886. 


. Mitne Epwarps, A. Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés. 3 vols. 


Paris. 1834—40. 


. Mint Epwarps, A. Etudes zoologiques sur les Crustacés récents de la 


famille des Portuniens. 
Arch. du Mus. Vol. 10. 1861. 


. Minne Epwarps, A. Crustacés. 


Mission du Cap Horn, 1882-83. Vol. 2. 1891. 


. Prerrer, G. Mollusken, Krebse und Echinodermen von Cumberland Sund., 


n.d. Ausbeute der Deutschen Nord Expedition, 1882-83. 
Jahrb. Hamburg Wiss. Anst. Vol. 3, pp. 28-49. 1886. 


. Prerrer, G. Die Krebse von Sud Georgien, n.d. Ausbeute der Deutschen 


Station, 1882-83. 
Jahrb. Hamburg Wiss. Anst. Vol. 4, pp. 44-150. 1887. 


. Raruzun, M. Catalogue of the Crabs of the family Periceridae in the U.S. 


National Museum. 
Proc. U.S. Nat, Mus. Vol. 15, pp. 281-277. 1892. 


260 Southern Cross. 


26. Ricnarpson, H. Key to the Isopods of the Pacific Coast of North America, 
with descriptions of 22 new species. 
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Vol. 21, pp. 815-872; and Ann. and Mag. N. H. 

Ser. 7. Vol. 4. pp. 157-187, 260-277, 321-338. 1899. 

27. Sars, GO. Report on the Schizopoda collected by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’ during 
the years 1873-76. 
H.MLS. ‘ Challenger’ Reports. Vol. 11, Zoology. 1885. 

28. Sars, G.O. The Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition, 1876-1878. Zoology. 
Pyenogonidea. Christiania. 1891. 

29. Sars, G. O. Crustacea of Norway. Vol. 2. 
3ergen. Svo. 1896-99. 

30, Sreppine, T, R. R. A History of Crustacea. Recent Malacostraca. 
London, 8vo, 1893. 


ol. Srespine, T. R. R. On some Crustaceans from the Falkland Islands, 
collected by Mr. Rupert Vallentin. 
Proc. Zool, Soc., London, 1900, pp. 517-568. 

32, Wuirr, ApAmM. Notes on four new Genera of Crustacea. 

Ann, and Mag. N.H. Vol. 18, pp. 176-178, 1846. 


DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 


PLATE XXIX. 


MERHIPPOLYTE AUSTRALIS. 


1. Carapace. 6. Second maxilla. 

2. First antenna. 7. First maxillipede. 
3. Second antenna. 8. Second maxillipede. 
4, Mandible. 9. Third maxillipede. 
5. First maxilla. 


PLATH XXX. 
EXUPHAUSIA GLACIALIS. 
. Second Maxilla. 
. Telson and Uropoda. 


3. Rostrum of LH. glacialis. 
), Rostrum of #. australis. 


. Animal entire. 

. First antenna. 

. Second antenna. 
. Mandible. 

. First Maxilla. 


6 
7 
8 


oo 


Ck whe 


PLATH XXXI. 

PARATANAIS ANTARCTICA. 

1. Male. | 2. Female. 
PLATH XXXII. 


GNATHIA POLARIS. 


1. Male. 7. Mandible of male. 

2. Female. 8. Maxillipede of male. 

3 and 4. Larva. 9. Gnathopod of male. 

5. First antenna of male. 10-12. Pereiopods of male, 


6. Second antenna of male. 


Crustacea. 2601 


PLATE XXXIII. 


1. Arcturus adareanus. 


3. Cymodocea australis. 
2. Cymodocea antarctica. 


TRIGA, OXON TAY, 
1. HALIACRIS AUSTRALIS. 


la. Second maxilla. 
1b. First maxilla. 


le. Mandible. 
1d. Maxillipede. 


2. ARCTURUS POLARIS. 
2a. First antenna. | 2d. Second maxilla. 
2b. Mandible. 2e. Maxillipede. 
2c. First maxilla. 2f. First pereiopod (gnathopod). 


3. CYMODOCEA AUSTRALIS. 


3a. First antenna. 
3b. Second antenna. 
oO 

(3) 


ce. Mandible. 


od. Maxillipede. 
de. First maxilla. 


PLATE XXXV. 

ARCTURUS POLARIS. 

4 TAG eRONONOVAIE 
NOTASELLUS AUSTRALIS. 

PLATE XXXVIL. 
HALIACRIS AUSTRALIS. 


PLATE XXXVIII. 


E.CHINOZONE SPINOSA. 


PLATE XXXIX. 


EXCHINOZONE SPINOSA. 


1. Secord pereiopod. 6. Seventh pereiopod. 
2. Third pereiopod. 7. First antenna. 

3. Fourth pereiopod. 8. Mandible. 

4, Fifth pereiopod. 9. Second maxilla. 

5. Sixth pereiopod. 10. Maxillipede. 


PLATE XL. 


NYMPHON AUSTRALE. 


1. Male, with appendages of one side. 4, Ovigerous limb, with fringed spine 
2. Palp. enlarged. 


3. Chela. | 5. Chela enlarged. 


262 Southern Cross. 


MIL, POLY TA tei 


By ARTHUR WILLEY, D.Sc., F.Z:8. 
(Plates XLI.-XLVI.) 


Tue collection of Polychaeta which has been handed over to me for 
description is small, and in some cases the state of preservation of 
the specimens leaves something to be desired; but there is sufficient 
to indicate the existence of a vigorous Annelid fauna in this region 
of the farthest south. Fifteen species have been identified, of which 
three seem to be new. Perhaps the most interesting feature of the 
collection is the addition of the characteristic northern Maldanid, 
Rhodine lovéni, Mgn, to the Antarctic fauna. Besides this, two 
other genera, not hitherto recorded in the south, are represented by 
species slightly different from their northern congeners, namely, 
Gattyana (= Nychia) cristata, n. sp., and Malmgrenia crassicirris, n. sp. 

The three species, Travisia kerguelensis, McInt., Scoloplos kerque- 
lensis, McInt.,’ and Thelepus antarcticus, Kbe., are hardly distin- 
guishable from the northern types of the respective genera. 

A singularity of the collection, which, however, bears no apparent 
significance, is the absence of Lycoridae and Eunicidae. There are 
some specimens of Spirorbis which I have not identified, as the soft 
parts are not adequately preserved. 

I have introduced, in a form more or less modified from the 
original sources, compressed diagnoses of most of the genera dealt 
with, in the hope that this method, while requiring little extra space, 
will help to avoid ambiguity. 

The determined species are the following :— 


PAGE 
1. Harmothoé spinosa, Kinberg . ; ; ; . 264 
2. Harmothoé crossetensis (McIntosh) . : : . 266 
3. Gattyana cristata, D. sp. . : : : : ~ ©268 
4, Malmgrenia crassicirris, n. sp. . ‘ : . 5. AGW) 
5. Phyllodoce madeirensis, Langerhans . ; 2 o PHO) 
6. Vanadis antarctica (McIntosh) - : : oy atl: 


"Remarks upon the species of Tyravisia and Scoloplos, and other 
“bipolar” species and genera, are contained in a recent paper by Miss Edith M. 
Pratt, ‘Some notes on the Bipolar Theory of the Distribution of Marine 
Organisms.’ Mem. Manchester Soc., Vol. XLV., Part IV., No. 14, 1901. 


Polychaeta. 263 


PAGE 

7. Typosyllis hyalina (Grube). : : ; . 274 
8. Eusyllis kerquelensis, McIntosh ; : : AG: 
9, Aricia marginata, Ehlers : : : . 215 
10. Scoloplos kerquelensis, McIntosh : : . 275 
Ll. Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh : : = 216 
12. Rhodine lovéni, Malmgren ‘ 5 ; : 5 ath 
13. Thelepus antarcticus, Kinberg . . : : Sills 
14. Nicolea agassizi, Kinberg : ; : ; . 279 
15. Hreutho antarctica, n. sp. : 7 5 aS 7 20k 
Remarks on Hermadion longicirratus, Kinberg. : . 266 
Remarks on Lagisca vesiculosa (Grube) . 5 ee ee 00 
Addendum (Oxydromus aucklandicus, n. sp.) « : AS ar4eil 


POLY NOILIDAE: 


The Polynoidae, considered as an independent family of the great 
division of the Aphroditea, comprise three sub-familes, namely, 
Iphionina, Sav., characterised by the absence of a tentaculuin impar 
on the prostomium ; Lepidonotina [n. u.], in which the bases of the 
lateral antennae arise at the same level as the median tentaculum 
from the frontal margin of the head; Harmothoina [n. n.], where the 
antennae arise at a lower level than the tentaculum, below the 
frontal margin. Both Lepidonotina and Harmothoina produce short 
and long forms,! eg., Lepidonotus and Lepidasthenia of the former 
sub-family, Harmothoé and Enipo of the latter. The present 
collection contains examples of the Harmothoina brevia only. 


Serizks HARMOTHOINA BREVIA. 


Segmenta pauciora quam XLV; elytra paria XV, in segmentis H, IV, V, Vil, 
1X, XJ, XII, XV, XVU, XIX, XX1, XXIII, XXVI, XXIX, XXXII, obvia. 


The buccal segment, whose appendages are the cirrophores, each 
carrying two tentacular cirri, is reckoned as the first somatic segment 
by some authors, but not by others. It is not seen in dorsal view. 


HARMOTHOE. 


Kinberg, 1855, char. emend. Malmgren, 1865, 

Setae superiores validae, crassiores quam setae ventrales; setae ventrales apice 
distincte vel obsolete bidentato; elytra totum dorsum tegentia, segmentis 
ultimis interdum exceptis. 


The insertion of the last reservation in the above diagnosis seems 
to be rendered necessary by the examination of specimens from the 


1 Oligomeric and polymeric, according to the nomenclature introduced by 
de Blainville and adopted by Claparéde. 


264 Southern Cross. 


Antarctic, but it undeniably obscures the limits of the genera 
flarmothoé and Lagisca. Ehlers (1897) has also expressed himself 
in doubt as to the relations of these two genera in Antarctic waters 
(see below, p. 266). 


1. HARMOTHOE SPINOSA. 
(Pl. XLL., figs. 1-4, and Pl. XLIII., figs. 1-2 and 4-8.) 


Harmothoé spinosa, Kinberg, J. G. H., 1855. Ofv. Ak. Forh., Stockholm, 
p- 386. Id., 1857. ‘Hugenies Resa,’ p. 21, Taf. VI., fig. 31. Ehlers, E., 
1897, Polychaeten, Hamburg. Magalhaens. Sammebreise, p. 12. 


This species seems to be the representative, in the Antarctic 
regions, of the northern species H. imbricata (L.), the principal 
difference between them, so far as I can ascertain by comparison of 
specimens, relating to the situs oculorum. In the Antarctic species 
the four eyes are visible from above, while 1. imbricata, as pointed 
out by McIntosh,’ shows only a single pair of eyes in dorsal view, 
the anterior pair being concealed below the frontal cones. Both 
species present a very great range of variation in the fimbriation 
and pigmentation of the elytra, which has been alluded to by Ehlers 
(1897) and McIntosh (1900). 

The number of segments, including the buccal segment, frequently 
adds up to thirty-seven, but this number possibly represents a 
particular condition in which the worms are commonly taken, and 
may not have the significance of a fixed quantity. In one case 
twenty normal segments are followed abruptly by twelve to thirteen 
small regenerated segments ; another specimen of 40 mm. has thirty- 
eight segments ; in a third specimen of 33 mm. the segments, thirty- 
four in number, taper to a point behind, but no anal cirri are present.” 

Judging from the material at my disposal, the variations would 
seem to culminate in three principal allotypic modifications, of which 
a brief description follows. One of these modifications is for the 
present retained as a distinct species (see p. 266). 


' McIntosh, W. C., 1900: ‘British Annelids,’ Ray Soc. Monograph, p. 316. 

® Ehlers (1897) finds thirty-seven segments with leneth of body increasing 
from 12 to 45 mm. In this connection it is interesting to note that the 
number of segments in Lagisca vesiculosa is given both by Grube (1877) and 
Ehlers (1897) as forty-two. Grube’s specimen was 21 mm. in length; Ehlers 
gives no dimensions. The larger ‘ Challenger’ specimens (named L. antarctica, 
McInt.), measuring up to 36 mm. in body-length, have no more than thirty-nine 
segments. ‘The number forty-two may very well be final, in which case it will be 
interesting to learn how it happens that some individuals have less than the normal 
number of segments, while others nearly half the size have the full complement. 


Polychaeta. 265 


(a) H. spinosa, var. fullo.* 
(Pl. XLIIT., figs. 1 and 4, and 6-7.) 


Elytra parce vel haud fimbriata, spinulis conicis, interdum prope marginem 
posticum verrucis crassioribus circa ITl munita. 

The minute conical acuminate spines may be localised in definite 
patches either in the outer portion or on the anterior portion of the 
elytra. The most anterior spinules may be quite low and blunt, and 
sometimes all of them have this character (Pl. XLIILI., fig. 7). One 
specimen which I refer to this variety after attentive consideration 
deserves special mention. For a long time I thought it was a new 
species of Lagisca, but now regard it as a sub-variety of the form 
under consideration, and shall refer to it simply as v. lagiscoides.” 
The elytra of this specimen are destitute of marginal fimbriae and 
sub-marginal verrucae,’ but possess extra-marginal spinules like those 
of Lagisca magellanica, McInt. (fig. 6). There are forty segments, of 
which the last six project behind the elytra; the lagiscoid appearance 
of free segments behind the elytra will obviously vary according to 
the condition of regeneration of the posterior end, and also according 
to the state of general protraction of the body. This specimen 
measures 49 mm. in length and 15 mm. over the setae ; it was taken 
outside Cape Adare, 13th November, 1899, in 84 fathoms. 


(8) H. spinosa, var. typica. 
(Pl. XLL., figs. 1-3, and Pl. XLIIL, fig. 2.) 


Elytra prope marginem posticum vel ubique verrucis obtusis munita, margine 
externo fimbriato. 


A comparison of the figures on Pl. XLI. with Kinberg’s type- 
figures, will convince as to the specific identity of the specimens 
depicted. The elytra are marked by the presence of sub-marginal 
pustules (spinulae conicae of Kinberg) along the hinder border and 


1 Polynoé fullo, Grube, 1877, Monatsber. Ak. Berlin, p. 515; Lagisca 
magellanica, McIntosh, 1885, ‘Challenger’ Rep., XIL, p. 82. Both of these are 
included by Ehlers (1897) in the synonymy of H. spinosa. 

2 The full designation would be H. spinosa, var. fullo, sub-var. lagisccides, but 
it is not yet known whether the establishment of sub-varieties is capable of being 
carried on with profit in Polychaete taxonomy. 

® These are small wart-like vesicles sometimes present in this variety, but 
much more abundant in the typical variety. 

*  Except that Kinberg found “appendices omnes lobi cephalici laeves”— 
“vielleicht aber nur in Folge des schlechten Erhaltungszustandes ” (hlers, 1897, 
Hamburg, p. 14). : 


266 Southern Cross. 


sometimes scattered over the surface, 7.¢., extra-mareinal, as shown 
in fix, 2, Pl. XLI. The rest of the elytral surface is beset with 
very minute bosses resembling the pustules on a much smaller scale, 
but not like the definite spines noted in the preceding variety. 

An interesting point is raised by the contemplation of fig. 3, 
Pl. XLI., namely, as to the probability of Hermadion longicirratus, 
Kinberg, being co-specific with Harmothoé spinosa. What makes 
the former a Hermadion appears to be merely the exposure of free 
segments behind the elytra, as in Lagisca.‘ If, however, this 
character fails to prove a sure guide, as in the case of the lagiscoid 
variety described above, then the extraordinary resemblance between 
the posterior and anal cirri of the example figured here and those of 
Kinberg’s specimen of Hermadion longicirratus (‘ Kug. Resa.,’ Taf. VI., 
fig. 33) cannot fail to impress, the chief difference being that, in the 
latter, some of the posterior segments were not concealed by the elytra. 

Prof. Ehlers (1897) is doubtful whether Hermadion longicirratus 
should be separated from H. magalhaensi, Kbg., the two forms 
having been obtained at the same point of the Magellan Strait. As 
indicated above, my observations rather lead me to believe that 
iinbere’s H. longicirratus is generically distinct from H. magalhaensi, 
and belongs to the series of Harmothoé spinosa. 

The form known as Lagisca vesiculosa (Gr.) is not contained in 
this collection. It chiefly differs from the typical H. spinosa in the 
presence of vesicular swellings at the posterior border of the elytra 
in addition to the smaller pustules, some of which are borne upon 
the vesicular elevations. 

Prof. Ehlers (1897, p. 15) has the following suggestive remark: 
“Bei grésserem Material wird sich feststellen lassen, ob die Polynoé 
vesiculosa [i.e. Lagisca vesiculosa (Gr.) = L. antaretica, McInt.| nicht 
ganz in den Varietiitenkreis der Harmothoé spinosa, Kbg., einzube- 
ziehen ist.” 


2. HARMOTHOE CROSSETENSIS. 
(Pl. XLIII., figs. 8 and 9-11.) 


Lagisca crosetensis, McIntosh, 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 88. 
Elytra hirsuta parce fimbriata, spinis magnis confertis munita. 


The collection contains two specimens dredged in 26 fathoms 
off Cape Adare in company with H. spinosa, var. typica, ete. They 
are well-marked forms, presenting a hirsute appearance, due alike to 

1 The type of Hermadion is H. magatlhaensi (sic), Kbg., a well-marked species 


not represented in the ‘ Southern Cross’ collection. As employed by Kinberg, his 
genus Hermadion also included Malmgren’s conception of Lagisca. 


Polychaeta. 267 


the erect setae of the dorsal fascicles and to the abundance and size 
of the spines on the elytra. It is a variety to which the term spinosa 
would be much more appropriate than to v. ¢ypica. 

I was at first tempted to place this species as a variety in the 
series of H. spinosa, as I could find no essential divergence, except 
in the character of the elytra, which are known to vary considerably. 
But besides the fact that the collection contains no appreciable 
eradation between this extreme variety and the typical form, there 
is also a slight difference apparent in the setae (Pl. XLII, fig. 5). It 
will be interesting to learn, from the examination of a larger series, 
whether or not the autonomy of this species can be maintained. 

With regard to the bidentation of the ventral setae, which is a 
generic character of Harmothoé, in the present variety the sub-ter- 
minal denticle is obsolete, but may be seen in very rare cases. 
Prof. McIntosh describes and figures it. Below the curved tip the 
inner surface of the seta is convex, a point also noted by the author 
of the ‘ Challenger’ Report. The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens, however, 
are a variety or sub-variety distinct from the ‘ Challenger” specimens, 
as shown by the chgracter of the elytral spines, which are acuminate 
at their tips in the former and laciniate in the latter (figs. 10-11, 
Ele Xen): 

The two varieties are therefore as follows :— 


1. H. crosetensis, var. acuminata, n. 
2. H. crosetensis, var. laciniata, n.' 


I counted thirty-eight segments (including the buccal), with 
body-length of 23 mm., width 9 mm. over the setae, 6 mm. without 
the setae. In the v. Jactniata the slender elytral fimbriae are not 
merely marginal or sub-marginal, but are scattered over the surface 
in amongst the spines. 


Some of the individuals of H. spenosa are infested with crustacean 
ectoparasites, which are attached to the body of the worm by a 
rostral process which pierces the integument and appears to end in 
a disc inside. These parasites superficially resemble the Saccopses 
terebellidis found on Terebellides stroemi rather than the Herpyllobius 
arcticus which occurs on H, imbricata.? 

Other specimens present peculiar growths upon the head, whose 
nature I have not determined. 


1 The laciniate tips of the elytral spines of Lagisca crosetensis are not noted by 


Prof. McIntosh, op. c7t. 
2 Levinsen, G. M. R.: ‘Om nogle parasitiske Krebsdyr, der snylte hos 
Annelider,’ Vid. Medd. Copenhagen, 1877-8, p. 551. 


268 Southern Cross. 


GATTYANA. 


McIntosh, W. C. ‘British Annelids,’ Part II., ‘Polychaeta. Amphinomidae to 
Sigalionidae.’ Lay Soc. Moncgraph, 1900, p. 285. 
Syn. Nychia, Malmgren, pre-occupied. 


Setae superiores debiles, plerumque tenuiores quam setae ventrales ; setae ventrales 
apice integro; elytra scabriuscula, dorsum tegentia; palpi papillis minutis 
clavatis truncatis obsiti. 


3. GATTYANA CRISTATA. 
(Pl. XLIV., figs. 1-4.) 

Pars media dorsalis segmentorum omnium crista transversa praedita; setae 
superiores tenerae asperae interdum apice penicillato; elytra perfimbriata, 
tuberculis crenatis munita. 

Three specimens of this interesting species, the first representa- 
tive of the genus to be recorded from Antarctic waters, were dredged 
off Franklin Island in 10 to 20 fathoms. 

Length of largest specimen 24 mm.; width from below, including 
parapodia, but not including setae, 8 mm.; number of segments, 
thirty-five. 

Characteristic for the species are (1) the cristate dorsum of each 
segment ; the first crest on the first elytra-bearing segment is rotund, 
the rest becoming more drawn out transversely until the maximum 
is reached. 

(2) The crenate tubercles of the sub-orbicular elytra. These 
tubercles are of large size and comparatively few in number in 
the posterior half of the elytron, graduating in size from the more 
numerous smaller verrucae of the anterior half. The elytra also 
carry numerous long filiform fimbriae, both marginal (external and 
posterior) and extra-marginal. 

(3) The tufted tips of the larger dorsal setae. The tip of the 
setae is produced into a slender flagellum surrounded by a tuft of 
fine long setulae; often the flagellum is absent, either lost or 
undeveloped, and then the setae terminate in a brush. These setae 
resemble the penicillate setae of Panthalis oerstedi. 

The most dorsally placed setae are feeble and flexible. 


MALMGRENIA. 
McIntosh, 1876, char. emend. 
McIntosh, W. C., 1876. Tr. Zool. Soc., London, IX., p. 376. Id., 1900, Ray Soc. 
Mon., p. 379. 
Prostomium lyriforme; processus omnes corporis (viz., palpi, tentaculum, antennae, 


cirri, elytra) glabri vel subglabri; setae ventrales distincte vel obsolete 
bidentatae. 


" Of. McIntosh, op. cit., 1900, p. 403, and Pl. XUL., fig. 51. 


Polychaeta. 269 


In his recent diagnosis of this genus, Prof. McIntosh speaks 
of “the median and lateral tentacles springing from the front as in 
Lepidonotus.” It was Grube’ who first drew attention to the 
divergent series of Polynoids typified respectively by Lepidonotus 
and Harmothoé. In Prof. MeIntosh’s monograph the reader is left 
in doubt as to which series the genus is to be assigned, and on 
turning to the figure of the head (Pl. XXVIII., fig. 15) it seems to me 
that the median and lateral tentacles do not arise from the frontal 
border as in Lepidonotus. 

In a still more recent memoir on the Aphroditidae written 
by M. Darboux? we find the genus Malmgrenia included among 
the synonyms of Harmothoé itself. Under these circumstances 
it is unfortunate that there should be ambiguity in the defini- 
tion and illustration of the genus. The bases of the tenta- 
culum and antennae in Malmgrenia are contiguous, but the latter 
are inserted at a distinctly lower level. 


44 MALMGRENIA CRASSICIRRIS. 
(Pl. XLIL., figs. 3-4, and Pl. XLIV., figs. 5 and 6.) 


Elytra reniformia brunnea albolineata striis candidis duabus longitudinalibus ; 
setae ventrales apice bidentato denticulo accessorio intermedio ; cirri ventrales 
tumidi subulati. 


The two white stripes upon a dark madder-brown background 
on each elytron give this species a characteristic appearance totally 
unlike anything else in the collection. Seen from below, the whitish 
fleshy ventral cirri convey an equally distinctive impression. When 
the elytra are removed, the intensely white prostomium and the 
whitish elytrophores stand out prominently from the general dark 
madder-brown ground colour, 

The largest ‘specimen was unfortunately mutilated behind, only 
thirty-one segments being preserved with the fragment, which 
measured 17 mm. in length and 6:5 mm. over the setae. A com- 
plete specimen, 14 mm. long by 4:5 mm. wide (over the setae), had 
forty segments. 

The dorsal setae are much shorter and stouter than the ventral 


1 Grube, E.: ‘ Bemerkungen iiber die Familie der Aphroditeen III., Polyonina,’ 
see p. 59. Jahresber. Schles. Ges., 1875 (Breslau, 1876). 

2 Darboux, J. G.: ‘Recherches sur les Aphroditiens,’ Bull. Sci. France et 
Belgique, XX XIII, 1400, see p. 106, 


270 Southern Cross. 


setae, in this respect bearing a resemblance to Malmeren’s genus 
Laenilla." 

The dorsal setae are nearly smooth, but faint serrations can be 
observed along the convex border with a high magnification. The 
ereatest peculiarity in the parapodial armature is presented by the 
ventral setae, which have gaping bifid tips with a small accessory 
tooth between the larger prongs. The number of paired alternating 
spinous rows on the ventral setae is about twelve, the eighth row 
occurring at the point of maximum dilatation. 

Several specimens were obtained off Cape Adare in 20 to 26 fathoms 
at a temperature of 29° Fahr. In the state of preservation in which 
they arrived they proved to be excessively fragile, the cirri and elytra 
breaking off with the greatest ease and even the intersegmental 
junctions giving way. 


PHYLLODOCEIDAE. 


5, PHYLLODOCE MADEIRENSIS. 


(Pl. XLII., fig. 5, and Pl. XLIV., fiz. 7.) 


t=) 


Phyllodoce (Anaitis) madeirensis, Langerhans, P., 1880. Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., 
XXXIII., p. 807. Ehlers, E., 1897, op. cit., p. 25. 


Prof. Ehlers pointed out that the Antarctic representative of the 
Madeiran Phyllodoce differs from the original type in the character 
of its setae, the terminal spiniform process of which is very much 
longer than in the latter. 

On account of the serial distribution of papillae on the extruded 
proboscis, this species should presumably be regarded as a Phyllodoce, 
s. str., and not as an Anwitis.? 

The proboscis has six lateral rows of papillae, ten to twelve ina 
row, and a median dorsal series of seven. All the papillae are 
characterised by a patch of chocolate-brown pigment on their posterior 
faces only (Pl. XLIL,, fig. 5). 


' Many of Malmeren’s genera have been rejected by subsequent systematists, 
and among others the type species of ZLaenilla, Ll. glabra, is now named 
Harmothoé setosissima (Sav.), McIntosh, 1900, p. 845. I do not quite see 
the necessity for sinking the name Laenilla in Harmothoé, especially since the 
type species turns out to be valid (apart, of course, from synonymy), and, in fact, 
the distinction between Laenilla and Malmgrenia is drawn extremely fine, the cirri 
of Laenilla being sparsely papillose, and the head of a different shape. 

2 Of. Malmgren, 1865, Ofv. Ak. Forh. Stockholm, pp. 94, 95, and Gruhe, 1890, 
Jahresber. Schles. Ges. fiir 1879, p. 208. 


Polychaeta. 275 


The posterior border of the prostomium is emarginate, with a 
nuchal papilla in the notch.’ With regard to the tentacular cirri, 
Langerhans states that the first (buecal) segment carries three pairs 
of tentacular cirri with annulate bases,? while the second segment 
bears one pair of tentacular cirri and one cirrus ventralis foliaceus, 
but no setae. This description tallies with Malmeren’s diagnosis of 
Anwitis, but is not in accord with my observations. In the ‘ Southern 
Cross’ specimen, with proboscis three parts extruded, it is quite 
evident that the dorsum of the true buccal segment is invisible from 
above, unless it is represented by the nuchal papilla. Below and at 
the sides, however, the buccal segment is clearly visible and bears 
laterally a pair of cirri;* the second segment bears two cirri on each 
side, namely, the most dorsally placed long cirrus in the figure and 
the shortest pair of cirri below it;* the third segment bears a pair 
of tentacular cirri, namely, the long cirrus immediately below the 
most dorsally placed cirrus on each side in the figure; below this 
last tentacular cirrus there is a cirrus ventralis foliaceus, as described 
by Langerhans. ‘ 

The following table recapitulates the foregoing observations :— 

Segment I. One pair of tentacular cirri and a median dorsal nuchal papilla. 


Segment II. 'T'wo pairs of tentacular cirri, namely, a dorsal and a ventral pair. 
Segment III. One pair of tentacular cirri and a paired cirrus ventralis foliaceus. 


One specimen, 72 mm. long, 3 mm. wide over the parapodia, 
was taken off Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms. 


ALCIOPIDAE. 
VANADIS. 


Appendix terminalis pedum cirriformis; setae compositae capillares; antennae V. 


6. VANADIS ANTARCTICA. 
(Pl. XLIV., fig. 8, and Pl. XLVI., figs. 1-2.) 


Alciopa antarctica, McIntosh, 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 175. 


Vanadis antarctica, Apstein, 1900. ‘Die Alciopiden und Tomopteriden der 
Plankton Exped.,’ Bd. II., H. b., p. 11. 


* The notch is deeper and more acute than shown in the figure. 
* The annulation of the cirrophores cannot be discerned in the ‘ Southern Cross’ 
specimen. 

* The longer of the two short cirri on each side in the figure, 


* Tt is necessary to examine in side view to see these relations properly. 


272 Southern Cross. 


Apstein transferred this species tentatively to the genus Vanadis 
on account of the presence of “a short filiform cirrus” (McInt.) on 
the parapodium. But one of the essential characters of Vanadis is 
the possession of setae compositae, while Prof. McIntosh attributed 
setae simplices to his Alciopa antarctica which, if correct, would have 
justified the constitution of a new genus. 

A true Vanadis had already been recorded from the Southern 
Seas, namely, V. greefiana, Grube, 1877,’ taken between Kerguelen 
and Australia. 

In the present species the buccal segment resembles that of 
Vanadis formosa, figured by Apstein. It does not appear in dorsal 
view, but seen from below it consists of two broad lobes, each 
bearing a stout tentacular cirrus at its outer edge and meeting in the 
middle line in a small triangular piece. Behind the bilobed buccal 
segment follow two narrow segments, each with a pair of tenta- 
cular cirri borne upon cirrophores. The fourth segment bears a pair 
of dorsal cirri with rounded tips and a rudimentary parapodium, but 
no setae. The fifth and sixth segments in the female bear large 
spherical dorsal cirri modified to form receptacula seminis. A small 
mammilla on each receptaculum represents the apex of the modified 
cirrus. In addition to these remarkable organs?” the fifth and sixth 
segments likewise bear a small pharetra setarwm, from which the 
long slender setae project, and a small ventral cirrus. In Vanadis 
formosa the receptacula are borne upon different segments (viz., 4th 
and 5th), and there are no setae on these segments (Apstein). 

The occurrence of a pinnigerous but apparently achaetous 
seoment, between the segments which carry the tentacular cirri and 
those which bear the receptacula seminis, is a distinctive feature 
of Vanadis antarctica @ . 

An incomplete female with 115 segments measured nearly 
9 inches in length. 

The anterior portion of the body, including the first eight or 
nine setigerous segments, is slender, cylindrical, and porrect. The 
sexes are easily distinguished by the absence of the enlarged dorsal 
cirri of the anterior setigerous segments in the male and their 
presence in the female. Behind, and at the base of the more 
posterior parapodia, there are large black glands more prominent in 
the male. The general colour in spirit is translucent brown, banded 
in the abdominal region. 


1 Pharetra setarum in appendicem brevem filiformem exeunte; setae compositae. 
(Grube, Monatsber. Ak. Berlin, 1877, p. 524.) 

2 Originally described by Hering in 1860; cf. Hering, ‘Zur Kenntniss der 
Alciopiden von Messina,’ S.-B. Akad. Wien, Bd. 101, Abth. 1, 1892. 


Polychaeta. 278 


If the long slender setae are gathered into a bunch it is almost, 
if not quite, impossible to determine their composite nature, but when 
spread out there is seen to be a very long appendix jointed to a still 
longer shaft (Pl. XLIV., fig. 8). 

Numerous examples, male and female, were obtained at Cape 
Adare “on the surface along the beach,” during latter end of April 
and beginning of May, 1899; temperature 28°6° Fahr.; “very 
plentiful for a few days but afterwards not seen again.” 


The downwardly directed lens of the specimen figured by 
McIntosh (op. cit. Pl. XXVIIL, fig. 4) is evidently due to unnatural 
shrinkage. It is stated in a footnote that the Alciopidae of the 
‘Challenger’ collection were in an indifferent condition, but it is true 
that the lens has a downward inclination. 

The achaetous segment which I have described between the 
third pair of tentacular cirri and the first pair of receptacula seminis - 
(or the corresponding segment in the ¢) is represented in the figure 
quoted above, but is not referred to in the text; also the setae in 
the minute parapodia of the receptaculiferous segments were not 
observed by Prof. McIntosh. These setae are shorter and finer than 
the rest and might easily be overlooked, even if they were not lost 
from the specimen. 

One of the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens had the proboscis exserted ; 
it is seen to be surmounted by a crown of twelve soft conical papillae 
of which four are dorsal, six ventral and two lateral, the last being 
larger than the rest (Pl. XLVL,, fig. 2). The skin of the dorsal surface 
is loose, and below it occurs an infusion of blood rendering it probable 


that the proboscis is protruded by fluid pressure as with Phyllodoce, 
according to Ehlers. 


Grube appears to have based his description of V. greefiana on a 
male specimen which was re-examined and figured by Dr. Apstein 
(Arch. Naturg. Bd. 59 (1), 1893, p. 145), who, more recently (1900), 
has declared it synonymous with V. formosa, Claparede. Apstein’s 
earlier figures of V. greefiana do not quite agree with his later figures 
of V. formosa in regard to the number of anterior achaetous segments 
in the male, and, in the absence of the female, it is difficult to say 
why V. greefiana should be regarded as co-specific with V. formosa 
rather than with V. antarctica. Apstein (op. cit. 1893) gives the 
information that the precise locality in which V. yreefiana was taken 
was Long. 67° 30’ E., Lat. 35° 20'S. 

at 


274 Southern Cross. 


SYLLIDAE. 


7. TYPOSYLLIS HYALINA. 
(Pl. XLYV., figs. 1-3.) 
Syllis hyalina, Grube, 1863, Arch. Naturg., p. 45; Marenzeller, 1875, SB 
Ak. Wien, UXXIIL., Abth. 1, p. 129; Ehlers, 1897, op cit., p. 36. 
Typosyllis hyalina, Langerhans, 1879, Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. XX XII., p. 535. 


A single specimen was dredged in company with Maldanids and 
Ariciids off Cape Adare, January 17, 1900, in 8 fathoms. 

The body, 54 mm. in leneth by 2 mm. average width, maintains 
an even transverse diameter until near the hinder end, where it 
tapers to a point terminated by two breviarticulate anal cirri with 
thirteen to fourteen joints. 

The tentaculum impar has about seventeen joints indistinct 
towards the base. Dorsal cirrus II is longer than the tentacular 
cirri and than all the rest, having twenty clear joints and two or 
three indistinct joints at the base. Cirrus III has about sixteen 
joints, cirrus IV eighteen, and then the cirri somewhat lessen and 
become fusiform with about fifteen joints, and equal in length to 
little more than half the width of the body, again becoming some- 
what longer and slenderer towards the posterior end. 

The eyes are in a wide trapezium, the anterior pair, as usual, 
being the larger. 

This species belongs to a section of the genus characterised as 
follows :— 

Cirri dorsales breves ; setae bidentatae.! 

The anterior segments present a banded appearance due to two 
reddish-brown pigment tracts bounding a clear transverse space 
which occupies the crest of each segment; the posterior band is 
generally interrupted in the middle line (fig. 2). 


8. EUSYLLIS KERGUELENSIS. 


Eusyllis kerguelensis, McIntosh, W. C., 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 191 
Khlers, E., 1897, t. c., p. 42. 


This is a Syllid of large size, long cirri and smooth convex 
dorsum, resembling in its habitus a Hesionid, as Ehlers points out.? 


' Carus, J. V., 1885,  Prodromus Faunae Medit.,’ Vol. I., p. 227. In the present 
species the bidentation of the setae is often obscure. 

? It is curious that a minute Syllid belonging to the same sub-division, Husyllina, 
namely, Syllides longocirrata, Oerst., s!.ould have been also compared toa Hesionid by 
Langerhans (1879, Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. XXXII., p. 549). Besides being a minute 
species the dorsal cirri are articulate except the first three, which are shorter and clavate. 


Polychaeta. 245 


The single specimen, obtained off Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms, 
is a fragment with thirty-six anterior segments, upwards of 12 mm. 
in length and nearly 3 mm. across the body without the feet; 5 mm. 
over the setae. The dorsal cirri are long and smooth, but under the 
microscope faint articulations can be discerned near the free end. 
They stretch across the dorsum, measuring therefore about 5 mm. in 
length. The dorsal cirri of the first three segments are shorter than 
the succeeding, graduating in size from the first, until at the fourth 
segment the normal filiform dorsal cirri commence. ‘The stout 
antennae are equal to or slightly exceed the length of the palps 
which meet together quite at the base. The eyes are in a wide 
sub-rectangle, the anterior pair the larger. 


ARICIIDAE. 


9. ARICIA MARGINATA. 
; (Pl. XLV., fig. 4.) 
Aricia marginata, Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 95. 


A poorly preserved incomplete specimen was taken off Cape 
Adare in 8 fathoms, January 17, 1900. 

The anterior body-region comprises the achaetous buccal segment 
and thirteen setigerous segments which carry dorsal fascicles of long 
slender capillary setae, one side of which is notched like a file, the 
notches slightly imbricating; and oval dorso-ventrally elongated 
neuropodial fascicles of stout aciculiform crochets, which present a 
tristichous arrangement. The ventral crochets are stout dark-brown 
spines with a curved blunt end and low serrations on the convex 
border. 


10. SCOLOPLOS KERGUELENSIS. 


Scoloplos kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, op. cit., p. 355; Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., 

js Vite 

One specimen washed up after a gale with Harmothoé at Cape 
Adare, January 25, 1900; others dredged in 8-10 fathoms. 

Both dorsal and ventral setae are simple and capillary ; after the 
ninth setigerous segment the pharctrae setarum become dorsal. 

Length 7°25 mm.; segments fifty-six, the last few being 
achaetous. 

Toe 


276 Southern Cross. 


OPHELIIDAE. 


11. TRAVISIA KERGUELENSIS. 
(Pl. XLIL., figs. 1-2.) 


Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, op. cit., p. 357; Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 97. 


In this worm the mouth lies between the first and second 
setigerous segments, and in front of the first setiger there is an 
achaetous segment presumably homologous with the peristome of 
other forms, but here in front of the buccal orifice. In the figures 
given by McIntosh and Ehlers the lateral organs (Seitenorgane), 
which superficially resemble those of the Capitellidae,’ are not shown. 
They he between the notopodial and neuropodial fascicles and appear 
as pits in the pleural wall, commencing in the first postoral segment 
and ending in the twenty-first postoral (Pl. XLIL., fig. 2). 

The segmental nephridiopores are seen below the ventral fascicles, 
commencing at the fifth postoral and ending at the thirteenth postoral 
segment. The posterior segments give rise to rounded papillae which 
eventually form a fringe round the pygidium. 

Two specimens were obtained from Cape Adare in 7 to 10 fathoms ; 
length 20 mm., maximum width nearly 8 mm. 


MALDANIDAE. 


RHODINE. 


Malmgren, 1865, op. cit., p. 189, Char. emend. 

Uncini in segmentis uncinigeris anterioribus biseriales, in ceteris uniseriales, sine 
fasciculo setularum sub rostro, in segmentis IV anticis setigeris nulli, in ceteris 
numerosi. 

In his description of Rhodine sima, Ehlers? seems to have been 
the first to indicate that the uncini are biserial in a limited number 
of segments only, uniserial in the rest. 


12. RHODINE LOVENI. 
(Pl. XLVI., figs. 3-5.) 
Rhodine lovéni, Malmgren, A. J., 1867, ‘ Annulata Polychaeta,’ Taf. X., fig. 61. 


Several specimens of this interesting species were obtained off Cape 
Adare in 8 fathoms, 17th January, 1900; sea temperature 30° Fahr. 
' Of. Hisig, ‘ Monograph der Capitelliden.’ They closely resemble the corresponding 


organs in a Dasybranchus which I have examined. 
2 Ehlers, 1887. ‘£ Florida-Anneliden,’ p. 189. 


Polychaeta. 277 


The tube consists of agglutinated particles of black and red sand. 

The prostomium has two grooves above, separated by a low keel ; 
there is no limbus. The head is not only coalescent with the 
achaetous buccal segment, but also with the first setigerous segment, 
so that the animal is provided with a long porrect neck. The plane 
of fusion of the buccal with the first setigerous segment is indicated 
dorsally by a peculiar transverse crest, which is apparently obsolete 
in some, though present in most specimens. Of course the length 
and appearance of the segments will depend upon the state of 
contraction of the worm during preservation. 

The second and third setigerous segments are each provided with 
a collar which embraces the segment in front; the seventeenth to the 
twenty-fourth setigerous segments are elegantly campanulate, the 
bell becoming deeper in the posterior segments. 

There are not more than twenty-four segments on the most 
complete specimen, but the worm is fragile, the campanulate see- 
ments especially separating with great ease. 

Seoements four to ten are not longer than they are broad; from 
the eleventh they increase in length, commencing to decrease again 
after the twenty-first setigerous segment. Segments four to nine 
inclusive carry ventral shields (scuta ventralia). 

The uncini commence with a biserial disposition on the fifth 
setigerous segment and become uniserial at the fifteenth." 

I should estimate that the total length would be about 70 to 80 mm. 


TEREBELLIDAE. 


Sus-FAMILY AMPHITRITEA. Malmeren. 
THELEPUS. 


Leuckart, 1849; char. emend. Malmgren, 1865; sens. ampl., Grube, 1877. 
a, Leuckart, R., 1849: ‘Zur Kenntniss der Fauna von Island.’ I. Arch. 
Naturg., XV. 1, p. 169. 
8. Malmeren, A. J., 1865: ‘Nordiska Hafs-Annulata’” Ofv. Ak. Forh., 
p. 386. 
y- Grube, A. E., 1877: ‘Anneliden-Ausbeute S.M.S. “ Gazelle.”’ 
Monatsber. Ak. Berlin, p. 544. 


Branchiae filiformes, acervis transversis filorum simplicium compositae, paria 
duo (Thelepus, s. str.) vel tria (Neottis); fasciculi setarum capillarium a sezmento 
tertio (IL"° branchifero) incipientes, per segmenta numerosa (plura quam XXX) obvii. 


1 [ have ascertained from material in the National Collection that the uncini 
are uniserial in the abdominal segments of the northern type. 


278 Southern Cross. 


Since Grube’s amplification of the scope of the genus Thelepus 
there has been a tendency to drop the name Neottis Malmgren. It 
can be shown, I think, in several ways that this is ill-advised, but 
for the present it is sufficient to point out that there is a Weottas 
antarctica, McInt.,! and a Thelepus antarclicus, Kbe., which are two 
different species.2 Whenever a species of Thelepus, s. ampl., is 
recorded from any locality, the first question that rises to my mind 
is, “Is it not a Neottis ?” 


13. THELEPUS ANTARCTICUS. 
(Pl. XLV., fig. 6.) 


ay antarcticus, Kinberg, J. G. H., 1866,‘ Annulata Nova, Ofv. Ak. Forh., 
p. 045. 

It is noteworthy that not one of the three collections of Antarctic 
Polychaeta recently examined by Prof. Ehlers? contained this 
highly characteristic species. Not only is it a true 7helepus, s. stv., 
but it is probably co-specific with the northern type, Thelepus 
concinnatus (Fabr.). 

One fragment, comprising the head and thirty setigerous segments, 
upwards of 2 inches long, was dredged off Cape Adare in 8 fathoms, 
January 17, 1900. 

The fore-part of the body or thoracic region comprises approxi- 
mately the first twenty-five setigerous segments, which differ from 
the abdominal segments in their greater girth, but not in respect of 
the parapodial armature. 

A mid-thoracic segment measures 7 mm. crosswise by 2 mm. 
lengthwise ; an abdominal segment, 35 mm. X 4 mm.; so that an 
average abdominal segment is equal to half the width and twice the 
length of a typical thoracic segment. 

The entire dorsal surface is characterised by a rich glandular 
pustulose structure which still preserves a slimy surface. The 


1 Neottis antarctica, McIntosh, 1876, = Neottis spectabilis, Verrill, 1875, 
= Thelepus spectabilis (Verr.), Ehlers, 1897. 

2 Unless I am quite mistaken, M. Malaquin (1894, ‘ Annélides . . . de la goélette 
Melita, Rev. biol. Nord France, VI., p. 418) completely confused them, and I do 
not know what species he had before him. 

3 Ehlers, E., 1897. ‘ Polychaeten.’ Ergebnisse Hamburg. magalhaensischen 
Sammelreise, 11th Lief. 

Ehlers, E., 1900. ‘Magellanische Anneliden der schwedischen Expedition.’ 
Nachr. Ges. Gittingen, Heft 2, p. 206. 

Ehlers, E., 1901. ‘Die Anneliden der Sammlung Plate.’ ‘Fauna Chilensis,’ 
Ed. II., Heft 2, p. 251 (Suppt. V., Zool. Jahrb.), 


Polychaeta. 279 


translucent hypodermal pustules are of varying sizes, irregular in 
their distribution, larger and more abundant than in the specimens 
of Thelepus cincinnatus which I have examined. 

The tori wneinigert commence on the third setigerous segment, 
and thereafter the tori and capillary fascicles co-exist to the end of 
the specimen (and of the body, Kinberg), there being no mutation of 
segments in regard to the distribution of setae, except that the tori 
become more pro-eminent in the abdominal segments, while the 
dorsal capillary fascicles suffer a slight reduction. 

The simple filiform branchiae are more numerous on the second 
than on the third segment, the latter being the first setigerous 
segment. 

The specimen offered certain chaetographical abnormalities. In 
the nineteenth setigerous segment there was no forws on the left side ; 
the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth pharetrae (notopodium and newro- 
podium) of the right side had no antimeres on the left side; finally, 
the twenty-fifth right capillary fascicle was not subtended by the 
usual torus. 

The uncini are uniserial throughout and exactly resemble those 
of Thelepus cincinnatus figured by von Marenzeller,’ being charac- 
terised by the presence of two rows of accessory uncinules at the 
vertex and by a rounded process (mucro) at the distal end of the 
basal portion. 


NICOLEA. 


Malmgren, 1865, op. cit., p. 380. 


Branchiae arborescentes, paria duo; fasciculi setarum capillarium a segmento 
quarto [i.e. first postbranchial] incipientes, in segmentis cirea XV—XVII obvii. 


The relations of this genus to the Phyzelia of Savigny, Quatrefages 
and Kinberg have been dealt with by the Baron de St. Joseph.’ 


14, NICOLEA AGASSIZI. 
(Pl. XLV,, fig. 5.) 


Phyzelia agassizi, Kinhberg, 1866, op. cit., p. 345. 
Nicolea agassizi (Kbg.), Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 182. 


The collection contains five specimens taken off Franklin Island 
in 10 fathoms and Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms. The larger 


1 Marenzeller, F. von, 1884. ‘Zur Kenntniss der adriatischen Anneliden,’ III. 


S.-B. Akad. Wien, Bd. 89, p. 206. 
2 Ann. Sci. Nat. (7th Sér.), T. XVII., p. 180 ef seq. 


280 Southern Cross. 


specimens from Cape Adare measure up to 60 mm. in leneth, of 
which about two-thirds go to the attenuated abdominal region and 
one-third to the tumid thoracic region. 

The tort wneinigert commence on the second setigerous segment. 
The wneint are uniserial at first, but at the seventh uncinigerous 
segment their vertices become turned alternately in opposite 
directions, a condition which is thus described by Kinberg :— 
“ Uncini breves, series simplices fingentes, in segmentis posterioribus 
regionis anterloris antrorsum et retrorsum vergentes alternantes.” 
This alternation of the uncini occurs in ten uncinigerous segments, 
from the seventh to the sixteenth (the last thoracic segment) 
inclusive. 

The wneini are fringed at their vertices by two rows of uncinules, 
those of the front or major series being not less than five in number 
in a transverse row, when seen in frontal view; the distal end of 
the basal portion of the wneimus is obtusely rounded, and there is a 
low protuberance in the concave border of the basal portion. 

The second gill is smaller than the first, and commences to 
branch from the base; the first gill has a stout stipe, the branches, 
which spread out in a more or less palmate manner, occupying the 
upper three-fifths of it. . 

In the intersegmental grooves behind the third and fourth 
capillary fascicles there is a low whitish ovate body which possibly 
has relation to the reproductive system. In one of the larger 
specimens, these bodies have the form of short, stout, subulate, 
cirriform papillae, which occur near the posterior dorsal border of the 
respective capillary fascicles in the intersegmental grooves. 


SUB-FAMILY POLYCIRRIDEA. Malmeren. 


EREUTHO. 


Malmeren, A. J., 1865, ‘ Nordiska Hafs-Annulater,’ Ofv. Ak. Forh., p. 391. 


Pars antica corporis solummodo fasciculis setarum capillarium praedita; pars 
postica toris uncinigeris munita; pinnulae uncinigerae a segmento XIV", 
ze. primo pone segmentum ultimum setigerum incipientes; caput cirris 
tentacularibus longis numerosis obsitum; branchiae nullae. 


The above diagnosis is Malmeren’s, slightly altered so as to 
include a species based upon a single specimen, whose autonomy must 
remain a matter of doubt until more examples are obtained. 


Polychaeta. 281 


15. EREUTHO ANTARCTICA. 
(Pl. XLIL., fig. 6, and Pl. XLVI., fig. 6.) 
Fasciculi setarum capillarium a segmento tertio incipientes in segmentis XI obvii. 


Capillary setae in eleven segments followed by twelve uncini- 
gerous segments ; specimen measuring about 15 mm. in length over 
all, apparently incomplete behind ; posterior three-fifths of thoracic 
region swollen and ovigerous, ova showing through the body-wall ; 
uncini uniserial, confined to abdominal region ; tentacles grooved on 
their inner faces. 

The form of the uncini (Pl. XLVLI,, fig. 6) curiously resembles 
that of the uncini of Polycirrus kergquelensis, McInt.,’ rather than 
those of other species of the genus,” more especially in regard to the 
length of the manubrium, thus indicating the validity of the species. 

One specimen was taken at Cape Adare, 25th January, 1900, washed 
up after a gale. 


ADDENDUM. 


Besides the material obtained in the neighbourhood of Cape 
Adare, there is a very small tube of worms from the Auckland 
Islands. These include a small Nereid, of which the proboscis is not 
extruded, and a Hesionid allied to Oxydromus. As the latter is of 
some interest zoogeographically I append a brief description, naming 
it Oxydromus aucklandicus. 

The antennae and the styles or terminal joints of the biarticulate 
palps are fusiform with filiform acuminate tips; the median antenna 
(tentaculum) is much shorter than the paired antennae and, like them, 
frontal in origin; eyes in a wide trapezium, the anterior larger and 
crescentic ; the tentacular cirri are all lost, only their bases remain- 
ing, and repeated examination only revealed traces of six pairs; the 
dorsal rami of the parapcedia are inseparably connate with the 
cirrophores of the dorsal cirri, as in Podarke viridescens, Ehl., and 
are armed with a few delicate simple setae; ventral setae with 
long graduating falciform appendix with finely serrulate edge and 
bidentate apex; there are forty-two setigerous segments; length 
15 mm.; width over the setae 4 mm., without the setae, 3 mm. 

Locality.—Auckland Islands, one specimen from ten fathoms. 

1 * Challenger’ Rep., Pl. XXVIII, fig. 22. 


2 E.g., Ereutho smitti, Malmgren, 1865, from Spitzbergen, and E. kerguelensis, 
McIntosh, 1885, from Kerguelen. 


282 Southern Cross. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Puate XLI. 
All figures relate to Harmothoé spinosa. 


Fig. 1.—Anterior end of specimen of 43 mm. and 37 segments. (N.B.—The 
fimbriae of the elytra are not shown in the figure.) 

Fig. 2.—Three of the middle segments of another to show extra-marginal as well 
as sub-marginal verrucae. 

Fig. 8.—Posterior end of a third example; total length 22 mm., 37 segments. 

Fig. 4.—Several segments with elytra removed and seen from above, showing 
parasites. 


PLatTE XLII. 


Fig. 1.—Travisia kerguelensis from the left side; the position of the mouth is 
indicated by the dark shading between the first and second setigerous segments. 

Fig. 2.—Portion of lateral body-wall of same showing areolation of the epidermis, 
the laminated branchia behind the dorsal fascicle, the lateral organ (Sectenorgan) 
between the dorsal and ventral fascicles and the segmental orifice below. 

Fig. 83.—Malmgrenia crassicirris. Several segments seen frum below showing 
thickened ventral cirri and pigment markings. 

Fig. 4—Same. Anterior end. The second elytron on the left side of the figure 
is really the third, the second being lost from the specimen. 

Fig. 5.—Head of Phyllodoce madeirensis with proboscis partially extended. 

Fig. 6.—EHreutho antarctica from the left side. 


Puate XLITI. 


Fig. 1.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, var. fullo, x Zeiss, 4D. 

Fig. 2.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, var. typica, x 4D. (The sub-apical 
denticle is represented by a shoulder.) 

Fig. 3.-—Tip of ventral seta of H. crossetensis, var. acuminata, x 4D. 

Fig. 4.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, sub-var. lagiscoides, x 3p. (The 
rows of setulae commence far down as in 3.) 

Fig. 5.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, another specimen. x 3p. (The rows 
of setulae commence high up as in 2, but the bidentation of the tip is obsolete, being 
indicated by a convex limbus or border somewhat resembling No. 38). 

Fig. 6.—Elytral spine of /7. spinosa, sub-var. lagiscoides, X 38D. 

Fig. 7.—Hamate boss from elytra of a specimen apparently intermediate between 
var. fullo and var. typica, X 8D. 

Fig. 8.—Head of //. spinosa (drawn from specimen dredged off Cape Adare in 
cix fathoms, December 16th, 1899; thirty-eight segments, all elytra, lost; in this 
case the tentacular cirri are unequal, in others they are equal); same individual 
as No. 5. 

Fig. 9.—Prostomium with tentaculum and antennae of H. crossetensis, var. 
acuminata. 

Fig. 10.—Portion of elytral margin of same, showing unequal acuminate spines 
and fimbriae. 

Fig. 11.—Portion of an elytral scabrilla of H. crossetensis (McInt.) from the 
Crozet Islands, showing the lobed tip (var. laciniata). 


Polychaeta. 283 


PLATE XLIV. 


Fig. 1.—Prostomium with ceratophore and antennae, and first elytrophoral 


segment of Gattyana cristata. The first dorsal crest has a rounded knob-like 
appearance. 


Fig, 2.—Dorsal penicillate seta of G. cristata, x 3c. 
Fig. 3.—Ventral seta of same, X 3A. 

Fig. 4.-—Crenulate scabrilla of elytra of same, x 3c. 
Fig. 5.—Head of Malmgrenia crassicirris. 

Fig. 6.—Ventral seta of same, x 38D. 

Fig. 7.—Seta of Phyllodoce madetrensis, x 3c. 

Fig. 8.—Seta of Vanadis antarctica, x 3d. 


Pirate XLV. 
Fig. 1—Head of Typosyllis hyalina with proboscis extruded; ¢ = tooth seen 


through dorsal wall of proboscis. 


Fig. 2.—An anterior segment (about 19th) of same to show the pattern of 


pigmentation. 


it 


Fig. 3.—Dorsal cirrus of 19th segment of same. 

Fig. 4.—Seta from one of the anterior ventral fascicles of Arteta marginata, X 8D. 
Fig, 5.—Uncinus of Nicolea agassizi, X 8D. 

Fig. 6.—Uncinus of Thelepus antarcticus, x 3D. 


Riga) XenAVAle 


Fig. 1—Anterior end of Vanadis antarctica (¢) from below; / = lens; 


2,3 = tentacular cirri; 7. s. = receptacula seminis. 


3S: 


Fig. 2,—Coronary papillae on the extruded proboscis of same. 
Fig, 8.—Anterior end of Rhodine loveni from above. 

Fig. 4.—Nineteenth setigerous segment of same from above. 
Fig. 5.—Uncinus of same, x 3D. 

Fig. 6.—Uncinus of Hreutho antarctica, x 4D. 


284 Southern Cross. 


XID Gary hae 


By Ay, SHPPGEY? Miva: 


PRIAPULOIDEA. 


PRIAPULUS CAUDATUS. Lam. 
(For early synonomy, see Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1868, p. 104.) 


? Priapulus tuberculato-spinosus. Baird, op. cit., p. 106. 
Priapulus tubereulato-spinosus. De Guerne.! 


Two specimens of this species were found washed upon the 
beach at Cape Adare. The larger one was injured anteriorly, the 
smaller measured 6°5 cm. in total length, to which the tail contri- 
buted 1:5 cm. It is thus recorded for the first time from the shores 
of the Antarctic land. I follow Fischer in regarding these Antarctic 
forms as belonging to the species P. caudatus, Lam. The species 
seems widely distributed in the southern hemisphere. Dr. Fischer’s 
specimen came from Navarin Island.2 M. de Guerne records the 
species from Orange Bay, from the Straits of Magellan, and from the 
Falkland Islands, where indeed a specimen had been obtained by 
the Antarctic Expedition under Sir James Ross,? and Dr. 
Michaelsen* has described and figured two examples from South 
Georgia. 

The distribution of this species is a striking case of what is 
termed the phenomenon of bipolarity. P. caudatus occurs along 
the coasts of Greenland, Norway, and Great Britain, and in both 
the North and Baltic Seas, but, except for two specimens referred to 

1 ¢Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn,’ 1882-1883, p.G.9. Paris, 1891. 


9 


2 «Ergebnisse der Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammelreise.’ Gephyreen, p. 6. 
(1896.) 

3 Baird, P. Zool. Soc., London, 1868, p. 106. 

4 Jahrb. Hamburg. Anst., VI. Jahr., 1888, p. 80. 


Gephyrea. 285 


in full in Dr. Michaelsen’s article recorded from the Mediterranean 
and Indian Oceans, the species has not been met with again until we 
reach a latitude of about 50°S. The genus too seems also bipolar 
in its distribution. J. bicawdatus lives in the North Sea and Arctic 
Ocean, and is represented in habits and its two tails by M. de 
Guerne’s Priapuloides australis from the neighbourhood of the 
Magellan Straits. P. glandifer, Ehlers, and P. brevicaudatus, Ehlers, 
are, in the opinion of Koren and Danielsen’ and of Dr. Michaelsen, 
not specifically distinct from P. caudatus, and in fact Professor 
Ehlers’ himself regarded these species as requiring confirmation.* 


Mr. Shipley was also good enough to determine three specimens 
of Phascolosoma capsiforme (Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1868, 
p. 83) from Cape Adare, 20-24 fathoms.—F. J. B. 


XIV. NEMATODA. 


Dr. von Linstow has been so good as to examine the few round 
worms in the collection. They all belong to JLeptosomatum 
antarcticum (see v. Linstow, JB. Hamburg. wiss. Anstalt IX. 
(1892); 2; p. 59. 


NOV OSE ODA; 


Dr. von Linstow is also my authority for recording Bothriocephalus 
tectus (t.c., p. 73) from Ross’s Seal. 


1 «Fauna littoralis Norwegiae.’ III. Heft. Bergen, 1877. 

2 Feitschr. wiss. Zool., XI., 1862, p. 205. 

’ Tt is not Mr. Shipley’s fault that this report did not appear before Feb. 15th, 
1902, when were published Mr. Storikow’s remarks on the geographical distribution 
of some Priapulids (Zool. Anzeig., xxv. p. 155).—F. J. B 


286 Southern Cross. 


X Vidi PE Oo 7 Oe: 
By R. KIRKPATRICK. 


THE Polyzoa obtained from the Antarctic region comprise eight 
species and one variety, one species being new. The seven known. 
species have all been found before in the Southern hemisphere, 
either off Australia, Kerguelen Island, or Cape Horn. The specimens 
encrust seaweed and tubes of Spirorbis antarctica. The list of 
species is as follows :— 


1. Porella hyadesi, Jullien. 

2. Inversiula nutrix, Jullien. 

3. Schizoporella hyalina (Linn.), normal form. 

A. - 35 3 var. discreta, Busk. 
a eatont, Busk. 
. Smittia landsborovii, Johnston. 

. Idmonea organizans, VOrbigny. 
. Lichenopora canaliculata, Busk. 
. Alcyonidium flabelliforme, sp. n. 


DW 1S? Ore Co 


PORELLA HYADESI. 


1888. Porella hyadesi, Jullien, ‘ Mission Scientifique Cap Horn.’  Zoologie. 
Tom. VI., ‘Bryozoaires,’ p. 56, Pl. III., fig. 5. 


The two specimens in the present collection differ from the 
description and figure by Jullien in having a wall-like prolongation 
on each side of the orifice; but this feature is much more pronounced 
in one specimen than in the other; in ocecial cells the lateral walls 
fuse with the mucronate avicularian cell and with the ocecia to form 
a square secondary orifice. There is a specimen from Port Phillip 
in the Busk Collection labelled (wrongly, I think) Porella rostrata 
(Hincks), which differs from Jullien’s type only in having minute 
rounded mammillae on the surface. 

Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, encrusting seaweed. 

Distribution.—Port Philip, Victoria; Tierra del Fuego; Cape 
Adare. 


Polyzoa. 287 


INVERSIULA NUTRIX. 


1888. Inversiula nutrix, Jullien, ‘Mission Scientifique Cap Horn.’ Zoologie. 
Tom. VI., ‘Bryozoaires,’ p. 44, Pl. IV., fig. 8. 


The single example of this species encrusts the coils of a specimen 
of Spirorbis antarctica. The median pore differs slightly from that of 
the specimens from Cape Horn figured by Jullien (Bryozoa, Cape 
Horn, p. 44, Pl. IV., fig. 8) in being orbicular rather than semi-lunar, 
and in having three or four denticles instead of only two. The 
operculum (0°192 mm. in long. diameter) has a thickened rim and a 
shagreened surface. 

The bosses are probably degenerate avicularia; incineration 
reveals oval depressions for mandibles. No ocecia are present. 

Locality.—Cape Adare, 10 fathoms. 

Distribution—Cape Horn ; Cape Adare. 


SCHIZOPORELLA HYALINA. 


1766. Cellepora hyalina, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., Hd. XIL, p. 1286. 
1880. Schizoporella hyalina, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol., p. 271. 


Several patches occur, encrusting seaweed. 
Locality— Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. 
Distribution.—Cosmopolitan. 


SCHIZOPORELLA HYALINA, var. discrcta. 


1854. Lepralia discreta, Busk, Brit. Mus. Cat., p. 85, Pl. CI., figs. 3, 4. 


1879. Lepralia hyalina, var. disereta, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLX VIII. 
pa loi 


1889. Schizoporella hyalina, var. discreta, Jelly, ‘Syn. Cat Bryozoa,’ p. 228. 


Patches encrust seaweed. 

Locality — Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. 

Distribution.—Falkland Islands; Fuegia; New Zealand (Brit. 
Mus. Coll.); Swain’s Bay, Kerguelen ; Cape Adare; California. 


SCHIZOPORELLA EATONI. 


1879. Lepralia eatoni, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLXVIIL, p. 196, Pl. X., 
figs. 7, 8. 


1889. Schizoporella eatoni, Jelly, Syn. Cat. Mar. Bryozoa, p. 226. 


288 Southern CYOoss. 


A prominent umbo is present on the front surface of each 
zocecium, and at a little distance from the umbo is a double row of 
pores separated by a sharp line. A well-marked shield-like area is 
marked off on the front of each cell. The pores are semi-circular 
and sharp-edged in the younger, but square and with crenulated edges 
in older cells; the pores are not continued round the orifice, but stop 
short at the ends of the proximal edge; a row of pores is present, 
however, round the base of the ocecium. 

The stout oral spines, usually four in number, are articulated at 
the base. 

The double row of pores is present in the type specimen from 
Kerguelen, but they are not nearly so apparent or well defined. 

Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, on seaweed. 

Distribution.—Kerguelen Island ; Cape Adare. 


SMITTIA LANDSBOROVI. 


1849. Lepralia landsborovii, Johnston, Brit. Zooph., Ed. II., p. 510. 
1880. Smittia landsborovii, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol., p. 341. 


A small avicularium with spathulate mandible is sunk deep in 
the peristome, the secondary orifice of which is clithridiate and flush 
with the front surface of the zocecium. An umbo is present on each 
cell just below the orifice, and also on the ocecia. 

Locality.—Cape Adare, 18 fathoms, encrusting Spirorbis antarctica. 

Distribution.—Arctic Regions, Kara Sea, Jan Mayen, East 
Greenland ; Norway ; Great Britain; Florida; Australia; Falkland 
Islands ; Cape Adare. 


IDMONEA ORGANIZANS. 


1839. Tubulipora organizans, d’Orbigny, Voy. Amér. Merid., Vol. V., 
Part 1V., p. 19, Pl. 1X., figs. 1-3. 


1879. Tubulipora organizans, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLXVIII., p. 198, 
Pl. X., figs. 20-25. 


This species is represented by a minute fragment of a colony 
encrusting seaweed. The zocecia are arranged here, as in the 
Kerguelen specimen, in regular alternating series, with about four to 
eight zocecia in each row. 

Locality. —Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, on seaweed. 

Distribution.—Kerguelen Island ; Falkland Islands ; Cape Adare. 


Polyzoa. 289 


LICHENOPORA CANALICULATA. 


1879. Discoporella canaliculata, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLAVIII., p. 199, 
Pl. X., figs. 12-14. 
1889. Lichenopora canaliculata, Jelly, Syn. Cat. Mar. Bryozoa, p. 154. 


The specimen forms a circular disc, 3°25 mm.in diameter. In 
the centre is a space clear of zocecia and with the cancelli closed, 
but with a thin walled expanded funicular spout—the orifice of the 
ocecium. . 

The orifice in complete cells is bi-denticulate, and the fillet, 
which is a well-marked feature on the type specimen from Kerguelen, 
is here often reduced to a mere ridge. 

Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, encrusting seaweed. 

Iistribution.—Kerguelen Island; Cape Adare. 


ALCYONIDIUM FLABELLIFORME. 


Zoarium forming a flabelliform bilaminate expansion, spreading 
out from a short sub-cylindrical stem. Colour olive-brown. Texture 
soft and fleshy ; surface smooth. Zocecia polygonal, about 0°75 x 
0:55 mm., in circular groups, each group being composed of six or 
seven zocecia arranged concentrically round a small central zocecium 
0-2 mm. in diameter. 

Locality—Cape Adare; washed up on the beach. 

The new species is nearly related to A. flustroides (Busk), 
obtained by the ‘ Challenger’ from Station 142, south of Cape of Good 
Hope, 150 fathoms. In both species the zoarium is bilaminate, but 
the form of the colony in each case is very different; again, in 
Busk’s species the zocecia are much more elongated and are arranged 
in irregular longitudinal lines. 

The solitary specimen is 14 cm. in height, 12 cm. in breadth, and 
1 to 1°5 mm. in thickness. The stalk is 1 cm. in height and 0-9 em 
in diameter. The surface, which is probably quite smooth in the 
living animal, is much wrinkled by the action of alcohol. The 
margin is rounded, but deeply incised in three places, thus giving 
rise to two smaller laminae growing in nearly the same plane as, and 
partly apposed to, the main lamina. On holding the specimen up to 
the light the zocecia and “brown bodies” are clearly visible. The 
orifices of the zocecia are flush with the general surface, and barely 
distinguishable. The tentacles appear to be about fourteen in 


number. 
U 


290 Southern Cross. 


XV 1 ASN Ta O 7a 


ALCYONARIA. 


CLAVULARIA. 


PAR i Dr LOUIS: ROULE: 


CLAVULARIA FRANKLINIANA. 
(Plate XLVIL., Figs. 1-3c.) 


Habitat—Tle Franklin, par 10 brasses. 

Diagnose.—Colonies a stolons membraniformes, irréguliers, courts. 
Zooides assez rapprochés par leurs bases, volumineux, mesurant a 
Vétat de contraction jusqu’a 25 millimetres de longueur sur 4 a 5 
millimetres de diametre. Paroi de la colonne mince, assez trans- 
parente sur les zooides contractés pour laisser discerner les cloisons 
internes; les espaces intermédiaires se montrent comme huit bandes 
paralléles, plus foncées. Tentacules courts, mesurant 4 a 5 milli- 
metres de longueur; 9 a 10 branches latérales, assez courtes, de 
chaque cdté. Spicules tentaculaires mesurant de 70 a 200 w de 
longueur, couverts d’épines minimes. Spicules de la région colum- 
naire sous-tentaculaire nombreux, serrés, mesurant de 300 a 400 uw de 
longueur, couverts d’épines assez fortes. Spicules de la région 
columnaire basilaire et des stolons mesurant de 250 a 300 mw de 
longueur, couverts de fortes épines parfois bilobées et trilobées. 

Les espéces connues du genre Clavularia sont nombreuses. 
Walther May les énumere dans son travail récent (‘ Beitrage zur 
Systematik und Chorologie der Aleyonaceen’ : Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir 
Naturwissenschaft, 1900). Hickson a déecrit voici peu plusieurs 


A nthozoa. 291 


types de Vhémisphere austral (“A Revision of the genera of the 
Aleyonaria Stolonifera’: Transactions of the Zoological Society of 
London, 1895). Maleré cela, je n’ai pu rapporter a aucune d’elles, avec 
précision, les échantillons que j’ai étudiés. Force m’est de créer avec 
ces derniers une espéce nouvelle, au risque de faire double emploi 
avec des formes déja observées par les auteurs, mais décrites 
insuffisamment. 

En pareil cas, les figures explicites importent surtout.  Afin 
d’éviter de mettre, 4 mon tour, quelque obscurité dans ma descrip- 
tion, afin de permettre aussi une identification possible, j’ai pris le 
parti de dessiner avec soin les caracteres saillants exprimés par la 
diagnose, et je vais 2 nouveau insister sur eux. 

Les colonies, du moins celles que j’ai eues a ma disposition, se 
composent dun petit nombre de zooides, une dizaine en moyenne, 
rapprochés par leurs bases, et rayonnant en dehors d’elles comme les 
fleurs d’un capitule. Ces groupes s’attachent a de menus objets, 
brins dalgues ou autres, Les individus d’une méme colonie n’ont 
point une taille identique; les uns mesurent parfois le double des 
autres, et je n’ai observé en cela aucune disposition réguliere. Les 
plus grands comptent 25 millimetres de longueur sur 5 millimetres 
de diamétre. Les échantillons, conservés dans l’alcool, étaient tres 
contractés. Les dimensions des individus vivants sont donc plus 
considérables de beaucoup. Ces Clavulaires se signalent ainsi par 
la grande taille de leurs zooides, et par leur faible quantité dans 
chaque colonie. 

La paroi de la colonne est fort mince. Les zooides vivants 
doivent étre d’une grande transparence. Méme contractés par 
laction de l’alcool servant a les conserver, et rendus opaques, les 
espaces interseptaires tranchent en sombre. Ils dessinent huit 
bandes longitudinales, paralléles, qui parcourent la colonne entiére de 
la base au sommet. 

Les tentacules sont assez courts ; souvent leur état de contraction 
est tel quwils se laissent a peine discerner. Les plus grands mesurent 
4 a 5 millimetres de longueur. Leur forme est celle d’un cone 
aplati, 4 large base. Chacune des deux rangées de leurs branches 
latérales comprend huit a dix éléments. Les branches sont courtes, 
et sensiblement cylindriques. Les plus élevées, voisines du sommet 
du tentacule, sont moins longues que les autres, et aussi larges. Un 
espace encore considérable sépare ces branches terminales, au nombre 
de deux ou de trois, de celles qui sont situées plus bas. Ces 
derniéres se placent souvent, dans les deux rangées, a des niveaux 


différents, et ne se font pas rigoureusement face. 
u 2 


292 Southern Cross. 


Les spicules des tentacules, assez nombreux, surtout dans la 
région basilaire de ces organes, sont tres variables. [1s ne se ressem- 
blent que par leurs épines, abondantes et petites. Is different par 
leurs formes et leurs dimensions. Les uns sont gros et courts, a 
peine deux fois plus longs que larges. D’autres sont courts et fort 
ininces. Les plus nombreux ont l’aspect de baguettes échinulées, 
dont la longueur égalerait six a dix fois la largeur. Les dimensions 
en longueur oscillent entre 70 et 200 p. 

Les spicules de la moitié supérieure de la colonne, abondants et 
serrés, ont une allure plus uniforme. Ils ressemblent a des baguettes 
eylindriques, faiblement amincies a leurs deux extrémités, dont la 
longueur égale,en moyenne, douze a quinze fois la largeur. Certains, 
plus rares que les précédents, sont plus gros, plus courts, et possedent 
une extrémité élargie; dans ces spicules en massue, la longueur 
(300 a 400 w) vaut, en moyenne, sept a huit fois la largeur. Les 
épines sont assez fortes; elles ont V’aspect de mamelons saillants, 
largement coniques, tournés en divers sens. 

Les spicules de la moitié inférieure de la colonne et ceux des 
stolons ont des dispositions moins variées. Leur forme est celle de 
batonnets noueux, tellement leurs épines sont grandes et fortes ; 
plusieurs de ces dernieres sont bilobées. A cet égard, une pro- 
eression réguliere se manifeste des parties supérieures aux zones 
basilaires de individu: les spicules tentaculaires ont les épines les 
plus petites, presque comparables a des granules superficiels ; les 
spicules du sommet de la colonne portent des épines plus longues ; 
enfin les spicules inférieurs ont les épines les plus grosses. Chez ces 
derniers, la longueur mesure huit a dix fois la largeur; elle compte 
en moyenne 250 a 300 ym. 

La Clavularia Frankliniana se rapproche surtout de trois especes 
connues et décrites : 1° Cl. inflata, Schenk (Abh. Senck. Ges., XXIII. 
(1896), p. 48), et sa variété Cl. luzontana, W. May (Jenaische Zeit- 
schrift fir Naturwissenchaft, 1900), de Ternate et de Luzon; 2° C7. 
rosea, Stider, de Kerguelen (Monatsbericht der koniglich preussischen 
Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1878, p. 633); 3° Cl. elongata, Stider 
et Wright, des Agores, par 1000 brasses (‘Report of “ Challenger,” ’ 
vol. 31, 1889, p. 257). La Cl. Frankliniana differe de la premiere 
par ses spicules de forme un peu différente et de taille plus restreinte ; 
de la deuxieme par ses zooides plus grands et groupés d’une autre 
maniere ; de la troisieme par l’allure dissemblable de ses spicules. 


A nthozoa. 293 


EXPLICATION DES DESSINS. 


Fig. 1.—Une colonie de Clavularia Frankliniana. Grossissement, 2/1. 
Fig. 2.—Un tentacule. Gross., 6/1. 

Fig. 3a.—Spicule des tentacules. Gross., 3800/1. 

Fig. 3b.—Spicule du sommet de la colonne. Gross., 800/1. 

Fig. 8c.—Spicule de la base de la colonne. Gross., 00/1. 


ALCYONIUM PAEHSSLERT. 
By SYDNEY J. HICKSON, F.R.S., Owens College, Manchester. 


Three specimens and a fragment of an A/eyoniuwm were sent to me. 

The largest is 40 mm. in height and about 55 mm. in greatest 
breadth. 

The spicules of the anthocodiz are long narrow spindles 
0:3-0°4 mm. in length; the spicules of the ccenenchym are clubs 
0°15 mm. in length and short spindles 0*2 mm. in length. 

The colour of the spicules is pale yellow and of the colony orange. 

The specimens should be included in W. May’s species Aleyoniwim 
paessleri, from Smyth Sound (see Hamburger Magalhaensischen 
Sammelreise, Alcyonarien, 1899, p. 6), but differ from the types in 
their orange colour. 

They were taken in 24 fathoms off Franklin Island. 


204 Southern Cross. 


XV Te 2 CaN eagle 


WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THEIR PECULIAR 
BROOD CHAMBERS. 


By JOSEPH A. CLUBB, M.Sc., 


(Plates XLVIII.-LII.) 


A SMALL collection of Actinians was made by the ‘Southern Cross’ 
Expedition of 1899-1900. All the specimens were collected off 
Cape Adare, South Victoria Land, the winter quarters of the 
expedition, and were dredged at a depth of from 20 to 30 fathoms, in 
water having a temperature ranging from 28°8° Fahr. in November, 
1899, to 292° Fahr. in January, 1900. The preservatives used were 
formaline and spirit, and the specimens in the former fluid were in 
better preservation than in the latter, where, owing to inefficient 
corks to the bottles, the volatile spirit had evaporated, leaving a fluid 
which could not be called preservative. 

Although there are upwards of sixty specimens, it is somewhat 
remarkable that there appear to be but two closely allied species, and, 
as the females of both possess special brood chambers, they are of great 
biological interest. I wish here to record my thanks to Professor 
Jeffrey Bell for placing the collection in my hands, and thus 
affording me the opportunity of investigating them, for the large 
number of specimens has enabled me to work out in some detail the 
appearance and structure of these remarkable chambers, which are 
apparently peculiar to Arctic and Antarctic species. As the brood 
chambers are almost identical in both species, | have appended this 
part of the work after the description of the species. 

The two species belong to the family Bunodactide,* and, while 
possessing the typical hexamerous arrangement of mesenteries and 

1 T have adopted the suggestion of Prof. Verrill (7, II., p. 42) that, as the name 
Bunodes is preoccupied for a genus of Eurypteroids, the actinian genus Bunodes 


should be changed to Bunodactis, and in accordance with the usual custom the 
family name Bunodidx becomes bunodactide. 


A ctiniae. 295 


tentacles, the character of the sphincter muscle in both species is 
more in accordance with that of Urticina crassicornis, the paradigm * 
of the genus Urticina, than with that of Bunodactis verrucosa, the 
paradigm of the genus Bunodactis. I consider the character of the 
sphincter of more importance than the pentamerous or decamerous ” 
arrangement of the tentacles and mesenteries, and am of opinion 
that this latter character should not be retained as diagnostic of the 
genus Urticina, as suggested by Mr. Haddon (3 p. 445), and I have 
therefore placed the two new Antarctic species under the genus 
Urticina. 


FamMILty BUNODACTIDA. 
Urticina suleata. 


External characters.—The specimens are all greatly contracted, 
and in most cases the oral disc and tentacles are entirely hidden. 
The colour of the preserved specimens is a dirty brown with a 
distinctly green cast. There is no record on the collectors’ labels as 
to colour of this species when living. The column is soft to the 
touch and is covered with verruce, which in the contracted state of 
the specimens are closely packed together. They are largest in the 
equatorial zone and slightly diminish in size above and _ below. 
There are forty-eight vertical rows, corresponding in position with the 
inter- and intra-mesenteric spaces. 

In female specimens a distinct modification of the upper portion 
of the column is noticeable. The body-wall in its upper third is less 
firm to the touch, thinner, and the verruce are almost obliterated by 
longitudinal furrows which run from a well-marked constriction * 
(fig. 1) to the parapet, where they are deepened and intensified in 
the more contracted specimens. Male specimens also show this 
modification of the body-wall, but in a much less marked degree. 

On some of the specimens gravel and sand particles are still 
adherent to the verruce. In the healthy living condition, doubtless, 
a continuous layer of foreign particles is formed around the column. 

The foot disc is distinct and muscular. 

The largest specimens measure 5 cm. in height, 5 em. in diameter 
at widest part, and 3 cm. diameter of foot disc. 

1 [The author prefers this word to the more generally used “type.”—F. J. B.] 

2 Prof. Verrill states (7, 1V., p. 216) that he has found many specimens of 
Urticina crassicornis hexamerous, both as to tentacles and mesenteries, and other 
workers have shown that whenever it was possible to examine a large number of 
specimens of the same species a great amount of variation existed in this respect. 


$ This constriction marks the zone of invagination of the body-wall to form the 
‘brood chambers ” (see p. 301). 


296 Southern Cross. 


Tentacles.—These are forty-eight in number, in four cycles, 
6+6+12+4 24. Fig. 8 diagrammatically represents the arrange- 
ment of the cycles of tentacles in relation to the inter- and intra- 
mesenteric spaces. It will be seen the older and inner three cycles 
(6 + 6 + 12) open from the intra-mesenteric spaces, while the outer 
marginal and youngest cycle opens from the inter-mesenteric spaces. 
In most cases there is a distinct longitudinal grooving, and transverse 
sections of the tentacles show in well-marked instances that the meso- 
glceea participates in the formation of the grooves (fig. 3), although 
this is not always the case. The muscles of the tentacles are ecto- 
dermal and are well developed. 

(Esophagus.—This extends fully three-fourths the length of the 
retracted column. Two well-marked siphonoglyphs are present at 
opposite angles. 

Celenteron and Mesenteries—There are twenty-four pairs of 
mesenteries in three cycles, 6 + 6 + 12, all complete. There is no 
trace even in the largest specimens of a fourth cycle. The presence 
of a cycle of tentacles communicating with the inter-mesenteric 
spaces suggests the final and adult condition of mesenteries and 
tentacles. 

Two pairs of directive mesenteries are present in the usual 
relation with the siphonoglyphs. All the mesenteries except the 
directives are fertile. 

One variation from the typical arrangement of tentacles and 
mesenteries was dissected. The specimen, which possesses brood 
chambers containing embryos, had but eighteen pairs of mesenteries 
and thirty-six tentacles, and the two pairs of directives were 
asymmetrically placed, being separated from one another on the one 
side by ten pairs and on the other by six pairs of mesenteries. 

The longitudinal muscles of the mesenteries are very well deve- 
loped, and form large swellings which stand out prominently from 
the surface and are quite distinctly seen with the naked eye even in 
young specimens. (The longitudinal muscles on the mesenteries of 
embryos taken from the brood chambers are surprisingly well deve- 
loped) (see fig. 20). Transverse sections of the muscle of the adult 
specimen show (fig. 5) a compact mass of mesoglceal supporting 
lamella, many greatly branched and all invested with muscle fibres. 
The parieto-basilar muscle (fig. 5, p.b.m.) is seen arising from the 
mesentery some distance from the body wall, as the section is taken 
rather low down near the foot disc. The arrangement of the 
muscles on the mesenteries is quite regular—the longitudinal 
muscles on the sides facing the intra-mesenteric spaces, and the 


A ctiniae. 207 


parieto-basilar muscle on the sides facing the inter-mesenteric spaces, 
in all except the directives, where the arrangement is reversed. 

Sphincter Muscle.—There is a strongly circumscribed endodermal 
sphincter, which projects into the ccelenteron and is constricted off 
from the body-wall to such an extent that in transverse section the 
connection appears but a mere stalk (fig. 2). As here shown it is 
oval in section, but doubtless it may vary in shape with the degree 
of contraction. There is a single median supporting trunk of 
mesogloeal connective tissue springing from the mesoglcea of the 
body-wall, from which radiating lamelle arise covered with an 
investing layer of muscle fibrillee (fig. 2, m.). 

Body-wall—sSections of the body-wall show the mesoglcea com- 
paratively thin, especially in the upper portion. There are, however, 
strong circular endodermal muscles present, supported by mesogloeal 
lamelle (fig. 4) which are often branched. These strong circular 
muscles of the body-wall form one of the principal characters dis- 
tinguishing this species from the following one, where the corre- 
sponding endodermal muscles are much feebler, supported by short, 
simple, mesogloeal lamelle, and where, however, the mesogloea itself 
is thicker and firmer, thus compensating for the weaker muscles 
(fig. 9). 

Lrood Chambers..—Each adult female possesses peculiar brood 
chambers completely separated from the ccelenteron and formed by 
invaginations of the body-wall from a zone completely surrounding 
the body, about one-third of the distance below the parapet (fig. 1). 
Usually four embryos are present, and in later stages of development 
they form conspicuous prominences symmetrically placed around the 
column. In some instances the contained embryos are so large 
that in contraction the whole of the oral dise and tentacles of the 
mother, as well as the upper third of the column itself, are with- 
drawn so as to lie below the level of the ridge formed by the 
contained embryos. 

Halbitat.—Dredged from a gravelly bottom in 20-24 fathoms of 
water, off Cape Adare, South Victoria Land. 


Urticina carlgreni. 


As one of the distinctive characters of this as well as the 
preceding species is the presence of “brood chambers,’ I have 
ventured to name this species after the Swedish naturalist, Oskar 
Carlgren of Stockholm, whose valuable work on the Actinozoa has 


! For more detailed account, see p. 299. 


298 Southern Cross. 


added so much to our knowledge of the group; it was he who 
in 1893 (1 p. 231) first called attention to the presence, in some 
Arctic actinians then under observation, of special “ Brutriumen ” 
quite distinct and separated from the ecelenteron. 

External characters.—Like the preceding species all the specimens 
are greatly contracted. The colour, when living, as noted on 
collectors’ labels, was light red (large specimens) and white (small 
specimens), but all trace had disappeared in the preserved specimens. 
Verruce present, arranged in forty-eight vertical rows, but smaller 
and less distinct than in U. sulcata. There is also less modification 
of the upper portion of the column, but there is a tendency to 
form similar longitudinal furrows, although the body-wall retains 
its firmness and is no thinner than the lower portion. Some 
of the specimens still retained foreign particles adhering to the 
verrucae (fig. 6). 

This species is somewhat taller and more slender than U. suleata. 
The largest individual measured 6 cm. in height and but 3°4 cm. in 
breadth at its widest part (fig. 6). 

Tentacles.—Similar in arrangement and number to U. sulcata 
(6 +6 + 12 + 24) (fig. 8). There is a slight tendency observable, 
in some individuals only, to a longitudinal grooving, but in no case 
have I observed that the mesoglcea participates. 

sophayus.—The cesophageal wall is much corrugated, and the 
cesophagus extends into the ccelenteron for a considerable distance. 
Two well-marked siphonoglyphs are present. 

Colenteron and Mesenteries—There are twenty-four pairs of 
complete mesenteries, including two pairs of directives in relation 
with the siphonoglyphs. All the mesenteries except the directives 
are fertile. The longitudinal muscles are well developed and are 
seen as distinct swellings on the faces of the mesenteries. Fig. 10 
gives details of structure in transverse section, also showing structure 
of ovary (ov.) and mesenterial filament (m.f.). The parieto-basilar 
muscle (p.b.m.) is large and distinct. 

Sphincter.—The sphincter muscle is strongly circumscribed, 
endodermal, and projects as a strong band into the ccelenteron. 
In transverse section (fig. 7) the main supporting mesoglceal trunk 
is seen to break up into two secondary branches, a small one near 
the base and a large one running the length of the muscle. From 
each of these main trunks mesoglceal outgrowths radiate, supporting 
the muscle fibres. 

Body-wall.—The body-wall is thick and firm to the touch. The 
mesoglcea forms a stout supporting lamella (fig. 9), but the circular 


A ctiniae. 299 


endodermal muscles are feeble, supported by short simple outgrowths 
of the mesoglcea, and contrast greatly with those of U. suwleata. 

Brood Chambers.—The adult females possess brood chambers 
similar in position and appearance to those of U. suleata, except that 
the contained embryos do not form such distinct prominences on 
the body-wall, nor are there any instances where the oral disc, 
tentacles and upper third of the column have sunk by contraction 
below the level of the top of the brood chambers. One individual 
has been preserved in a very interesting stage, showing one of the 
embryos partly out of the brood chamber, and two others visible from 
the outside, the opening to the chamber extending round almost half 
of the circumference of the column (figs. 18 and 19). Each individual 
in this species usually contained six embryos. 

fabitat.—Dredged from a gravelly bottom in 20—28 fathoms of 
water, off Cape Adare, South Victoria Land. 

Several of the specimens dissected had a single specimen of a 
species of Amphipoda among the retracted tentacles, apparently 
commensal. My friend Mr. Alfred O. Walker, to whom I submitted 
it, informs me it is a new species of Jassa—J, goniamerus. 


THE APPEARANCE AND STRUCTURE OF THE BrooD CHAMBERS 
DISTINCT FROM THE C@LENTERON. 


In the year 1869 Professor Verrill (6 p. 490-492) described in 
two species of Actinia (Phellia arctica, Verrill, and Epiactis prolifera, 
Verrill) from the Arctic seas, a series of well-defined pits scattered 
over the surface of the body-wall, in which the eggs are retained 
until hatched, when the young embryos are provided with tentacles. 
Later, in 1899, he described some additional species (7, V. p. 375) 
belonging to the Bunodactidw, also possessing these peculiar pits, 
and gives figures. Each pit is formed by a hollow in the mesogloea 
into which the ectoderm is invaginated. 

In 1893 Dr. Carlgren published a preliminary announcement, 
“Uber das Vorkommen von Brutriumen bei Aktinien” (1 p. 231). 
Here he described two types of brood chamber: (1) when the 
ecelenteron itself acts as such—a condition of things which 
obtains in some British species; and (2) the formation of pit-like 
depressions generally scattered on the lower part of the column. 
These latter apparently are similar structures to those described by 
Verrill in 1869 and 1899. But Carlgren goes on to describe how 


300 Southern Cross. 


these pit-like depressions, each containing an embryo and involving 
at first only an invagination of the ectoderm into a hollow in the 
mesoglcea, may be gradually enlarged, by the growth of the embryo 
earrying the body-wall inwards, invaginating all three layers—the 
ectoderm, mesoglcea and endoderm, and forming cavities lying 
completely within the column. He gives a figure (1 p. 237) 
showing a section through such a chamber containing an embryo, 
measuring from 1 to 1°5 mm. in diameter, and illustrates the 
condition of the invaginated ectoderm, mesoglcea and endoderm 
forming the wall of the cavity. The figure also shows the opening 
to the exterior, and that the chamber is completely separated from the 
ecelenteron. In the general relation of the wall-layers this chamber 
ereatly resembles the brood chambers, about to be described, of the two 
species from the Antarctic, but is of very much smaller dimensions. 

Professor Verrill’s specimens do not appear to exhibit this further 
development of the ectodermal pits into sac-like invaginations of the 
whole body-wall, involving all three layers, such as Carlgren describes, 
although the external appearance of the specimens figured by each 
author are very similar and certainly suggest the same structures. 

Dr. Kwietniewski in 1898 (5 p. 121) mentions that a new 
species of Leitealia from Spitzbergen, which he describes, possesses 
a similar “ Brutraum” in the body-wall, containing a developing 
embryo, but differing from the species described by Carlgren in 
1893, in having it placed immediately below the parapet in the 
upper part of the column instead of on the lower portion. 

In 1899 Dr. Carlgren (2 p. 14) gave some further particulars, 
but no figures, of “Brutraumen” found in Condylactis georgiana 
from the collection of the German South Polar Expedition of 
1882-83, which he says are of similar character to those he described 
in a Zealia in 1893 (1 p. 234). They extend generally over the 
whole body-wall, are numerous, and contain from one to three 
embryos. Such then is a brief account of the literature’ on brood 
chambers distinct from the ecelenteron, in Actinians. 


1 Dr. Carlgren, in a quite recent paper, published in August, 1901 (2a p. 468), 
gives additional particulars and figures of the specimens mentioned in his “ Vor- 
liufige Mitteilung” (1 p. 281), published in 1893. He here describes these 
specimens under the names of Actinostola sibirica and Epiactis marsupialis, both 
new species. In addition he describes a new genus of Paractid under the name of 
Marsupifer Valdivizx, which possesses six brood pouches arranged radially, and opening 
by separate apertures on the body-wall about two-thirds the height of the column 
from the foot-dise. Each brood chamber contains a large number of embryos, the 
smallest about thirty and the largest about one hundred. An important character 
of this new genus Marsupifer is the presence of two sphincter muscles, one placed 
about the normal position, and the other just above the openings of the brood pouches. 


A ctiniae. 3201 


In both the species from the Antarctic that I have described the 
brood chambers are practically identical, differing only in minor 
details, so that the description here given must be understood to 
apply to both species, unless otherwise noted. Specimens possessing 
brood chambers in these two species may be at once recognised, in 
whatever stage of development they may be in, by the presence of a 
constriction or groove more or less marked, in the body-wall, running 
completely around the animal at a distance from the parapet of 
about one-third in the total height of the column. In addition the 
body-wall above the constriction is more or less wrinkled, and the 
verruce become confused with vermiculate furrows, especially in 
Urticina sulcata, where also the body-wall is thinner than in the 
lower part of the body. In this last-named species, specimens 
having well-developed embryos in the brood chambers have this 
upper thin-walled portion of the column, as well as the oral 
disc and tentacles, withdrawn in the contracted condition to 
the level of the top of the brood chambers. The thinning of the 
body-wall above the invagination constriction is not so noticeable 
in U. carlgreni. 

The earliest phase in the development of the brood chambers that 
I find among these Antarctic specimens shows a series of invagina- 
tions of the body-wall along the line of this constricted zone. The 
invaginations are already considerably advanced and form distinct 
sacs from 2 to 3 mm. deep, projecting on the inside of the body- 
wall into the ccelenteron (fig. 11). They appear to have arisen by 
invaginations of the body-wall corresponding to the mesenteric 
spaces, for, when looked at from below, the lower ends of the inva- 
ginations are seen projecting between the mesenteries. Horizontal 
sections, however, show that the partition walls between adjacent 
invaginations have broken down and the cavities are more or less 
continuous, but extend deeper in the mesenteric spaces. This last 
feature—the sending of prolongations down between the mesen- 
terles—is characteristic of all stages in the development of the 
chambers that I have examined, and suggests their method of 
gradual enlargement. As seen from the figure, which is taken from 
a specimen of U. carlyreni (fig. 11), the chambers are absolutely 
empty and open freely directly to the outside. The walls consist 
of invaginated ectoderm, mesoglcea, and endoderm, which three 
layers are fairly thick, except at the innermost parts, where 
both mesoglea and endoderm are thinned out somewhat, especially 
the former. 

The junction of adjacent cavities appears to go on until there 


302 Southern Cross. 


remains but from four to six larger cavities. Horizontal sections, 
through specimens which exemplify the next stage of development 
of the brood chambers, taken through the animal just below the zone 
of invagination, show at that level several cavities (usually four in 
U. suleata, six in U. carlgreni), filled with compact solid masses, and 
occupying the same relative position as the cavities in the earlier 
stage. Vertical sections passing through the invagination zone show 
these cavities at this stage to be more or less closed to the exterior. 
Figs. 12 and 13 are illustrations of such sections, the former of 
U. carlgreni, the latter of U. suleata. In the former there are 
curious interlacing outgrowths of the mesoglcea carrying the inva- 
ginated ectoderm with them, and in this way a complete closing of 
the brood chamber to the outside world is effected. In the latter 
case, which is taken from the specimen figured (fig. 1), although the 
mouth is closed by the juxtaposition of the invaginated ectoderm, 
there is only very slight indication, at the lower end of what was the 
opening to the chamber, of the interlacing outgrowths of mesogloea 
shown as being present in the U. carlgreni example. It is probable 
that this latter condition is a slightly earlier stage in development. 
Of the two examples figured the brood chamber in U. carlgreni is 
11 mm. deep, while that of U. sulcata is about 6 mm., measured 
from the invagination constriction. The walls are fairly stout, the 
layers being of average strength except at the innermost parts 
where the mesogloea and endoderm appear somewhat thinned out. 
The invaginated ectoderm is formed of tall columnar cells for the 
ereater part, but they become somewhat lower towards the bottom 
of the chamber. 

A series of horizontal sections through the brood chambers illus- 
trates their relation at this stage to the adjacent organs of the body. 
Two of these sections are represented in figs. 14 and 15, which are 
taken through the chamber, the upper part of which is represented 
in vertical section in Fig. 12. Here it is seen that the chamber 
completely severs each mesentery into two parts, passing between 
them on the outer side of the longitudinal muscle. It is interesting 
to notice that although the invaginated endoderm investing the 
brood chamber has already become continuous with the corresponding 
layers of the divided mesenteries, the mesogloal layers have 
not yet so joined, and on the inner side of the brood chamber the 
mesogloea of each mesentery is turned back upon itself, away 
from the mesoglcea investing the brood chamber (fig. 14). Fig. 15 
represents a section of the horizontal series near the bottom of the 
chamber, and shows the same mesenteries; but each is now entire 


A ctiniae. 303 


from body-wall to cesophagus, with lobes of the chamber projecting 
between them. It will be noted from the two sections figured 
that this consecutive series of horizontal sections includes a_ pair 
of directive mesenteries. Each chamber is completely filled with a 
compact mass of rounded cells, exceedingly rich in food yolk and 
measuring from 0°35 to 0*4 mm. in diameter. Usually distinct cell 
membranes are present, but in one specimen examined the limiting 
membrane is very indistinct. I examined three specimens of about 
this stage and find each somewhat different in the character of these 
cells. The difference is mainly in the appearance of the cell mem- 
brane and the greater or lesser granular appearance of the cell 
contents. In one specimen the outer layer of cells abutting on the 
wall of the brood chamber are roughly cuboidal in shape and very 
much freer from food yolk than the more centrally placed cells, 
suggesting a more rapid assimilation of the food yolk into 
protoplasm in these ‘cells. 

I cannot but regard each of these cell masses, notwithstanding 
the relatively enormous size of the constituent cells, as a deve- 
loping embryo. It is known, although considerable uncertainty 
still prevails regarding the earlier developmental processes, that 
in many cases among the Anthozoa cleavage results in the 
formation of a solid morula, and Kowalevsky’s observation (4) on 
Actinia parasitica (Adamsia rondeletii) supports this. He says: 
“Cleavage is regular, but as the result of it there arises not a 
blastodermic vesicle, but only an ageregation of cells, which 
becomes covered with cilia and swims about as a larva.” The 
researches of E, B. Wilson on the development of Renilla (8) show 
that here also a solid morula is formed, consisting of irregularly 
rounded cells, heavily charged with food yolk, and in which at first 
no differentiation exists, but where later an outer layer gradually 
becomes marked off in character by appearing less granular, through 
the conversion of the contained food yolk into protoplasm, and so 
forms the ectoderm. Unfortunately, except the specimen showing a 
slight differentiation of the outer layer of cells, I have found no 
intermediate stages between the condition just described and the 
larva with all the primitive layers formed. 

A specimen of U. suleata possesses four embryos in the brood 
chambers, which may be described as bilaminar, pyriform, or more 
elongated vermiform planule, possessing an ectoderm and an 
endodermic epithelium, with a sustentative lamella (mesoglea) 
secreted between them, but with no trace of cilia so characteristic 
of free-swimming planule. The interior is filled with a dense mass 


304 Southern Cross. 


of food yolk. The embryos are exceedingly irregular in form and lie 
abutting one with the other—the end of one fitting into a socket in the 
adjacent one, and they appear moulded to the contour of the chamber 
by pressure due to the contraction of the mother animal. The 
cavities containing the larvee appear to be continuous one with the 
other at this stage, and thus form a continuous chamber lying in 
the ccelenteron surrounding the cesophagus. The invagination 
opening is still effectually closed to the outside. One of the larve 
when sectionized showed in a longitudinal section the invagination 
to form the cesophageal opening (fig. 16), and transverse sections 
revealed the presence of mesenteries, in an early stage of develop- 
ment, arising from the body-wall and projecting into the solid 
food yolk mass (fig. 17). Near the oral end twelve mesenteries 
representing the first cycle are apparent, and as the sections approach 
the aboral end these gradually increase in size, and between each 
pair there appear slight indications, also in pairs, of the second 
cycle. These larve are from 1 cm. to 1°5 cm. in length and from 
0*5 to 1 cm. in diameter. 

Much older embryos than these, measuring from 1 cm. to 
1:5 cm. in diameter, were found in brood chambers of both 
U. suleata and U. carlgreni. Several of these specimens have 
the brood chambers opening freely to the outside through the 
original invagination opening, the contained embryos evidently 
approaching the stage when they are set free and begin an inde- 
pendent existence. One specimen of U. carlgreni had been killed 
with one of the embryos escaping from the brood chamber (figs. 18 
and 19), others of the contained embryos being also visible. The 
opening extended almost half way round the body and showed 
every appearance of further extension. On sectionizing these 
older embryos they are found to possess three cycles of mesenteries. 
Fig. 20 represents a sixth part of a transverse section through 
an embryo of corresponding age of U. sulcata, including a pair of 
directive mesenteries. As there shown the first cycle of mesenteries 
is complete and the second cycle is well advanced. The longitudinal 
muscles are well developed and already give indication of the 
strength of the adult structures. The parieto-basilar muscle is also 
plainly visible. The third cycle has as yet no indication of muscle- 
structure. From a close examination of the consecutive series of 
sections I can make out the existence of twenty-four tentacles, of 
which six appear to be larger than the others and to be in 
communication with the intra-mesenteric spaces of the first cycle. 
In all the embryos the oral disc and tentacles are entirely retracted 


A ctiniae. 305 


and hidden, as is the case with most of the adult specimens. This 
denotes the presence of an already functional sphincter, a figure 
(fig. 21) of which is shown taken from a longitudinal section as well 
as functional mesenterial muscles. There is little or no food yolk 
now left in the cclenteron, another fact which denotes the early 
approach of a separation from the parent. 

There are thus four distinct stages in the appearance of the brood 
chamber and its contents, represented by the specimens of these two 
Antarctic species. The earliest condition shows the developing 
invagination of the body-wall of the parent, forming cavities from 
2 to 3 mm. in depth, but absolutely void of contents, and freely open 
to the outside through the invagination openings. Then comes the 
second stage, with the chamber considerably increased in size 
(6-11 mm. in depth), completely closed to the outside and now 
containing developing embryos in the solid morula stage. Then 
follows the condition shown by the specimen of U. swlcata (the only 
specimen found illustrating this stage), with the embryos greatly 
advanced in development, possessing a three-layered body-wall, 
developing mesenteries, invagination to form cesophagus, and filled 
with a dense mass of food yolk, but with the brood chamber still 
completely closed to the outside. The fourth and last condition 
shows the embryo just about to be set free, with three cycles of 
mesenteries (one cycle complete), well-developed muscles, twenty-four 
tentacles, all or almost all the food yolk absorbed, and the chamber 
generally freely open to the outside through the original invagination 
opening. From the fact that a specimen of U. carlgreni, containing 
embryos of this last stage in brood chambers open to the outside, 
possesses in addition, between the older brood chambers, a series of 
new invaginations corresponding to the first stage described, there is 
reason to believe that each brood chamber only serves for one 
embryo, and that on its escape the walls of the chamber atrophy and 
new chambers are formed for the next brood. 

Dr. Carlgren (1 p. 237) suggested that possibly the occurrence of 
these special brood chambers may be connected with an external 
fertilization of the ova, but, while not denying the possibility of such 
in these species, there is no evidence in the appearance of either his 
specimens or the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens of any departure from 
the usual internal impregnation. In all probability, after fertilization 
in the body cavity, the eggs in early stages of cleavage are transferred 
directly, by the aid of the tentacles, to the brood chambers, the 
entrances to which are soon afterwards closed. 

From the fact that, so far as yet observed, the possession of these 

x 


306 Southern Cross. 


special brood chambers in Actinians is limited to Arctic and 
Antarctic species, there certainly is reason to believe that some 
common conditions of environment have brought about their 
development. Among Echinoderms, species from Kerguelen Island 
and other points in the southern and northern oceans have been 
shown to possess similar chambers for the protection of the 
developing embryo. But in this group, not only are there in these 
species special nurseries formed, but the embryos themselves 
develop directly, without the intervention of a locomotive pseud- 
embryonic stage, and with no trace of pseudembryonic appendages 
or provisional organs, so characteristic of echinoderm development as 
we are acquainted with it in our own seas. In Sir Wyville 
Thomson’s words (9 p. 245), “It is a significant fact that while in 
warm and temperate seas ‘ plutei’ and ‘bipinnari’ are constantly 
taken in the surface net, in the southern seas they are almost 
entirely absent.” There is therefore some justification for Kwiet- 
niewski’s suggestion (5 p. 122) that the surface ice affects the 
plankton and is especially fatal to free-swimming larvee, and hence 
it becomes necessary that special protection should be provided, so 
that development may take place without free-swimming larval 
stages. But viviparous Actinians, in which the ccelenteron acts 
as a brood chamber, and where the young are only set free when 
they are in a position to at once attach themselves by the muscular 
foot disc, are fairly widely distributed. It is therefore difficult to 
advance a reason why these particular Arctic and Antarctic species 
have not followed the apparently more economical habits of their 
fellows, but have evolved along special lines, and formed brood 
chambers distinct and entirely separated from the ccelenteron. It 
may be that the young in these special chambers are retained for 
a much longer period than would be convenient in the ccelenteron, 
and this, no doubt, is of considerable importance to the species when 
possibly the struggle for existence is severe. 

In conclusion I wish to record my appreciation of the kindness 
of the Committee of the Liverpool Museums in granting me 
permission to use the Museums’ laboratory and apparatus in carrying 
out the work, and to express my thanks to Dr. Forbes, Director of 
Museums, for his cordial co-operation in procuring me access to the 
necessary literature—always a very great difficulty to workers in the 
provinces. 


A ctiniae. 307 


PAPERS REFERRED TO. 


1. Carnne@ReN, OskAR.—‘ Uber das Vorkommen von Brutriitumen bei Aktinien.’ 
(Vorliufige Mitteilung.) Ofversigt k. Vetenskaps Akad. Forh., 1898, Stockholm. 

2. CARLGREN, Oskar.— Ergebnisse den Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammel- 
reise; Zoantharien,’ 1599. 

2a. CARLGREN, OskKAR.—‘ Die Brutpflege der Actiniarien.’? Biol. Centralbl., XXI. 
(190L), p. 468. 

3. Happon, A.—‘ Actiniaria of Torres Straits’ Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc., 
VI., Series 2 (1897). 

4. KowaLevsky, A.—‘ Investigations on the development of Invertebrates’ 
(Russian), Mem. Roy. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sci., Anthrop. and Ethnog., Moscow, 
1873. See Jahresb. Anat. u. Phys., 1875. 

5, Kwirtniewski, Casimir R.—‘ Actiniaria von Ost-Spitzbergen,’ Zoologische 
Jahrbiicher, 1898, p. 121. 

6. Verrinu, A. E.—‘Notes on Radiata. Trans. Conn. Acad.,1., pp. 328 and 492, 
1867-71. 

7. VERRILL, A. He Descriptions of imperfectly known and new Actinians, with 
critical notes on other species.’ 11.—V., American Journal of Science, V1. (1899). 

&. Wirson, BE. B.—‘'The Development of Renilla’ Phil. Trans., London, 
CLXXLV. (1883). 

9. WyvitLe THomson, Sir C.—‘ The Voyage of the “Challenger,” ’ 1877. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


With the exception of figs. 1, 6, 18 and 19, which are represented 
natural size, and the diagrammatic drawing (fig. 8), all the figures 
have been drawn from sections as seen under Swift’s 1-in. obj., 
No. 2 eye-piece, slightly enlarged. The sections were made by the 
Cambridge rocking microtome, from tissues stained in picrocarmine, 
embedded in the usual way, and mounted in Canada balsam. 


LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 


Bete =: = % «= = brood chamber: 

Cfo a ea se ) e ecelenteron. 

@d.. . =. » «. « « « directive mesenteries. 
Cc. uke OS ge se re CChOderm: 

Ce os) Gs ee CMbLYOS: 

Chae ee ees sa endoderm, 

im.ec.. . . + ~~ . imvaginated ectoderm. 
men. . . . . . . imvaginated endoderm. 
m.mg. . . =. . . .,invaginated mesogloa. 
UTA On nn ae) ULV ablon openings 
Eins) =) 2 4) a | .. longitudinal muscle: 
MCS Reve, | & = =, mesenteries. 

Mite fiat 9 eis) li =) ~ moesenterial filaments. 
Gets ge a Wes os) te PRESOB LOCA: 

Mts ens) «64 «+s > muscle lamellex, 


308 Southern Cross. 


OG. s) « «© « a) sy) ge keesOphagie: 

oe.im.. . « «- . ~~  « Oesophageal invagination. 

OD... © ss 8 “ae cP  covarye 

p.b.m . . . . . . parieto-basilar muscle. 

Sek da 1) ol Gee eastphones ygghe 

U. > 2) Se eee SA eeverrice: 

Ys lt Rie ee) ee ood eyollke. 

I, 1, 1L,1V. . . . . cycles of mesenteries or tentacles. 


Puate XLVIII. 
Urticina sulcata. 
Fig. 1.—Reproduction from photograph of young female specimen (natural size), 


showing invagination constriction and well-marked sulcation of body-wall above it. 
F ig. 2 2,—Transverse section of the sphincter muscle. 


Fig. 3.—Transverse section of one of the tentacles. 
Fig. 4.—Longitudinal section of a portion of the body-wall. 


Vig. 5. —Transverse section of mesentery near aboral end, showing the longi- 
tudinal and parieto-basilar muscles. 


Prats XLIX. 
Urticina carlgreni. 


Fig. 6.—Reproduction from photograph (natural size) showing foreign bodies 
still adherent to verruce. 

Fig. 7.—Transverse section of sphincter muscle. 

Fig, 8.—Diagrammatic figure illustrating the arrangements of the cycles of 
tentacles in relation with the intra- and inter- mesenteric spaces. Although the 
tentacles are somewhat larger according to age, the difference in the diameter as 
represented by the circles in the drawing is exaggerated. (‘The same arrangement 
as here depicted pertains in U. sulcata also. ) 

Fig. 9.—Longitudinal section of a portion of the body-wall. 

Fig. 10.—Transverse section of a fertile mesentery. 


Puate L. 
Brood Chambers and Embryos. 


Fig. 11.—Longitudinal or vertical section of body-wall of a specimen of U. carlgreni 
passing through a brood chamber in an early stage of invagination and quite empty. 

Fig. 12.—Longitudinal or vertical section through the ‘body- -wall of a specimen 
of U. carlgrent passing through the opening toa brood chamber of an older stage 
than Fig. 11, containing a developing embryo and closed to the outside. 

Fig. 13.—Similar section through the Senin of U. sulcata, figured (Fig. 1) with 
brood chamber of a little earlier stage to Fig. 12. 


Puate LI. 
Brood Chambers and Embryos. 


Fig. 14.—Transverse or horizontal section of the same specimen as Fig. 12 
CU. caur'lg greni), passing through about the middle of the brood chamber. 

Fig. 15.—Similar section of the same individual, passing through the brood 
chamber near its lower end, showing the prolongation of lobes of the chamber into 
the mesenteric spaces. 


A ctiniae. 309 


Puate LII. 
Brood Chambers and Embryos. 


Fig. 16.—Longitudinal section through larva of U. suleata taken from brood 
chamber. 

Fig. 17.—Transverse section of the same, showing developing mesenteries. 

Fig. 18.—Specimen of U. carlgreni killed with brood chamber open and with an 
embryo escaping. 

Fig. 19.—The same with incision through outer wall of chamber and body-wall. 

Fig. 20.—Transverse section through advanced embr yo of U. sulcata showing 
about one-sixth of the section. 


Fig. 21.—Transverse section through the sphincter muscle of the same. 
) P 


210 Southern Cross. 


XIX Ee ah O77, @ ae 


A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT, 


By EDWARD T. BROWNE, 
University College, London. 


THE ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens arrived whilst I was working through 
a large collection of Medusae made by Mr. R. Vallentin in the 
Falkland Islands. The closeness of these islands to the Antarctic 
Circle led me to make at once a preliminary examination of the 
‘Southern Cross’ Collection to see if the medusoid fauna at Cape 
Adare, where all the specimens had been taken, bore any resemblance 
to the Medusae of the Falklands. I may here say that the Medusae 
of the Falklands are closely related to the Medusae of Great Britain, 
and that the Cape Adare specimens belong to other types. 

It was sad work to open bottle after bottle and to find the 
specimens more or less macerated and often in fragments. Most of 
the specimens are absolutely useless, and only a few show generic 
characters. The collection gives just a glimpse of a rich and most, 
interesting medusoid fauna at Cape Adare, and it is unfortunate that 
more care has not been taken over the preservation and storage. 

Tt is quite probable that most of the specimens looked in excellent 
condition when first preserved, and that the mischief occurred later 
—maceration through not using sufficient formaline or alcohol, and 
fragmentation through not filling up the bottles to the brim and 
excluding air-bubbles. All the bottles contained a large air space, 
and most were only about two-thirds full of fluid. For animals so 
delicate as jelly-fish, using the term in its old and widest sense, it 
is absolutely necessary to reduce air-bubbles to their smallest 
dimensions.